WO2020097579A1 - Display lighting systems with bioactive lighting - Google Patents

Display lighting systems with bioactive lighting Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020097579A1
WO2020097579A1 PCT/US2019/060640 US2019060640W WO2020097579A1 WO 2020097579 A1 WO2020097579 A1 WO 2020097579A1 US 2019060640 W US2019060640 W US 2019060640W WO 2020097579 A1 WO2020097579 A1 WO 2020097579A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
lighting
color
channel
blue
light
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2019/060640
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Raghuram L. V. PETLURI
Paul Kenneth Pickard
Original Assignee
Ecosense Lighting Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from PCT/US2019/013380 external-priority patent/WO2019140327A2/en
Priority claimed from PCT/US2019/013379 external-priority patent/WO2019140326A1/en
Priority claimed from PCT/US2019/013359 external-priority patent/WO2019140309A1/en
Priority claimed from PCT/US2019/013356 external-priority patent/WO2019140306A1/en
Application filed by Ecosense Lighting Inc. filed Critical Ecosense Lighting Inc.
Publication of WO2020097579A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020097579A1/en
Priority to US17/316,398 priority Critical patent/US11783748B2/en
Priority to US17/674,149 priority patent/US12073775B2/en

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • A61N5/0613Apparatus adapted for a specific treatment
    • A61N5/0618Psychological treatment
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/10X-ray therapy; Gamma-ray therapy; Particle-irradiation therapy
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B45/00Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • H05B45/20Controlling the colour of the light
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B47/00Circuit arrangements for operating light sources in general, i.e. where the type of light source is not relevant
    • H05B47/10Controlling the light source
    • H05B47/105Controlling the light source in response to determined parameters
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • A61N2005/065Light sources therefor
    • A61N2005/0651Diodes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • A61N2005/0658Radiation therapy using light characterised by the wavelength of light used
    • A61N2005/0662Visible light

Definitions

  • This disclosure is in the field bioactive digital display devices.
  • the disclosure relates to devices for use in, and methods of, providing bioactive lighting systems for use in bioactive display systems that can provide controllable biological effects.
  • LEDs light emitting diodes
  • Displays for digital content can rely on arrays of pixels that produce individual color points.
  • Displays can be backlit with a white light source, which can be LED-based, and then filtered at the pixel-level to produce colored pixels as desired.
  • a white light source which can be LED-based
  • displays that are not based on backlighting with white light and filtering downstream can include LEDs at the pixel-level that directly emit light at each colored pixel.
  • the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram maps out the hum an color perception in terms of two CIE parameters x and y.
  • the spectral colors are distributed around the edge of the outlined space, which includes all of the hues perceived by the human eye.
  • the boundary line represents maximum saturation for the spectral colors, and the interior portion represents less saturated colors including white light.
  • the diagram also depicts the Planckian locus, also referred to as the black body locus (BBL), with correlated color temperatures, which represents the chromaticity coordinates (i.e., color points) that correspond to radiation from a black-body at different temperatures.
  • BBL black body locus
  • correlated color temperatures which represents the chromaticity coordinates (i.e., color points) that correspond to radiation from a black-body at different temperatures.
  • Illuminants that produce light on or near the BBL can thus be described in terms of their correlated color temperatures (CCT).
  • CCT correlated color temperatures
  • Color rendering index is described as an indication of the vibrancy of tire color of tight being produced by a light source.
  • the CRI is a relative measure of the shift in surface color of an object when lit by a particular lamp as compared to a reference light source, typically either a black-body radiator or the daylight spectrum. The higher the CRI value for a particular light source, the better that the light source renders the colors of various objects it is used to illuminate.
  • Color rendering performance may be characterized via standard metrics known in the art.
  • Fidelity Index (Rf) and the Gamut Index (Rg) can be calculated based on the color rendition of a light source for 99 color evaluation samples (“CES”).
  • the 99 CES provide uniform color space coverage, are intended to he spectral sensitiv ity neutral, and provide color samples that correspond to a variety of real objects.
  • Rf values range from 0 to 100 and indicate the fidelity with which a light source renders colors as compared with a reference illuminant. In practical terms, the Rf is a relative measure of tire shift in surface color of an object when lit by a particular lamp as compared to a reference light source, typically either a black- body radiator or the daylight spectrum .
  • the Gamut Index Rg evaluates how well a light source saturates or desaturates the 99 CES compared to the reference source
  • LEDs have the potential to exhibit very high power efficiencies relative to conventional incandescent or fluorescent lights. Most LEDs are substantially monochromatic light sources that appear to emit light having a single color. Thus, the spectral power distribution of the light emitted by most LEDs is tightly centered about a“peak” wavelength, which is the single wavelength where the spectral power distribution or“emission spectrum” of the LED reaches its maximum as detected by a photo-detector LEDs typically have a full-width half-maximum wavelength range of about 10 nm to 30 nm, comparatively narrow with respect to the broad range of visible light to the human eye, which ranges from approximately from 380 nm to 800 nm.
  • lighting systems that include two or more LEDs that each emit a light of a different color.
  • the different colors combine to produce a desired intensity and/or color of white light.
  • the resulting combined light may appear white, or nearly white, depending on, for example, the relative intensities, peak wavelengths and spectral power distributions of the source red, green and blue LEDs.
  • the aggregate emissions from red, green, and blue LEDs typically provide poor color rendering for general illumination applications due to the gaps in the spectral power distribution in regions remote from the peak wavelengths of the LEDs.
  • White light may also be produced by utilizing one or more luminescent materials such as phosphors to convert some of the light emited by one or more LEDs to light of one or more other colors.
  • the combination of the light emitted by the LEDs that is not converted by the luminescent material(s) and the light of other colors that are emitted by the luminescent material(s) may produce a white or near-white light.
  • LED lamps have been provided that can emit white light with different CCT values within a range.
  • Such lamps utilize two or more LEDs, with or without luminescent materials, with respective drive currents that are increased or decreased to increase or decrease the amount of light emitted by each LED.
  • control ably altering the power to the various LEDs in the lamp, the overall light emitted can be tuned to different CCT values.
  • the range of CCT values that can be provided with adequate color rendering values and efficiency is limited by the selection of LEDs.
  • the spectral profiles of light emitted by white artificial lighting can impact circadian physiology, alertness, and cognitive performance levels.
  • Bright artificial light can be used in a number of therapeutic applications, such as in the treatment of seasonal affective disorder (SAD), certain sleep problems, depression, jet lag, sleep disturbances in those with Parkinson’s disease, die health consequences associated with shift work, and the resetting of the human circadian clock.
  • Artificial lighting may change natural processes, interfere with melatonin production, or disrupt the circadian rhythm. Blue light may have a greater tendency than other colored light to affect living organisms through the disruption of their biological processes which can rely upon natural cycles of daylight and darkness. Exposure to blue light late in the evening and at night may be detrimental to one’s health. Some blue or royal blue light within lower wavelengths can have hazardous effects to human eyes and skin, such as causing damage to the retina.
  • the present disclosure provides bioactive display- methods, systems and devices for providing bioactive illumination while displaying digital content including one or more LED-based lighting channels adapted to generate a circadian stimulating energy (CSE) of a circadian-inducing blue light output in a first operational mode; a less-circadian-inducing blue light output in a second operational mode; and, a long red near infrared energy (LRNE) output in a third operating mode.
  • CSE circadian stimulating energy
  • LRNE long red near infrared energy
  • the circadian-inducing bine light has a first circadian-stimulating energy characteristic related to an associated first spectral power distribution of light generated in the first operational mode.
  • the less-circadian-inducing blue light output has a second circadian-stimulating energy- characteristic related to an associated second spectral power distribution of light generated in the second operational mode.
  • the present disclosure provides bioactive display- methods, systems and devices for providing bioactive illumination while displaying digital content including one or more LED-based lighting channels adapted to generate a circadian stimulating energy (CSE) of a circadian-inducing blue light output in a first operational mode; a less-circadian-inducing blue light output in a second operational mode; and, a long red near infrared energy (LRNE) output in a third operating mode.
  • CSE circadian stimulating energy
  • LRNE long red near infrared energy
  • the LRNE is in the non-visible spectrum.
  • the LRNE is in both the visible and the non-visible spectrum.
  • the LED-based lighting channels provide the individual pixels in a pixel array of the display system.
  • the individual pixels are provided as microLED pixels or OLED pixels.
  • different combinations of different types of pixels are used in the first operational mode and second operational mode.
  • the LED-based lighting channels provide one or more white light sources for a backlighting system in the display system.
  • the one or more white light sources are provided as white lighting channels comprising an LED and an associated luminophoric medium that a produce a combined white light at a white color point within ⁇ 7 DUV of the Planckian locus on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram.
  • the display system comprises two or more white lighting channels, with a first white lighting channel used in the first operational mode and a second white lighting channel used in the second operational mode.
  • the first operational mode is a blue light output and the second operational mode is a LRNE red light output.
  • the first operational mode is a circadian stimulating energy blue light output and the second operational mode is a LRNE red light output.
  • the LED-based lighting channels provide one or more white light sources for a backlighting system in the display system .
  • the one or more white light sources are provided as white lighting channels comprising an LED and an associated iuminophoric medium that a produce a combined white light at a white color point within ⁇ 7 DUV of the Planckian locus on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram.
  • the display system comprises two or more white lighting channels, with a first white lighting channel used in the fi rst operational mode and a second white lighting channel used in the second operational mode and each of the plurality of lighting channels comprises an LED and an associated Iuminophoric medium that produce a combined light at a color point, with the combinations of the plurality of lighting channels producing combined white light at a white color points within ⁇ 7 DUV of the Pl anckian locus on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram
  • the bioactive display generates a circadian- inducing blue light output in a first operational mode and a less-circadian-inducing blue light output in a second operational mode.
  • a control system controls the display system based on external information.
  • the external information comprises one or more of seasonal lighting conditions, weather, climate, collective mood indicators, analyses of social network data, and the like.
  • the external information comprises one or more collective mood indicators selected from the group consisting of stock market data, news feeds, and sentiment indices.
  • the control includes controlling the display system based on data harvested from sensors in a lighting installation environment in proximity to the display system.
  • control includes controlling the display system based on data from one or more sensors that reflect information about one or more users in proximity to the display system.
  • control includes utilizing data from one or more sensors comprise one or more of physiological sensors, sensors on various devices used by the one or more users, and ambient sensors.
  • the one or more sensors are configured to sense one or more of temperature, pressure, ambient lighting conditions, localized lighting conditions, lighting spectrum characteristics, humidity, UV light, sound, particles, pollutants, gases, radiation, location of objects or items, and motion.
  • physiological sensors comprise one or more wearable devices incorporated in armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, or clothing.
  • control m ethods include the physiol ogical sensors configured to sense one or more of a person' s temperature, blood pressure, heart rate, oxygen saturation, activity type, activity level, galvanic skin response, respirator ⁇ ' rate, cholesterol level (including HDL, LDL and triglyceride), hormone or adrenal levels (e.g., Cortisol, thyroid, adrenaline, melatonin, and others), histamine levels, immune system characteristics, blood alcohol levels, drug content, macro and micro nutrients, mood, emotional state, alertness, and sleepiness.
  • the bioactive display generated one or more of CSE and LRNE in a first or second operational mode.
  • aspects of various control systems and methods as discussed herein may comprise: a plurality of light emiting device outputting a first circadian stimulating energy (CSE); at least one external device receiving feedback comprising information associated with at least one of the semiconductor light emitting devices and the first CSE; and a master device in communication with the plurality of semiconductor light emitting devices, the master device configured to adjust a parameter on at least one of the plurality of semiconductor light emiting devices based on the feedback, and cause the at least one semiconductor light emitting devices to emit a second CSE.
  • CSE circadian stimulating energy
  • tire external device may be a display system, wherein the display system comprises: one or more LED-based lighting channels adapted to generate a circadian-inducing blue light output in a first operational mode; a less-circadian-inducing blue light output in a second operational mode; and a long red near infrared energy (LRNE) output m a third operating mode.
  • the LRNE may be in at least one of the visible and the non-visible spectrum.
  • the one external device is a mobile device, a wearable device, a sensor, a panel system, a lighting device, and a computing system.
  • the external device may be configured to sense one or more of temperature, pressure, ambient lighting conditions, localized lighting conditions, lighting spectrum characteristics, humidity, UV light, sound, particles, pollutants, gases, radiation, location on of objects or items, and motion.
  • the wearable device is incorporated in at least one of armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, or clothing.
  • the one or more external devices are configured to sense one or more of a person' s temperature, blood pressure, heart rate, oxygen saturation, activity type, activity level, galvanic skin response, respiratory rate, cholesterol level (including HDL, LDL and triglyceride), hormone or adrenal levels (eg., Cortisol, thyroid, adrenaline, melatonin, and others), histamine levels, immune system characteristics, blood alcohol levels, drug content, macro and micro nutrients, mood, emotional state, alertness, and sleepiness.
  • the feedback is indicative of information relating to at least one of light, motion, temperature, environment, physiological data, usage patterns, user feedback, and location.
  • the master device is at least one of a mobile device, a wearable device, and a computing device, and may be configured to receive user input. Additionally, the parameter may be associated with lighting control based on at least one of physiological factors, health conditions, emotional states, user mood, and user input.
  • the master device may also be in communication with the plurality of semiconductor light emitting devices through one or more of a wired network, a wireless network, and Bluetooth communication.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure
  • FIG. 2 illustrates aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of lighting systems therein;
  • FIGS 3a, 3b, 3c, and 3d illustrates aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including spectral power distributions for some exemplary lighting channels;
  • FIG. 4 illustrates aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure
  • FIG 5 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by componen ts of the devices;
  • FIG 6 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
  • FIG. 7 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
  • FIG. 8 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
  • FIG. 9 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the de vices;
  • FIG. 10 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
  • FIG. 11 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
  • FIG. 12 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
  • FIG. 13 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral pow3 ⁇ 4r distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
  • FIG. 14 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the devices
  • FIG. 15 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color points for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIG. 16 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B illustrate some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIG. 18 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure in comparison with some prior art and some theoretical light sources, including some light characteristics of white light generated by display systems in various operational modes;
  • FIG. 19 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIG. 20 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIG. 21 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIGS. 22A-22B illustrate some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIG. 23 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIG. 24 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems
  • FIG. 25 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems
  • FIG. 26 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIG. 27 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems.
  • FIG. 28 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems.
  • FIG. 29 illustrates some aspects of light emitting devices according to the present disclosure, including aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates some aspects of light emitting devices according to the present disclosure, including aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices.
  • FIG. 31 illustrates some aspects of light emitting devices according to the present disclosure, including aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices.
  • FIG. 32 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIG. 33 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIG. 34 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIG. 35 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
  • FIG. 36 depicts aspects of control of the bioactive illumination
  • FIG. 37 is a block diagram of computing systems and methods of control of bioactive illumination
  • FIG. 38 is an overview of a bioactive illumination control systems and methods
  • FIG. 39 illustrates some aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of display systems according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 40 illustrates some aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of display systems according to the present disclosure
  • FIG. 41 illustrates some aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of display systems according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 42 illustrates some aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of display systems according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 43 illustrates some aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of display systems according to the present disclosure.
  • Wien a range of values is expressed, another exemplar includes from the one particular value and/or to the other particular value.
  • values are expressed as approximations, by use of the antecedent“about,” it will he understood that the particular value forms another exemplar. All ranges are inclusive and combmabie.
  • the term“circadian-stimulating energy characteristics” refers to any characteristics of a spectral power distribution that may have biological effects on a subject in some aspects, the circadian-stimulating energy characteristics of aspects of the lighting systems of this disclosure can include one or more of CS, CLA, EML, BLH, CER, CAP, LEE, circadian power, circadian flux, and the relative amount of power within one or more particular wavelength ranges. Circadian-stimulating energy may be referred to as“CSE”
  • CSE therapy The application of CSE to biological systems in doses, amount, aliquots and volumes may be referred to as CSE therapy.
  • Exposure to blue light including CSE affects various bio- physiological and psychological functions of the human body and may be called “bioactive”. Many of these effects are beneficial. For instance, a region of what is commonly called the blue wavelength region of light may improve memory performance and cognitive function. Exposure to blue wavelength light during memory consolidation has been shown to improve subsequent delayed memory recall when compared to placebo wavelength light exposure. Alkozei, A., Smith R., Dailey N.S., Baja] S , & Killgore W.D.S. (2017). Acute Exposure to a quantity, volume, aliquot or dose of a specific Blue Wavelength Light During Memory Consolidation Improves Verbal Memory Performance. PLoS ONE 12(9), 1-11.
  • blue wavelength light may decrease blood pressure, increase blood flow, and improve overall endothelial function.
  • Full body irradiation with blue light has been shown to promote release nitric oxide from the skin into circulating blood.
  • systolic blood pressure and vascular resistance have been shown to decrease.
  • Blue Light Hazard is a known risk and the measure of BLH provides a measure of potential for a photochemical induced retinal injury that results from radiation exposure. Such exposure is one factor which has been linked to photoreceptor damage. It has been reported that the blue light appears to decrease Adenosine Triphosphate (ATP) energy production in retinal ganglion cells. This has a negative effect on mitochondrial function and oxidative stress which has been shown to decrease survival of ganglion cells. Tosini, G., Ferguson, I., & Tsubota, K. (2016). Effects of Blue Light on the Circadian System and Eye
  • Blue light is not the only light in the visible spectrum that can be used to affect bio-physiological functions and/or psychological functions (also referred to herein as“bioactive”) of the human body.
  • therapy which may include doses of long red and near-IR: Long Red typically with a spectrum of > 625 nms to ⁇ 700 nms with peak wavelengths > 640 - 670nm and Near- Infrared typical ranges from >700 nms and ⁇ 1400nm (with typical peak wavelengths: 850nm, 94Gnm, 1064nm) may affect bio-physiological functions and are also described herein as“bioactive” they may improve eye health, skin health, hair growth, and cognitive function.
  • Tire spectral sensitivity corresponding to the human eye can be considered to be based on the color-matching functions of the 1931 Standard Observer (XYZ tristimulus values for CIE 1931 2° color-matching), which show that the effect of light above 700 nm on color perception to be substantially negligible. In other words, it will have no significant impact on the overall (ccx, cey) color point on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram of emitted light from a lighting system .
  • LEO Long Red and Near-Infrared Energy
  • LRNE is encompasses the entirety of both long red and near-infrared.
  • LRNE may be beneficial by reducing, limiting, counteracting or ameliorating some of the negative effects associated with excessive blue light exposure.
  • Disclosed herein are methods and systems to provide therapeutic doses of LRNE either to address a biological condition or as a prophylactic or health supplement means to limit or prevent at least one of an emotional, neurological, immune, and biological condition or system J“Bioactive Exposure ” refers to one or both of LRNE and CSE and directing at least one of LRNE and CSE at a biological system which may be a specific organ or any part of the body.
  • the Bioactive Exposure may be controlled by a control system (described herein, see e.g., FIG. 38 whereby at least one controller, e.g., a computing device receives inputs including fixed, variable and dynamically changing from a variety of sources and the processor associated with the system and method applies at least one of LRNE and CSE in accordance with said control system.
  • Control input data is at least one of input by: users, server, database, derived from a decisioning engine and collected by at least one sensor.
  • the inputs are provided to a processor via signal communication.
  • the processor may be local to the therapeutic device, remote from the therapeutic device or the processing may take place both locally and remote from the therapeutic device.
  • Control systems disclosed herein may adjust the amount and timing of aliquots of bioactive Exposure.
  • the control of aliquots and frequency in response to input may be used to dynamically adjust the therapeutic or health supplement application of one or more of CSE and LRNE to users.
  • Dynamic adjustment of Bioactive Exposure to a user may be viewed as personalized whereby data harvested from sensors in the lighting installation environment as well as sensors that reflect information about users, such as one or more of physiological sensors (including wearable devices, such as armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, clothing, and the like), sensors on various devices used by a user, ambient sensors, and the like.
  • the control system may have modules within the platform which may connect to or integrate with data sources of information about users as described below.
  • Tire frequency of the ERNE and CSE are controllable and the range of emission spans constant on to micro-pulses of less than a tenth of a second.
  • Light pulses can be used to provide Bioactive Exposure. Such pulse may have a duration of less than 100 ms, with a frequency between 10 Hz and 0.5 mHz and have been shown to have a bioactive effect, such pulses may vary from a single pulse up to 400,000 pulses.
  • LRNE can reduce acute and chronic inflammation by increasing blood flow to damaged tissues.
  • LRNE may be applied to increase natural collagen production, resulting in younger, healthier looking skin. Rats that were exposed to doses of LRN experienced an increase in collagen synthesis and neoformed bone. Brassoiiatti, P. et al . (2016). Photobiomodulation on Critical Bone Defects of Rat Calvaria: A Systematic Review.
  • LRN therapy Low-level Laser (Light) Therapy (LLLT) in Skin: Stimulating, healing, Restoring. Semin Cutan Medical Surgery (32)(1), 41-52.
  • LRNE therapy may be used in conjunction with or as an alternative treatment to hormone regulating drugs typically used to treat hair loss.
  • LRNE exposure has been shown to be a treatment in terms of hair regrowth. Gupta, A.K., Mays, et al. (2016). Efficacy of Non-Surgical Treatments for Androgenetic Alopecia: A Systematic Review and Network Meta- Analysis. Journal of The European Academy of Dermatology and Venereology 32(12), 2112-2125. Research has also demonstrated that LRNE exposure may lead to improved cognitive function with few side effects.
  • E. LRNE therapy may 7 be able to counteract, limit or ameliorate the negative effects from excessive CSE and blue light exposure.
  • Wren humans absorb natural blue light from the sun, they also absorb natural red light from the sun— together the two provide numerous health benefits.
  • an overload of artificial blue light such as CSE by itself may be determinantal. This damage can be mitigated through LRN exposure. Balancing and/or controlling an exposure of both artificial blue light and LRNE support wellness benefits similar to those that flow from natural, sunlight exposure.
  • the 1931 C1E Chromaticity diagram is a two-dimensional chromaticity space in which every visible color is represented by a point having x- and y-coordinates, also referred to herein as (ccx, ccy) coordinates. Fully saturated (monochromatic) colors appear on the outer edge of the diagram, while less saturated colors (which represent a combination of wavelengths) appear on the interior of the diagram.
  • saturated means having a purity of at least 85%, the term“purity” having a well-known meaning to persons skilled in the art, and procedures for calculating purity' being well-known to those of skill in the art.
  • the Planckian locus, or black body locus (BBL) is known to those of skill in the art and follows the color an incandescent black body would take in the chromaticity space as the temperature of the black body changes from about 1000K to 10,000 K. Hie black body locus goes from deep red at low temperatures (about 1000 K) through orange, yellowish white, white, and finally bluish white at very high temperatures.
  • the temperature of a black body radiator corresponding to a particular color in a chromaticity space is referred to as the“correlated color temperature.”
  • CCT correlated color temperature
  • white light generally refers to light having a chromaticity point that is within a 10-step MacAdam ellipse of a point on the black body locus having a CCT between 2700K and 6500K.
  • white light can refer to light having a chromaticity point that is within a seven step MacAdam ellipse of a point on the black body locus having a CCT between 27Q0K and 6500K.
  • the distance from the black body locus can be measured in the CIE 1960 chromaticity diagram, and is indicated by the symbol Diin, or DUV or duv as referred to elsewhere herein.
  • the DUV is denoted by a positive number; if the chromaticity point is below' the locus, DUV is indicated with a negative number. If the DUV is sufficiently positive, the light source may appear greenish or yellowish at the same CCT. If tire D UV is sufficiently negative, the light source can appear to be purple or pinkish at the same CCT.
  • Observers may prefer light above or below the Planckian locus for particular CCT values, and light above or below' the Planckian locus may be more or less suitable for use in displaying digital content on display systems in different settings or operational modes
  • DUV calculation methods are well known by those of ordinary skill in the art and are more fully described in ANSI C78.377, American National Standard for Electric Lamps— Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting (SSL) Products, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety for all purposes.
  • the CIE Standard Illuminant D65 illuminant is intended to represent average daylight and has a CCT of approximately 6500K and the spectral power distribution is described more fully in Joint ISO/CIE Standard, ISO
  • color points described in the present disclosure can be within color-point ranges defined by geometric shapes on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram that enclose a defined set of ccx, ccy color coordinates. It should be understood that any gaps or openings in any described or depicted boundaries for color-point ranges should be closed with straight lines to connect adjacent endpoints in order to define a closed boundary for each color-point range.
  • Tire light emitted by a light source may be represented by a point on a chromaticity diagram, such as the 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram, having color coordinates denoted (ccx, ccy) on the X-Y axes of the diagram.
  • a region on a chromaticity diagram may represent light sources having similar chromaticity coordinates.
  • the ability of a light source to accurately reproduce color in illuminated objects can be characterized using the color rendering index (“CRI”), also referred to as the CIE Ra value.
  • CIE color rendering index
  • the Ra value of a light source is a modified average of the relative measurements of how the color rendition of an illumination system compares to that of a reference black -body radiator or daylight spectrum when illuminating eight reference colors R1-R8.
  • the Ra value is a relative measure of the shift in surface color of an object when lit by a particular lamp.
  • the Ra value equals 100 if the color coordinates of a set of test colors being illuminated by the illumination system are the same as the coordinates of the same test colors being irradiated by a reference light source of equivalent CCT.
  • the reference iiluminants used in the CRI calculation procedure are the SPDs of blackbody radiators; for CCTs above 5000K, imaginary SPDs calculated from a mathematical model of daylight are used. These reference sources were selected to approximate incandescent lamps and daylight, respectively. Daylight generally has an Ra value of nearly 100, incandescent bulbs have an Ra value of about 95, fluorescent lighting typically has an Ra value of about 70 to 85, while monochromatic light sources have an Ra value of essentially zero. Light sources for general illumination applications with an Ra value of less than 50 are generally considered very poor and are typically only used in applications where economic issues preclude other alternatives. The calculation of CIE Ra values is described more fully in Commission Internationale de 1'Eclairage. 1995. Technical Report: Method of Measuring and Specifying Colour Rendering Properties of Light Sources, CIE No. 13.3-1995.
  • a light source can also be evaluated based on a measure of its ability to render a saturated red reference color R9, also known as test color sample 9 (“TCS09”), with the R9 color rendering value (“R9 value”).
  • R9 value a measure of ability to render additional colors R10-R15, which include realistic colors like yellow , green, blue, Caucasian skin color (R13), tree leaf green, and Asian skin color (R15), respectively.
  • Light sources can further be evaluated by calculating the gamut area index (‘GAT ).
  • Gamut area index is calculated by dividing the gamut area formed by the light source with the gamut area formed by a reference source using the same set of colors that are used for CRI.
  • GAI uses an Equal Energy Spectrum as the reference source rather than a black body radiator.
  • a gamut area index related to a black body radiator (“GAIBB”) can be calculated by using the gamut area formed by the blackbody radiator at the equivalent CCT to the light source.
  • TM-30-15 The ability of a light source to accurately reproduce color in illuminated objects can be characterized using the metrics described in IBS Method for Evaluating Light Source Color Rendition Illuminating Engineering Society, Product ID; TM-30-15 (referred to herein as the“TM-30-15 standard”), which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety for all purposes.
  • the TM-30-15 standard describes metrics including the Fidelity Index (Rf) and the Gamut Index (Rg) that can be calculated based on the color rendition of a light source for 99 color evaluation samples (“CES”).
  • the 99 CES provide uniform color space coverage, are intended to be spectral sensitivity neutral, and provide color samples that correspond to a variety of real objects.
  • Rf values range from 0 to 100 and indicate the fidelity with which a light source renders colors as compared with a reference illuminant.
  • Rg values provide a measure of the color gamut that the light source provides relative to a reference illuminant. The range of Rg depends upon the Ilf value of the light source being tested.
  • the reference illuminant is selected depending on the CCT. For CCT values less than or equal to 4500K, Planckian radiation is used. For CCT values greater than or equal to 55QQK, CIE Daylight illuminant is used. Between 4500K and 5500K a proportional mix of Planckian radiation and the CIE Daylight illuminant is
  • the values of CLA are scaled such that an incandescent source at 2856K (known as CIE Illuminant A) which produces 1000 lux (visual lux) will produce 1000 units of circadian lux (CLA).
  • CS values are transformed CLA values and correspond to relative melotonian suppression after one hour of light exposure for a 2.3 mm diameter pupil during the mid-point of melotonian production. CS is calculated from .
  • the calculation of CLA is more folly described in Rea et al.,“Modelling the spectral sensitivity of the human circadian system,” Lighting Research and Technology, 2011: 0: 1-12, and Figueiro et al,“Designing with Circadian Stimulus”, October 2016, LD+A Magazine,
  • EML Equivalent Melanopic Lux
  • Melanopic lux is weighted to a photopigment with Linax 480 nm with pre-receptoral filtering based on a 32 year old standard observer, as described more fully in the Appendix A, Supplementary Data to Lucas et al. (2014), User Guide: Irradiance Toolbox (Oxford 18 th October 2013), University of Manchester, Lucas Group, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety for all purposes.
  • EML values are shown in the tables and Figures herein as the ratio of melanopic lux to luminous flux, with luminous flux considered to he 1000 lumens. It can be desirable for biological effects on users to provide illumination having higher EML in the morning, but lower EML in tire late afternoon and evening.
  • Blue Light Hazard provides a measure of potential for a photochemical induced retinal injury that results from radiation exposure.
  • Blue Light Hazard is described in IEC/EN 62471, Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems and Technical Report IEC/TR 62778: Application of IEC 62471 for the assessment of blue light hazard to light sources and luminaires, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety for all purposes
  • a BLH factor can be expressed in (weighted power/lux) in units of pW/cm 2 /lux.
  • the present disclosure relates to lighting devices and methods to provide light having particular vision energy and circadian energy performance.
  • Many figures of merit are known m the art, some of which are described in Ji Hye Oh, Su Ji Yang and Young Rag Do,“Healthy, natural, efficient and tunable lighting: four-package white LEDs for optimizing the circadian effect, color quality and vision performance,”
  • Light: Science & Applications (2014) 3: el4l-el49 which is incorporated herein in its entirety, including supplementary information, for all purposes.
  • Luminous efficacy of radiation (“LER”) can be calculated from the ratio of the luminous flux to the radiant flux (S( . )).. i.e. the spectral power distribution of the light source being evaluated, with the following equation:
  • circadian refers to biolumens, units for measuring circadian flux, also known as circadian lumens.
  • the term“1m” refers to visual lumens.
  • U(l) is the photopie spectral luminous efficiency function and C(X) is the circadian spectral sensitivity function.
  • the calculations herein use the circadian spectral sensitivity function, C(2), from Gall et al. Proceedings of the CIE Symposium 2004 on Light and Health: Non-Visual
  • a scaled relative measure denoted as melatonin suppressing milliwatts per hundred lumens may be obtained by dividing the photopic lumens by 100.
  • the melatonin suppression index (MSI) of a light source can be calculated from the ratio of the integration of cross product constant lumen spectrum of lamp with melatonin suppression action spectrum in wavelength range 380 nm to 780 nm to the integration of cross product of constant lumen spectrum of Day light spectrum at 6500K w ith melatonin suppression action spectrum in 380 nm to 780 nm region.
  • the function melatornn suppression action spectrum,“MS AS” or M(l), is defined by Thapan K,“An action spectrum for melatonin suppression: evidence for a novel non rod, non-cone photoreceptor system in humans”, Journal of Physiology, 2001, 535: 261 -267, which is incorporated herein for all purposes
  • COI cyanosis observation index
  • COI is a dimensionless number and is calculated from the spectral power distribution of the light source. Hie COI value is calculated by calculating the color difference between blood viewed under tire test light source and viewed under the reference lamp (a 4000 K Planckian source) for 50% and 100% oxygen saturation and averaging the results. The lower the value of COI, the smaller the shift in color appearance results under illumination by the source under consideration.
  • TLCI-2012 Television Lighting Consistency Index
  • TLCI Television Lighting Consistency Index
  • the TLCI compares the test light source to a reference luminaire, which is specified to be one whose chromaticity falls on either the Planckian or Daylight locus and having a color temperature which is that of the CCT of the test light source. If the CCT is less than 3400 K, then a Planckian radiator is assumed. If tire CCT is greater than 5000 K, then a Daylight radiator is assumed.
  • aspects of the present inventions relate to display systems that are adapted to produce and display color(s) at the pixel level that can he used to help in inducing and/or regulating a circadian rhythm cycle in a person looking at the displays or otherwise proximate the display.
  • the display systems may be computer displays or television displays.
  • the lighting system for the display systems pixels may be arranged to produce colors of the pixels in the display that effect the circadian rhythm over the course of time.
  • the lighting system may be adapted to generate a circadian stimulating energy (CSE) blue frequency of light (e.g. cyan, energy at and/or near 485nm) that causes activity associated with‘waking’ the person through the circadian cycle (e.g.
  • CSE circadian stimulating energy
  • the lighting system may further be adapted with two or more separate blue frequencies such that either or both may be used to generate the blue in the pixels of the display.
  • One of the blue frequencies may be a standard blue color (e.g. substantial energy around approximately 450nm, a narrow- band emission around approximately 450nm) such that the display pixel generates standard display colors and another blue frequency may be a circadian-inducing blue (e.g.
  • the display pixel colors can be changed from standard colors to represent colors accurately, according to display color standards, to display colors that are similar but not necessarily standard colors to generate an effect of the person’s circadian rhythm.
  • the non-standard blue pixels may not be standard and may not display computer generated content in accordance with a standard color pallet, in many situations the colors may be acceptable by a user because the colors may still be acceptable while also inducing a circadian rhythm to awaken the person while using the display in the special color mode.
  • the CSE blue may have significant energy at a longer wavelength than the typical blue used in a display.
  • the inventors have appreciated that longer wavelengths in the blue and cyan regions (e.g. wavelengths between the typical display blue and typical display green) can be used to both generate acceptable colors in the computer-generated content and also have a greater effect on a person’s circadian rhythm.
  • the energy may be provided in a narrow band (e.g. a typical LED narrow band emission spectra with a maximum energy between 460nm and SOQnm, 460nm and 480nm, 470nm and 480nm, or 490nm and 500nm).
  • the energy may be more broadly spread (e.g.
  • the maximum energy may or may not fall within the 460nm to 500nm region.
  • the peak may be at or near the typical display blue of 450nm and also have significant energy in the 460nm to 500nm region.
  • the significant energy may be an intensity of more than 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, or 50% of the maximum energy. That significant energy may' fall within the regions of 460 and 470nm, 470nm and 480nm, or 490nm and 500nm for example.
  • a computer display may include a micro-LED array where the micro-LED array includes a pixel array formed of micro-LEDs including red, green and blue generating LEDs.
  • the blue LED may be a circadian rhythm inducing blue LED (as described herein). If only three colors are arranged in the pixel array, the circadian- inducing blue for the pixel may not fall within the standard color gamut for the display but will generally generate acceptable colors while effecting the circadian rhythm.
  • the pixel array includes two different color generating blue LEDs, one with a standard color for the display and one that may not be within the standard color gamut for display but that is adapted to affect the arcadian rhythm to induce a waking effect.
  • the computer display includes only a portion of micro-LEDs with the circadian rhythm effecting blue.
  • the micro- LED pixels may be built with different color generating LEDs, white LEDs with filters, LEDs with phosphors, etc.
  • the CSE blue microLED may have a narrow emission characteristic where substantially all of the energy is produced over 120nm or so and having a full width at half maximum (FWHM) of about 40 nm
  • Figure 3a illustrates and example spectral power distribution of such a microLED.
  • the circadian-inducing blue microLED may have a broader emission characteristic.
  • Figure 3c illustrates one such example spectral power distribution.
  • the broader emission may be developed by adding a phosphor to the microLED system, by using a number of narrow band emission microLEDs, etc.
  • a filter may be associated with the microLED.
  • the desired blue color point may include an emission band that is broader than is achievable through a single narrow emission microLED so a phosphor or multiple narrow band LEDs may be used to broaden the emission and then a filter may be used to cut the broader emission down to the desired amount.
  • a standard color computer display rnay use a blue LED with a narrow emission characteristic, such as is illustrated in figure 3b.
  • the standard blue may he replaced with a broader band blue, such as is illustrated in figure 3d, to add some cyan to the emission (i .e slightly longer wavelength energy).
  • This configuration may also include a filter to cut the long tail but maintain some emission m the circadian blue emission region.
  • an LCD backlit display has a backlight that generates a broadband of colors (e.g. white LEDs, white fluorescent) or one that generates narrow bands of color (e.g. red, green, and blue LEDs).
  • a broadband of colors e.g. white LEDs, white fluorescent
  • narrow bands of color e.g. red, green, and blue LEDs.
  • the backlight is a broadband white LED based system and each pixel of the LCD array is associated with a colored filter (e.g. red, green and blue) to produce the full color gamut for each pixel of the display.
  • the LCD pixel array includes filters to produce three colors per pixel based on a backlighting system that produces white light.
  • Tire pixel filters filter the white light into red, green and blue.
  • the backlight also generally produces a constant amount of light and the LCD’s at each sub pixel color are changed to regulate the intensity of the color of the sub pixel (e.g. 256 steps based on a polarization setting at the sub pixel level).
  • the blue filter is adapted to transmit light that is more effective at effecting the circadian rhythm (e.g. 485nm).
  • each pixel includes a fourth filter for a fourth sub pixel color.
  • the fourth pixel uses a circadian blue pass filter such that light transmitting the sub pixel filter effects the circadian cycle in a more significant way than light passing through a standard blue filter in the pixel array.
  • the display may be set to use one and/or the other color of blue to form the blue in the pixels.
  • the backlight produces red, green and blue in a sequence and only one LCD is used per pixel position such that the one LCD will turn on in sequence with the desired corresponding required color for the pixel.
  • the sequential lighting system may than include a circadian-inducing blue color to affect the circadian rhythm.
  • the sequential lighting system may further include two different colors of blue (e.g. standard blue and circadian blue) and the sequence cycles through all four colors.
  • the circadian blue color may or may not be included in every cycle of the sequence. Reducing the number of cycles involves may have an effect on the perceived combined color of the pixel and of the effect of the circadian rhythm.
  • the backlight may be modified to include enhanced emission at the circadian blue region.
  • a cyan LED may be included in the backlight itself such that it produces enough emission in the circadian blue region that it can generate adequate color for display and effect on the person’s circadian rhythm.
  • the backlight may include a broadband emission source (e.g. as illustrated in figure 3c) or a narrow emission source (e.g. as illustrated in figure 3a) for this purpose.
  • the filter associated with the circadian blue pixels can then be adjusted to transmit the desired bandwidth of light in the region.
  • the backlights used in a display do not produce much emission in this desired region so changing the lighting system to include more emission in this region may be desirable.
  • a computer display may include an OLED pixel array where the OLED array includes a pixel array fonned of OLED sub pixels.
  • the OLEDs may include red, green and blue generating OLEDs.
  • the OLEDs may produce white light and include filters to pass only the particular color desired for the sub pixel.
  • the blue OLED or filter may be adapted to produce a circadian rhythm inducing blue color. If only three colors are arranged in the pixel array, the blue for the pixel may not fall within the standard color for the display but wall generally generate acceptable colors while effecting the circadian rhythm.
  • the pixel array may include two different color blue OLEDs, one with a standard color for the display and one that may not be within the standard color gamut for display but that is adapted to affect the circadian rhythm wake cycle. This arrangement would include four colors per pixel in the pixel array of the OLED array.
  • the computer display includes only a portion of OLEDs with the circadian rhythm effecting blue.
  • the OLED may produce a broadband of light in the region and be filtered.
  • the circadian-inducing OLED may produce a narrow band emission and possibly be filtered or not.
  • aspects relate to the inclusion of more than three standard colors in a computer display pixel array.
  • the more than three colors may include the addition of a color(s) that is intended to provide a bioactive display that is switchable between a standard color gamut and a modified color gamut.
  • the modification to the pixel colors may be adapted to produce pixel colors that can affect a person’s physiological and psychological functions while maintaining the display as an effective computer display for the presentation of digital content.
  • a control system! computer processor associated with the display may be used, either automatically (e.g. based on sensed conditions, based on time of day, based on a schedule) or through a user interface, to switch between the two modes.
  • Such a system may also be operated in a mode where both a standard blue and circadian blue are operated simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode (e.g. pulse width modulation to regulate the apparent intensity of each one).
  • the modified color pixel array is bioactive and may be regulated by tire control system and/or a computer system to determine dose or aliquot of light of a particular characteristic or mode by a change the pixel colors over time to assist in regulating the person’s circadian cycle or other physiological and psychological functions.
  • the red spectrum may be positioned in the long red near infrared energy (LRNE) region.
  • the system may- switch between the two modes.
  • Such a system may also be operated in a mode where both a standard red and LRNE red are operated simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode (e.g. pulse width modulation to regulate the apparent intensity of each one).
  • the modified color pixel array is bioactive and may be regulated by the control system.
  • red in the LRNE non-visible region also referred to as near infrared may be used simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode with red or long red. Spectral power distributions shown in FIGS. 29 - 31.
  • Region 1550 represents LRNE emissions which are considered by CIE standards previously noted to be outside the visual spectrum of humans [00107]
  • the control system may further operate based on data sources that describe the user of the display (e.g. wearable sensors, sleep sensors, as described herein)
  • Figure 1 illustrates some examples of computer displays 102 in various configurations.
  • Each of the configurations includes an array of pixels 106 positioned and controlled to display computer-generated content.
  • One configuration is a desktop computer display 102a.
  • the desktop configuration includes a peripheral 104 (e.g. keyboard, mouse, drawing pad, Bluetooth connected device, WiFi connected device).
  • the desktop, or any other configuration may receive data from personal devices (e.g. a user’s fitbit, sleep sensor) and adjust the color and/or intensity of the light emitted by the pixels 106.
  • Device 102b is a small touch screen device (e.g. phone, pda).
  • Device 102c is a tablet device, which may have a touch screen.
  • the display could also be a tele vision, which may be an Internet device, radio receiver device, cable TV device, satellite TV device, etc.
  • Figure 2 illustrates various examples of bioactive lighting pixel constructions that may be built into a display in accordance with the principles of the present in ventions. These examples are simplified examples of the basic construction of the vari ous display technologies at a pixel level. The three examples presented are the microLED 200, OLED 230, and backlit LCD 240. Each of these examples uses a pixel technology that generates light at the pixel level that is outside of the normal display color gamut and at a color point or frequency that is known to affect a person’s circadian rhythm and other physiological and psychological functions.
  • a microLED based computer display may be based on an array of microLED pixels 200.
  • Each micoLED pixel 200 in the area of the display may include different color producing mieroLEDs 200, electrodes 208 to power and control each microLED in each pixel, and a substrate 208.
  • Each of the mieroLEDs may emit light of a particular color based on the materials used in the construction of the microLED.
  • the microLED(s) may be arranged to irradiate a phosphor for color conversion or they may be arranged to transmit light through a filter.
  • the mieroLEDs in the pixel may be red, green and circadian blue.
  • Tire circadian blue may be a blue outside of the normal blue gamut that is used in a display. It may be a blue with spectral characteristics of the circadian lighting systems disclosed herein. In a configuration where only three colors are included in the pixel, the color gamut of the display may always be outside of the standard display gamut. Tills may be acceptable to a user that is less concerned about the exact color of displayed content and more concerned with receiving a light that effects the user’s circadian rhythm while still having reasonable colors produced. In another embodiment, the pixel may include four colors: red, green, standard display blue and circadian blue. This configuration lends itself to a control system that can switch between the standard blue and the arcadian blue.
  • the circadian blue may be used in the morning hours, for example, and then the display may switch to the standard blue in later hours. In yet later hours, the standard blue may be turned down to further reduce the stimulation of the circadian rhythm. The two blues may fade in and out in a synchronized fashion. Both may be on at one time to reduce the circadian blue as the system transitions to the standard blue.
  • the red spectrum may be positioned in the long red near infrared energy (LRNE) region. In some instances the system may switch between the two modes. Such a system may also be operated in a mode where both a standard red and LRNE red are operated simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode (e.g. pulse width modulation to regulate the apparent intensity of each one).
  • the modified color is bioactive and may be regulated by the control system.
  • red in the LRNE non-visible region also referred to as near infrared may be used simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode with red or long red.
  • the LRNE may be applied in doses or aliquots based on sensor data or other inputs to the control systems. Such LRNE may be used as a health supplement based controls systems.
  • Application of LRNE may also be coordinated with a measure of CSE received by a user over a period of time as a counter effect of excessive CSE.
  • Application of LRNE may also be controlled, at least in part, by physiological measures of the user including but not limited to data harvested from sensors associated with or information about users, such as one or more of physiological sensors.
  • An OLED based computer display may be based on an array of OLED pixels 230.
  • the OLED pixel 230 may have three separately controllable QLEDs 212 in each pixel. Each one may emit a similar color (eg. white) and each one may be optically associated with a different colored filter 211 to generate red, green and circadian blue. In an alternate construction, each OLED emitter may generate its own color (e.g. through a different material, through a phosphor conversion). Each OLED pixel may be constructed with electrodes 214 to power and control each color and a substrate 216. In embodiments, the color set includes a circadian blue (e.g. as described herein).
  • the color set has only three colors, including the circadian blue, and the display produces colors outside of the standard display color gamut. In embodiments, the color set has four colors, including a standard blue and a circadian blue, such that a control system could choose which blue to activate and control as described herein . In some
  • the red spectrum may be positioned in the long red near infrared energy (LRNE) region.
  • the system may switch between the two modes.
  • Such a system may also be operated in a mode where both a standard red and LRNE red are operated simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode (e.g. pulse width modulation to regulate the apparent intensity of each one).
  • the modified color is bioactive and may be regulated by the control system.
  • red in the LRNE non-vi sible region also referred to as near infrared may be used simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode with red or long red.
  • the LRNE may be applied in doses or aliquots based on sensor data or other inputs to the control systems.
  • Such LRNE may be used as a health supplement based controls systems.
  • Application of LRNE may also be coordinated with a measure of CSE received by a user over a period of time.
  • Application of LRNE may also be controlled, at least in part, by physiological measures of the user including but not limited to data harvested from sensors associated with or information about users, such as one or more of physiological sensors.
  • a backlit LCD based computer display may be based on an array of backlit LCD pixels 240.
  • the construction of the LCD display may include liquid crystals 206 for multiple channels at each pixel where each liquid crystal in the pixel is associated with a filter that filters the light from a backlight 210.
  • the backlight 210 makes white light and the filters cut the white light into a particular color, generally red, green and blue.
  • the blue filter in the color filter layer 210 is a circadian blue color filter.
  • the filter layer 210 includes two blue filters, associated with two separate liquid crystals: one for circadian blue and one for the standard display blue.
  • the color set includes a circadian blue (e.g. as described herein).
  • the filter color set has only three colors, including the circadian blue, and the display produces colors outside of the standard display color gamut.
  • the filter color set has four colors, including a standard blue and a circadian blue, such that a control system could choose which blue to activate and control .
  • the red spectrum may be positioned in the long red near infrared energy (LRNE) region.
  • LRNE long red near infrared energy
  • the system may switch between the two modes.
  • Such a system may also be operated in a mode where both a standard red and LRNE red are operated simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode (e.g. pulse width modulation to regulate the apparent intensity of each one).
  • the modified color is bioactive and may be regulated by the control system.
  • red in the LRNE non-visible region also referred to as near infrared may be used simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode with red or long red.
  • the LRNE may be applied in doses or aliquots based on sensor data or other inputs to the control systems. Such LRNE may be used as a health supplement based controls systems.
  • Application of LRNE may also be coordinated with a measure of CSE received by a user over a period of time.
  • Application of LRNE may also be controlled, at least in part, by physiological measures of the user including but not limited to data harvested from sensors associated with or information about users, such as one or more of physiological sensors.
  • the LCD pixels may be arranged with a backlight 210 that sequentially cycles through separate colors and the liquid crystal layer in this arrangement may only have one liquid crystal per pixel and it may not include a filter layer.
  • the liquid crystal can be turned on to emit the correct color.
  • the user’s eye can integrate the color and perceive it as a combined color. For example, leaving tire liquid crystal in the‘on’ or transmit mode and cycling very ' quickly between red and blue of equal intensity can cause the person to perceive the pixel as purple.
  • the backlight 210 may include a circadian blue emitter(s).
  • the backlight 210 includes standard display blue and a circadian blue.
  • the backlight 210 includes standard display red and a visible LRNE red. In some embodiments, the backlight 210 includes standard display red and a non-visible LRNE red. In some embodiments, the backlight 210 includes standard display red a visible LRNE red and a non-visible LRNE red. In some embodiments, the backlight 210 includes one of a standard display blue and a circadian blue emitter, a standard display red and a visible LRNE red. In some embodiments, the backlight 210 includes one of a standard display blue and a circadian blue emitter, standard display red and a non-visible LRNE red.
  • the backlight 210 includes one of a standard display blue and a circadian blue emitter, standard display red a visible LRNE red and a non-visible LRNE red.
  • An edge lighting system may surround the computer display and emit light that effects the circadian rhythm of a person using or proximate the computer display.
  • the edge lighting system may include a lighting system similar to the display lighting systems described herein or a panel lighting system as described herein.
  • the edge lighting system may be coordinated with the pixels of the display (e.g. through a computer system associated with both devices). It may otherwise be controlled separately (e.g. as described herein).
  • Lighting systems that may be used in display systems in accordance with the principles of the present inventions include, for example, 2-channel, 3- channel, 4-channel, 5-channel, or 6-channel LED-based color-tuning systems.
  • channels within the multi-channel systems may have particular color points and spectral power distributions for the light output generated by the channel.
  • the term“channel” refers to all the components in a light-generating pathway from an LED (microLED, OLED) through any filtering or other components until tire light exits the display system.
  • 2-channel systems can be used having two white light channels.
  • the two white light channels can be those described more fully in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/757,664, filed November 8, 2018, entitled“Two-Channel Tunable Lighting Systems with Controllable Equivalent Melanopic Lux and Correlated Color Temperature Outputs,” and International Patent Application No. PCT/US2G 19/013356, filed January 11, 2019, entitled‘Two-Channel Tunable Lighting Systems With Controllable Equivalent Melanopic Lux And Correlated Color Temperature Outputs” the entirety of which is incorporated herein for all purposes.
  • the present disclosure provides for display systems that incorporate two white lighting channels, which can be referred to herein as a first lighting charmel and a second lighting channel.
  • the white lighting channels can be used to backlight a display system that utilizes color filtering in order to generate a digital display.
  • First lighting channels [00117] In some aspects, the present disclosure provides first lighting channels for use in lighting systems.
  • the first lighting channels can have first color points with CCT values between about 4000K and about 6500K. In some
  • the first color point can have a CCT of about 4000K.
  • the first color point can have a CCT of about 4000K, about 4100K, about 4200K, about 4300K, about 4400K, about 4500K, about 4600K, about 4700K, about 4800K, about 4900K, about 5000K, about 5100K, about 5200K, about 5300K, about 5400K, about 5500K, about 5600K, about 5700K, about 5800K, about 5900K, about 6000K, about 6100K, about 6200K, about 6300K, about 64Q0K, or about 6500K.
  • the first lighting channel can have one or more LEDs having an emission with a first peak wavelength of between about 440 nm and about 510 nm. In certain implementations, the first lighting channel can have one or more LEDs having an emission with a first peak wavelength of about 450 nm.
  • the first lighting channel can have a first color point with a CCT value of about 4000K.
  • the first lighting channel can have a first color point with a color-point range 304A can be defined by a polygonal region on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram defined by the following ccx, ccy color coordinates: (0.4006, 0.4044), (0.3736, 0.3874), (0.3670, 0.3578), (0.3898, 0.3716), winch correlates to an ANSI C78.377-2008 standard 4000K nominal CCT white light with target CCT and tolerance of 3985+275K and target duv and tolerance of 0.00 I ⁇ O.006, as more fully described in American National Standard ANSI C78.377- 2008,“Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products,” National Electrical Manufacturers Association, American National Standard Lighting Group, which is incorporated herein in its entirety for all purposes.
  • suitable color-point ranges for the first color point can be described as MacAdam ellipse color ranges in the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram color space, as illustrated schematically in FIG. 14, which depicts a color-point range 402, the black body locus 401, and a line 403 of constant ccy coordinates on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram.
  • MacAdam ellipse ranges are described with major axis“a”, mmor axis“b”, and ellipse rotation angle Q relative to line 403.
  • the color-point range for the first color point can be range 304B, an embodiment of color range 402, and can be defined as a single 5-step MacAdam ellipse with center point (0.3818, 0.3797) with a major axis“a” of 0.01565, minor axis“b” of 0.00670, with an ellipse rotation angle Q of 52.70°, shown relative to a line 403.
  • the color-point range for the first color point can be range 304C, an embodiment of color range 402, and can be defined as a single 3-step MacAdam ellipse with center point (0.3818, 0.3797) with a major axis‘a” of 0.00939, minor axis“b” of 0.00402, with an ellipse rotation angle Q of 53.7°, shown relative to a line 403.
  • the first color point can be within the color- point ranges described in Table 57 for the selected boundary for each nominal CCT value.
  • the color-point range for the first color point can be a region on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram defined by a polygon connecting the (ccx, ccy) coordinates (0.0.3670, 0.3575), (0.3737, 0.3875), (0.4007, 0.4047), and (0.3898, 0.3720).
  • the color-point range for the first color point can be a region on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram defined by a 4- step MacAdam ellipse centered at 3985K CCT and dm 0.9845.
  • the color-point range for the first color point can be a region on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram defined by a polygon connecting the (ccx, ccy) coordinates (0.3703, 0.3590), (0.3851, 0.3679), (0.3942, 0.3972), and (0.3769, 0.3864).
  • the first lighting channel can have certain spectral power distributions.
  • Some aspects of some exemplary first lighting channels are shown in Table 44. Aspects of the spectral power distributions for the exemplary first lighting channels shown in Table 44 and an average of the exemplary first lighting channels (shown as‘ ‘ Exemplary' 1 st channels avg”) are provided in Tables 46, 48, 50, 52, and 53, which show' the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for each exemplary first lighting channel or average thereof and nonnalized to a value of 100.0, except for Table 53, in which the values are normalized to a value of 1.000.
  • the first lighting channel can have a first spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Tables 46, 48, 50, 52, and 53.
  • the first lighting channel can have a spectral power distribution that falls between the minimum (shown as“min”) and maximum (shown as“max”) values in each of the wavelength ranges as shown in one or more of the Tables 46, 48, 50, 52, and 53.
  • the first lighting channel can have a spectral power distribution that fails between values 5% less, 10% less, 20% less, or 30% less than the minimum (shown as‘"min”) and values 5% more, 10% more, 20% more, or 30% more than the maximum (shown as“max”) values in each of the wavelength ranges as shown in one or more of the Tables 46, 48, 50, 52, and 53.
  • FIGs. 5, 9, 10, 12 and 29-31 depict aspects of first spectral power distributions for the exemplary first lighting channels described herein.
  • FIG. 12 depicts a spectral power distribution 1600 for the exemplary lighting channel“5000K Ch i” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein.
  • FIG. 10 depicts a spectral power distribution 1400 for the exemplary lighting channel“4000K Ch3” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein.
  • FIG. 9 depicts a spectral power distribution 1300 for the exemplary' lighting channel “4000K Ch2” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein.
  • FIG. 9 depicts a spectral power distribution 900 for the exemplary lighting channel“4000K Ch4” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein.
  • FIG. 5 further depicts some exemplary ' wavelength ranges 901 A, 90 IB, 901 C, 90 ID, and 90 IE, which correspond to the wavelength ranges shown in Table 53.
  • first lighting channels may have particular spectral power values within one or more of wavelength ranges 901A, 901B, 901C, 901D, and 901E, or other wavelength ranges not depicted in FIG. 5 or shown in Table 53 but described elsewhere herein.
  • the first lighting channel can have a first white light having a first color point with a CCT and EML value that falls within a range of possible pairings of CCT and EML values, also referred to herein as a CCT-EML range.
  • a suitable CCT-EML range 1710 for first lighting channels of the present disclosure is shown graphically in FIG. 13, which also shows exemplary ' point pairings of CCT and EML for the exemplary first lighting channels shown in Table 3.
  • Tables 1 and 2 show' CCT and EML values for color points generated by some commercially-available fixed-CCT LED-driven white light systems having Ra values of approximately 80.
  • tire present disclosure provides second lighting channels for use in lighting systems.
  • the second lighting channels can have second color points w'ith CCT values between about 1800K and about 2700K.
  • the first color point can have a CCT of about 2400K.
  • the first color point can have a CCT of about 1800K, about 1900K, about 2000K, about 21Q0K, about 2200K, about 2300K, about 2400K, about 2500K, about 2600K, or about 2700K.
  • the second lighting channel can have one or more LEDs having an emission with a second peak wavelength of between about 380 nm and about 420 nm. In certain implementations, the second lighting channel can have one or more LEDs having an emission with a second peak wavelength of about 410 nm. In some aspects, the use of a different peak wavelength for the LEDs in the second lighting channel in comparison to the LEDs in the first lighting channel can contribute to the desired performance of the lighting systems of the disclosure.
  • the second lighting channel can produce light having a second color point within a suitable color- point range.
  • the second color point can be within the color-point ranges described in Table 57 for the selected boundary for each nominal CCT value.
  • the second color point can be within a color- point range defined by a region bounded by a polygon connecting the (ccx, ccy) coordinates on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram of (0.4593, 0.3944), (0.5046, 0.4007), (0.5262 0.4381), and (0.4813 0.4319).
  • the second color point can be within a color-point range defined by a region bounded by a polygon connecting the (ccx, ccy) coordinates on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram of (0.4745, 0.4025), (0.4880, 0.4035), (0.5036, 0.4254), (0.4880, 0.4244).
  • the second lighting channel can have certain spectral power distributions.
  • Some aspects of some exemplary second lighting channels are shown in Table 44. Aspects of the spectral power distributions for the exemplary second lighting chann el s shown in Table 44 and an average of the exemplary second lighting channels (shown as“Exemplary 2nd channels avg”) are provided in Tables 45, 47, 49, 51, and 53, which show tire ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for each exemplary second l ighting channel or average thereof and normalized to a value of 100.0, except for Table 53, in which the values are normalized to a value of 1.000.
  • the second lighting channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than tire values shown in one or more of Tables 45, 47, 49, 51, and 53.
  • the second lighting channel can have a spectral power distribution that falls between the minimum (shown as“min’') and maximum (shown as“max’') values in each of the wavelength ranges as shown in one or more of the Tables 45, 47, 49, 51, and 53.
  • the second lighting channel can have a spectral power distribution that falls between values 5% less, 10% less, 20% less, or 30% less than the minimum (shown as“min”) and values 5% more, 10% more, 20% more, or 30% more than the maximum (shown as“max”) values in each of the wavelength ranges as shown in one or more of the Tables 45, 47, 49, 51, and 53.
  • FIG. 7 depicts a spectral power distribution 1100 for the exemplary lighting channel “2400K Ch2” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein.
  • FIG. 8 depicts a spectral power distribution 1200 for the exemplary lighting channel“2400K Ch3” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein.
  • FIG. 11 depicts a spectral power distribution 1500 for the exemplary lighting channel“1800K Chi” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein.
  • FIG. 6 depicts a spectral power distribution 1000 for the exemplary lighting channel“2400K Ch3” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein.
  • FIG. 6 further depicts some exemplary wavelength ranges 1001A, 1001B, 1001C, 1001D, and 1001E, which correspond to the wavelength ranges shown in Table 53.
  • second lighting channels may have particular spectral power values within one or more of wavelength ranges 1001A, 1001B, 1001C, 100 ID, and 1001E, or other wavelength ranges not depicted in FIG. 6 or shown in Table 12 but described elsewhere herein.
  • the 3-channel BIOACTIVE LED-based color-tuning systems can include channels as described in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/712,182 filed July 30, 2018, and U.S. Provisional Patent
  • the bioactive 4-channel, 5-channel, and 6- channel LED-based color tuning systems can include channels as described more fully in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/757,672, filed November 8, 2018, entitled“Switchable Systems for White Light with High Color Rendering and Biological Effects/’ which is incorporated herein in its entirety for all purposes.
  • bioactive display systems can comprise standard lighting channels for red, blue, and green color points used in digital display systems known to those of skill in the art, such as those described herein and shown in FIG. 3b, and additional lighting channels each comprising a cyan lighting channel with an output with a color point in a cyan color region .
  • the standard lighting channels may have light emissions with substantially all of the spectral energy distribution contained within a wavelength range of about 120 nm a full width at half maximum (FWHM) of about 40 nm.
  • the cyan lighting channel may include cyan lighting elements and channels as described in International Patent Application No.
  • the cyan lighting channel may include cyan lighting elements and channels as described in U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/757,672, tiled November 8, 2018, as long-blue- pumped cyan and short-blue-pumped cyan.
  • the display- systems can comprise at least one lighting channel that comprises a short-blue- puinped cyan channel and at least one lighting channel that comprises a long-blue- pumped cyan channel.
  • the cyan light channels can have spectral power distributions.
  • Tables 1-4 show' the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for each color range and normalized to a value of 100 0.
  • the spectral power distribution of a cyan light channel falls between minimum and maximum values in particular wavelength ranges relative to an arbitrary reference wavelength range.
  • the short-blue-pumped cyan can fall within the values between Short-blue-pumped cyan minimum 1 and Short-blue -pumped cyan maximum 1 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1, Table 2, or both Tables 1 and 2.
  • the short-blue-pumped cyan can fall within the values between Short-blue-pumped cyan minimum 1 and Short-blue-pumped cyan maximum 2 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1.
  • the Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan lighting channel can produce light with spectral power distribution that falls within the values between Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan minimum 1 and Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan maximum 1 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1, Table 2, or both Tables 1 and 2.
  • Tables 3 and 4 show the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary' reference wavelength range selected for the short-blue-pumped cyan color range and normalized to a value of 100.0, for a short- blue-pumped cyan ch annel that may be used in some implementation s of the disclosure.
  • the exemplary Short-blue-pumped cyan Channel 1 has a ccx, ccy color coordinate shown in Table 5.
  • the short-blue-pumped cyan channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Table 3 or 4.
  • the long-blue-pumped cyan channel can produce cyan light having certain spectral power distributions.
  • Tables 3 and 4 shows ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for the Iong-blue-pumped cyan color range and normalized to a value of 100.0, for several non-limiting embodiments of the iong-blue-pumped cyan channel.
  • the exemplary' Long -blue -pumped cyan Channel 1 has a ccx, ccy color coordinate Shown in Table 5.
  • the Iong-blue-pumped cyan channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wav elength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Table 3 and 4.
  • lighting systems can include bioactive blue channels that produce light with a blue color point that falls within a blue color range.
  • suitable blue color ranges can include blue color ranges 301 A-F.
  • FIG. 22A depicts a blue color range 301A defined by a line connecting the ccx, ccy color coordinates of the infinity point of the Planckian locus (0.242, 0.24) and (0.12, 0.068), the Planckian locus from 4000K and infinite CCT, the constant CCT fine of 4000K, the hne of purples, and the spectral locus.
  • FIG. 22A depicts a blue color range 301A defined by a line connecting the ccx, ccy color coordinates of the infinity point of the Planckian locus (0.242, 0.24) and (0.12, 0.068), the Planckian locus from 4000K and infinite CCT, the constant CCT fine of 4000K, the hne of purples, and the spectral locus.
  • 22A also depicts a blue color range 30 ID defined by a line connecting (0.3806, 0.3768) and (0.0445, 0.3), the spectral locus between the monochromatic point of 490 nm and (0.12, 0.068), a line connecting the ccx, ccy color coordinates of the infinity point of the Planckian locus (0.242, 0.24) and (0.12, 0.068), and the Planckian locus from 4000K and infinite CCT.
  • the blue color range may also be the combination of ranges 301A and 301D together.
  • FIG. 25 depicts a blue color range 30 IB can be defined by a 60-step MacAdam ellipse at a CCT of 20000K, 40 points below the Planckian locus.
  • FIG. 26 depicts a blue color range 301C that is defined by a polygonal region on the 1931 CIE Chromatieity Diagram defined by the following ccx, ccy color coordinates: (0.22, 0.14), (0 19, 0.17), (0.26, 0.26), (0 28, 0.23).
  • FIG 10 depicts blue color ranges 301E and 301 F. Blue color range 301 E is defined by lines connecting (0.231, 0.218), (0.265, 0.260), (0.2405, 0.305), and (0.207, 0.256).
  • the cyan lighting channels described herein can generate light outputs with cyan color points that fall within a cyan color range.
  • suitable cyan color ranges can include cyan color ranges 303A-E, which can be seen in FIGs. 22B, 23, and 24.
  • Cyan color range 303A is defined by 7 a line connecting the ccx, ccy color coordinates (0.18, 0.55) and (0.27, 0.72), the constant CCT line of 9000K, the Planckian locus between 9000K and 1 BOOK, the constant CCT line of 1800K, and the spectral locus on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram.
  • a cyan color range 303B can be defined by the region bounded by lines connecting (0.360, 0.495), (0.371, 0.518), (0.388, 0.522), and (0.377, 0.499).
  • a cyan color range 303C is defined by a line connecting the ccx, ccy color coordinates (0.18, 0.55) and (0.27, 0.72), the constant CCT line of 9000K, the Planckian locus between 9000K and 4600K, the constant CCT line of 4600K, and the spectral locus.
  • a cyan color range 303D is defined by the constant CCT line of 4600K, the spectral locus, the constant CCT line of I 800K, and the Planckian locus between 4600K and 1800K.
  • the long-blue-pumped cyan channel can provide a color point within a cyan color region 303E defined by lines connecting (0.497, 0.469), (0.508, 0.484),
  • the LEDs in the cyan color channels can be LEDs with peak emission wavelengths at or below about 535 nm. In some implementations, the LEDs in the cyan color channels can be LEDs with peak emission wavelengths at or below about 535 nm.
  • the LEDs emit light with peak emission wavelengths between about 360 nm and about 535 nrn.
  • the LEDs in the cyan color channels can be formed from InGaN semiconductor materials.
  • the LEDs used in the long-blue- pumped cyan channels can be LEDs having peak emission wavelengths between about 360 nm and about 535 nm, between about 380 nm and about 520 nm, between about 470 nm and about 505 nm, about 480 nm, about 470 nm, about 460 nm, about 455 nm, about 450 nm, or about 445 nm. In certain
  • the LEDs used in long-blue-pumped cyan channels can have a peak wavelength between about 460 nm and 51 5 nm.
  • the LEDs in the long-blue-pumped cyan channels can include one or more LUXEON Rebel Blue LEDs (LXML-PB01, LXML-PB02) of color bins 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, which have peak wavelengths ranging from 460 nm to 485 nm, or LUXEON Rebel Cyan LEDs (LXML- PEOl) of color bins 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, which have peak wavelengths raving from 460 nm to 485 nm.
  • the short-blue-pumped cyan channels can have LEDs having a peak wavelength between about 405 nm and about 485 nm, between about 430 nm and about 460 nm, between about 430 nm and about 455 nm, between about 430 nm and about 440 nm, between about 440 nm and about 450 nm, between about 440 nm and about 445 nm, or between about 445 nm and about 450 nm.
  • the LEDs used in the short- blue-pumped cyan channels may have full-width half-maximum wavelength ranges of between about 10 nm and about 30 nm.
  • the short- blue-pumped cyan channels can include one or more LUXEON Z Color Line royal blue LEDs (product code LXZ1-PR01) of color bin codes 3, 4, 5, or 6, one or more LUXEON Z Color Line blue LEDs (LXZ1-PB01) of color bin code 1 or 2, or one or more
  • lighting systems can include yellow channels that produce light with a yellow color point that falls within a yellow color range.
  • FIGs. 17A and 17B depicts some aspects of suitable yellow color ranges for implementations of yellow channels of the present disclosure.
  • the yellow channels can produce light having a yellow color point that falls within a yellow color range 1401, with boundaries defined on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram of the constant CCT line of 5000K from the Planckian locus to the spectral locus, the spectral locus, and the Planckian locus from 5000K to 550K.
  • the yellow channels can produce light having a yellow color point that falls within a yellow color range 1402, with boundaries defined on the 1931 CIE
  • the yellow channels can produce light having a color point at one of the exemplary yellow color points 1403A-D shown in FIG. 17B and described more fully elsewhere herein. Violet Channels
  • lighting systems can include violet channels that produce light with a violet color point that falls within a violet color range.
  • FIG. 16 depicts some aspects of suitable violet color ranges for implementations of violet channels of the present disclosure.
  • the violet channels can produce light having a violet color point that falls within a violet color range 1301, with boundaries defined on the 1931 CTE
  • the violet channels can produce light having a color point at one of the exemplary' violet color points 1303A-D shown in FIG. 16 and described more fully elsewtiere herein.
  • lighting systems can include bioactive red channels that produce light with a red color point that falls within a red color range.
  • suitable red color ranges can include red color ranges 302A-D.
  • FIG 22B depicts a red color range 302 A defined by the spectral locus between the constant CCT line of 1600K and the line of purples, the line of purples, a line connecting the ccx, ccy color coordinates (0.61, 0 21 ) and (0.47, 0.28), and the constant CCT line of 1600K bioactive LRNE is within that range.
  • FIG. 23 depicts some suitable color ranges for some implementations of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 23 depicts some suitable color ranges for some implementations of the disclosure.
  • red color range 302B that can be defined by a 20-step MacAdam ellipse at a CCT of 1200K, 20 points below the Pianckian locus.
  • FIG. 24 depicts some further color ranges suitable for some implementations of the disclosure.
  • a red color range 302C is defined by a polygonal region on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram defined by the following ccx, ccy color coordinates: (0.53, 0.41), (0.59, 0.39), (0.63, 0.29), (0.58, 0.30).
  • ccx, ccy color coordinates (0.53, 0.41), (0.59, 0.39), (0.63, 0.29), (0.58, 0.30).
  • a red color range 302C is depicted and can be defined by a polygonal region on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram defined by the following ccx, ccy color coordinates: (0.53, 0.41), (0.59, 0.39), (0.63, 0.29), (0.58, 0.30).
  • FIG. 27 depicts a red color range 302D defined by lines connecting the ccx, ccy coordinates (0.576, 0.393), (0.583, 0.400),
  • the present disclosure relates to long red and near infrared lighting channels that can provide long red and near infrared energy (“LRNE”).
  • Long red and near infrared channels can provide one or both of Visible LRNE and Non- Visible LRNE.
  • Visible LRNE refers to light having spectral power in wavelengths between about 625 nm and about 700 nm.
  • Non- Visible LRNE refers to light having spectral power in wavelengths greater than or equal to about 700 nm.
  • the Long Red and Near Infrared Channels also referred to as LRNE channels or LRNE lighting channels, of the present disclosure can be part of one or more red channels involved in color-tuning and providing white light, or as separate channel that can be operated independently of color-tuning or color-rendering requirements.
  • an additional LRNE channel includes the non- visible region of the LRNE also referred to as near infrared. Although the near infrared may not be visually perceived as red, such a channel can provide benefits of LRNE as described above.
  • Region 1 550 represents LRNE emissions which are considered by most to be outside the visual spectrum of humans.
  • red nitride phosphors having peak wavelengths between about 675 nm and about 775 nm can be included in one or more red channels or long-red channels.
  • Tables 61-63 Aspects of exemplary- phosphors that may be suitable for use in LRNE channels of the present disclosure are shown in Tables 61-63.
  • FIG. 30 shows aspects of the spectral pownr distribution of an exemplary LRNE lighting channel, LRNE Channel B, with further details shown in Tables 7-9 below.
  • Three phosphor materials can be provided in a luminophoric medium associated with an LED string in LKNE Channel B, and in some implementations the phosphor materials can include a YAG phosphor, a red phosphor with emission peak at about 630 nm, and a red phosphor with an emission peak at about 750 nm.
  • FIG. 31 shows aspects of the spectral power distribution of an exemplary LRNE lighting channel, LRNE Channel A, with further details show in Tables 7-9 below'.
  • Three phosphor materials can be provided in a luminophoric medium associated with an LED string in LRNE Channel A, and m some implementations the phosphor materials can include a YAG phosphor, a red phosphor with emission peak at about 630 nm, and a red phosphor with an emission peak at about 700 nm.
  • the LRNE channels can produce red light having certain spectral pow'er distributions.
  • Tables 7-9 show's the ratios of spectral power within w'aveiength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected and normalized to a value of 100.0, for LRNE channels that may be used in some
  • the LRNE channels can have a spectral power distribution that falls within the ranges between the Exemplary LRNE Channel Minimum and the Exemplary' LRNE Channel Maximum in the wavelength ranges shown in Tables 7-9.
  • the LRNE channels of the disclosure can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Tables 7-9 for LRNE Channels A-B and the Exemplary LRNE Channel Average
  • FIGs. 39-43 show aspects of some suitable commercially available LED systems that can be used in the LRNE channels of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 39 shows the emission spectra of some the LUXEON TR 2720 Line of products from Lumileds (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands).
  • the peak wavelength of the LUXEON® IR 2720 LED series can be selected from between about 840 nm and about 965 nm as desired for bioactive effects.
  • FIG. 40 shows the emission spectra of some of the SST-10-IR product line from Luminus (Luminus, Inc , Sunnyvale,
  • FIG. 41 shows the emission spectra of some 850 ran and 940 nm type LEDs available from Vision Light Tech (Vision Light Tech, Protonenlaan 22, 5405 NE UDEN, The Netherlands).
  • FIG. 42 shows the spectral power characteristics of LUXEON IR ONYX product from Lumileds (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands).
  • FIG. 43 shows the emission spectra that can he isolated via a Long Pass (LP) filter (such as MidOpt LP920 (Midwest Optical Systems, Inc., 322 Woodwork Lane, Palatine, IL 60067 USA)). Between the spectra shown in FIGs.
  • LP Long Pass
  • the LP filter cuts the short wavelength part of the spectrum susceptible to being seen by the human eye.
  • LP filters with higher or lower wavelength thresholds for cut-off can be selected to isolate the spectral power in wavelength ranges as desired for LRNE bioactive effects.
  • the display systems can include suitable recipient luminophoric mediums for each LED in order to produce light having color points within the suitable blue color ranges 301A-F, red color ranges 302A- D, cyan color ranges 303 A-E, violet color ranges 1301, 1302, and yellow color ranges 1401, 1402 described herein.
  • each lighting channel can have a suitable spectral power distribution (“SPD”) having spectral power with ratios of power across the visible wavelength spectrum from about 380 nm to about 780 nm or across the visible, near-visible, and non-visible wavelength spectrum from about 320 nm to about 1000 nm.
  • SPD spectral power distribution
  • the lighting channels of the present disclosure can each product a colored light that falls between minimum and maximum values in particular wavelength ranges relative to an arbitrary reference wavelength range.
  • Tables 1, 2, and 7-15 show some exemplary minimum and maximum spectral power values for the blue, red, long-red near infrared (LRNE), short-blue-pumped cyan, long-blue-pumped cyan, yellow, and violet channels of the disclosure.
  • the blue lighting channel can produce light with spectral power distribution that falls within the values between Blue minimum 1 and Blue maximum 1 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1, Table 2, or both Tables 1 and 2.
  • the red lighting channel can produce light with spectral power distribution that falls within the values between Red minimum 1 and Red maximum 1 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1, Table 2, or both Tables 1 and 2.
  • the red channel can produce red light having a spectral power distribution that falls within the ranges between the Exemplary Red Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Red Channels Maximum in the wavelength ranges shown in one or more of Tables 7-9.
  • the short-blue-pumped cyan can fail within the values between Short-blue-pumped cyan minimum 1 and Short-blue-pumped cyan maximum 1 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1 , Table 2, or both Tables 1 and 2.
  • the short-blue-pumped cyan can fall within the values between Short-blue-pumped cyan minimum 1 and Short-blue-pumped cyan maximum 2 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1.
  • the Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan lighting channel can produce light with spectral power distribution that falls within the values between Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan minimum 1 and Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan maximum 1 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1, Table 2, or both Tables 1 and 2.
  • the yellow channel can produce yellow light having a spectral power distribution that falls within the ranges between the Exemplary Yellow Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Yellow Channels Maximum in the wavelength ranges shown in one or more of Tables 13-15.
  • the violet channel can produce violet light having a spectral power distribution that falls within the ranges between the Exemplary Violet Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Violet Channels Maximum in the wavelength ranges shown in one or more of Tables 10-12. While not wishing to be bound by any particular theory, it is speculated that because the spectral power distributions for generated light with color points within the blue, long-blue- pumped cyan, short-blue-pumped cyan, yellow, and violet color ranges contains higher spectral intensity' across visible wavelengths as compared to lighting apparatuses and methods that utilize more saturated colors, this allows for improved color rendering for test colors other than R1-R8.
  • PCT/US2018/020792 filed March 2, 2018, discloses aspects of some additional red, blue, short-pumped-blue (referred to as“green” therein), and long-pumped-blue (referred to as“cyan” therein) channel elements that may be suitable for some implementations of the present disclosure, the entirety of which is incorporated herein for all purposes.
  • the short-blue-pumped cyan channel can produce cyan light having certain spectral power distributions.
  • Tables 3 and 4 show the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for the short-blue-pumped cyan color range and normalized to a value of 100.0, for a short-blue-pumped cyan channel that may be used in some implementations of the disclosure.
  • the exemplary' Short-blue-pumped cyan Channel 1 has a ecx, ccy color coordinate shown in Table 5.
  • the short-blue-pumped cyan channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Table 3 or 4.
  • the long-blue-pumped cyan channel can produce cyan light having certain spectral power distributions.
  • Tables 3 and 4 shows ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for the long-blue-pumped cyan color range and normalized to a value of 100.0, for several non- limiting embodiments of the long-blue-pumped cyan channel.
  • the exemplary Long-blue-pumped cyan Channel 1 has a ccx, ccy color coordinate Shown in Table 5.
  • the long-blue-pumped cyan channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power m one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Table 3 and 4.
  • the red channel can produce red light having certain spectral power distributions.
  • Tables 3-4 and 7-9 show the ratios of spectral pow3 ⁇ 4r within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for the red color range and normalized to a value of 100.0, for red lighting channels which may be LRNE channels that may be used in some implementations of the disclosure.
  • the exemplary Red Channel 1 has a ccx, ccy color coordinate of (0.5932, 0.3903).
  • the red channel can have a spectral pow3 ⁇ 4r distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Tables 3-4 and 7-9 for Red Channels 1-11, Long-Red Channels A-B (for the LRNE spectrum), the
  • the blue channel can produce blue light having certain spectral power distributions.
  • Tables 3 and 4 show the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for the blue color range and normalized to a value of 100.0, for a blue channel that may be used in some implementations of the disclosure.
  • Exemplary Blue Channel 1 has a ccx, ccy color coordinate of (0.2333, 0.2588).
  • the blue channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Tables 3 and 4.
  • the yellow channel can have certain spectral power distributions.
  • Tables 13-15 show the ratios of spectral pow3 ⁇ 4r within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected and normalized to a value of 100.0 for exemplary yellow lighting channels, Yellow Channels 1-6.
  • Table 5 shows some aspects of the exemplary yellow lighting channels for some implementations of the disclosure in certain implementations, the yellow' channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown m one or more of Tables 13-15 for Yellow Channels 1-6 and the
  • the violet channel can have certain spectral power distributions.
  • Tables 13-15 show the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference w3 ⁇ 4veiength range selected and normalized to a value of 100.0 for exemplary violet lighting channels, Violet Channels 1-5.
  • Table 5 shows some aspects of the exemplary violet lighting channels for some implementations of the disclosure.
  • the violet channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values showrn in one or more of Tables 12-15 for one or more of Violet Channels 1-6 and the Exemplary Violet Channels Average.
  • the lighting channels of the present disclosure can each product a colored light having spectral power distributions having particular characteristics.
  • the spectral power distributions of some lighting channels can have peaks, points of relatively higher intensity, and valleys, points of relatively lower intensity that fall within certain wavelength ranges and have certain relative ratios of intensity between them.
  • Tables 38 and 39 and FIG. 19 show some aspects of exemplary violet lighting channels for some implementations of the disclosure.
  • a Violet Peak is present in a range of about 380 nm to about 460 nm.
  • a Violet Valley is present in a range of about 450 nm to about 510 nm.
  • a Green Peak is present in a range of about 500 nm to about 650 nm.
  • a Red Valley is present in a range of about 650 nm to about 780 nm.
  • Table 38 shows the relative intensities of the peaks and valleys for exemplary violet lighting channels of the disclosure, with the Vp values assigned an arbitrary value of 1.0 in the table. The wavelength at which each peak or valley is present is also shown in Table 38.
  • Table 39 shows the relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peaks and valleys of the spectral power distributions for exemplary violet lighting channels and minimum, average, and maximum values thereof.
  • the violet channel can have a spectral power distribution with the relative intensities of Vv, Gp, and Rv increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Table 38 for one or more of Violet Channels 1-5 and the Exemplary Violet Channels Average.
  • the violet channel can produce violet light having a spectral power distribution with peak and valley intensities that fail between the Exemplary Violet Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Violet Channels Maximum shown in Table 38.
  • the violet channel can produce violet light having a spectral power distribution with relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peak and valley intensities that fall between the Exemplary Violet Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Violet Channels Maximum values shown in Table 39.
  • the violet channel can have a spectral power distribution with the relative ratios of intensity' between particular pairs of the peak and valley intensities increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the relative ratio values shown in Table 39 for one or more of Violet Channels 1-5 and the Exemplary Violet Channels Average.
  • Tables 40 and 41 and FIG. 20 show some aspects of exemplary yellow lighting channels for some implementations of the disclosure.
  • a Violet Peak (Vp) is present in a range of about 330 nm to about 430 run.
  • a Violet Valley ( Vv) is present in a range of about 420 nm to about 510 nm.
  • a Green Peak (Gp) is present in a range of about 500 nm to about 780 nm.
  • Table 40 shows the relative intensities of the peaks and valleys for exemplary y ellow lighting channels of the disclosure, with the Gp values assigned an arbitrary value of 1.0 in the table. The wavelength at which each peak or valley is present is also shown in Table 40.
  • Table 41 shows the relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peaks and valleys of the spectral power distributions for exemplary yellow lighting channels and minimum, average, and maximum values thereof in certain implementations, the yellow channel can have a spectral power distribution with the relative intensities of Vp and Vv increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values for one or more of Yellow Channels 1-6 and the Exemplary Yellow Channels Average shown in Table 40.
  • the yellow channel can produce yellow light having a spectral power distribution with peak and valley intensities that fall between the Exemplary Yellow Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Yellow- Channels Maximum shown in Table 40.
  • the yellow channel can produce yellow- light having a spectral pow-er distribution with relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peak and valley intensities that fall betw-een the
  • the yellow' channel can have a spectral power distribution with the relative ratios of intensity- between particular pairs of the peak and valley intensities increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the relative ratio values for one or more of Yellow- Channels 1-6 and the Exemplary- Yellow Channels Average shown in Table 41.
  • Tables 42,43, and 61 -63 and FIG. 21, FIGS. 29-35 show some aspects of exemplary- red lighting channels (including both visible and non- visible LRNE) for some implementations of the disclosure.
  • a Blue Peak (Bp) is present in a range of about 380 nm to about 460 nrn.
  • a Blue Valley (Bv) is present in a range of about 450 nm to about 510 nm.
  • a Red Peak is present in a range of about 500 nm to about 780 nm.
  • Table 42 shows the relative intensities of the peaks and valleys for exemplary red lighting channels of the disclosure, with the Rp values assigned an arbitrary value of 1.0 in the table. The wavelength at which each peak or valley is present is also shown in Table 42.
  • Table 43 shows the relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peaks and valleys of the spectral power distributions for exemplary red lighting channels and minimum, average, and maximum values thereof.
  • the red channel can have a spectral power distribution with the relati ve intensities of Bp and Bv increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values for one or more of Red Channels 1 , 3-6, and 9-17 and the Exemplary Red Channels Average shown in Table 42.
  • the red channel can produce red light having a spectral power distribution with peak and valley intensities that fall between the Exemplar ⁇ Red
  • the red channel can produce red light having a spectral power distribution with relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peak and valley intensities that fall between the Exemplary Red Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Red Channels Maximum values shown m Table 43.
  • the red channel can have a spectral power distribution with the relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peak and valley intensities increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the relative ratio values for one or more of Red Channels 1, 3-6, and 9-17 and the Exemplary' Red Channels Average shown in Table 43.
  • Blends of luminescent materials can be used in luminophoric mediums having the desired saturated color points when excited by their respective LED strings including luminescent materials such as those disclosed in co-pending U.S. 9,719,660 issued August 1, 2017, entitled“Compositions for LED Light Conversions”, the entirety of which is hereby incorporated by this reference as if fully set forth herein.
  • a desired combined output light can be generated along a tie line between the LED string output light color point and the saturated color point of the associated recipient luminophoric medium by utilizing different ratios of total luminescent material to the encapsulant material in which it is incorporated.
  • the optical path will shift the output light color point towards the saturated color point of the luminophoric medium.
  • the desired saturated color point of a recipient luminophoric medium can be achieved by blending two or more luminescent materials in a ratio.
  • the appropriate ratio to achieve the desired saturated color point can be determined via methods kno wn in the art.
  • any blend of luminescent materials can be treated as if it were a single luminescent material, thus the ratio of luminescent materials in the blend can be adjusted to continue to meet a target CIE value for LED strings having different peak emission wavelengths.
  • Luminescent materials can be tuned for the desired excitation in response to the selected LEDs used in the LED strings, which may have different peak emission wavelengths wathin the range of from about 360 nm to about 535 nm. Suitable methods for tuning the response of luminescent materials are known in the art and may include altering the concentrations of dopants within a phosphor, for example. In some implementations of the present disclosure, luminophoric mediums can be provided with combinations of two types of luminescent materials. The first type of luminescent material emits light at a peak emission between about 515 nm and about 590 nm in response to the associated LED string emission.
  • the second type of luminescent material emits at a peak emission between about 590 nm and about 700 nm m response to the associated LED string emission.
  • the luminophoric mediums disclosed herein can be formed from a combination of at least one luminescent material of the first and second types described in this paragraph.
  • the luminescent materials of the first type can emit light at a peak emission at about 515 nm, 525 nm, 530 nm, 535 nm, 540 nm, 545 nm, 550 nm, 555 nm, 560 nm, 565 nm, 570 nm, 575 nm, 580 nm, 585 nm, or 590 nm in response to the associated LED string emission.
  • the luminescent materials of the first type can emit light at a peak emission between about 520 nm to about 555 nrn.
  • the luminescent materials of the second type can emit light at a peak emission at about 590 nm, about 595 nm, 600 nm, 605 nm, 61 0 nm, 615 nm, 620 nrn, 625 nm, 630 nm, 635 nm, 640 nm, 645 nm, 650 nm, 655 nm, 670 nm, 675 nm, 680 nm, 685 nrn, 690 nm, 695 nm, or 700 nm in response to the associated LED string emission.
  • the luminescent materials of the first type can emit light at a peak emission between about 600 nm to about 670 nm.
  • Some exemplar ⁇ luminescent materials of the first and second type are disclosed elsewhere herein and referred to as Compositions A-F. Table 6 shows aspects of some exemplar luminescent materials and properties.
  • Blends of Compositions A-F can be used in luminophoric mediums having desired saturated color points when excited by respective LED strings in the lighting channels of the disclosure.
  • one or more blends of one or more of Compositions A-F can be used to produce luminophoric mediums.
  • the encapsulant for luminophoric mediums comprises a matrix material having density of about 1.1 mg/mm3 and refractive index of about 1.545 or from about 1.4 to about 1.6.
  • Composition A can have a refractive index of about 1.82 and a particle size from about 18 micrometers to about 40 micrometers.
  • Composition B can have a refractive index of about 1.84 and a particle size from about 13 micrometers to about 30 micrometers.
  • Composition C can have a refractive index of about 1.8 and a particle size from about 10 micrometers to about 15 micrometers.
  • Composition D can have a refractive index of about 1.8 and a particle size from about 10 micrometers to about 15 micrometers.
  • Suitable phosphor materials for Compositions A, B, C, and D are commercially available from phosphor manufacturers such as Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Corporation (Tokyo, Japan), Intematix
  • Luminescent materials can include phosphors, scintillators, day glow tapes, nanophosphors, inks that glow in visible spectrum upon illumination with light, ⁇
  • the luminescent materials may comprise
  • phosphors comprising one or more of the following materials: CaAlSiNiiEu,
  • materials may comprise phosphors comprising one or more of the following materials:
  • ERNE emissions can be generated with one or more luminescent materials that generate emissions with wavelengths between about 625 nm and about 1400 nm.
  • the luminescent materials can comprise phosphors comprising one or more of the materials listed above.
  • FIG. 29 shows an emission profile for an exemplary long-red phosphor, referred to herein as Long-Red Phosphor 700nm, having a peak emission wavelength of about 700 nm suitable for some implementations.
  • an exemplary long-red phosphor referred to herein as Long -Red Phosphor 675nm, having a peak emission wavelength of about 675 nm can be used.
  • Some aspects of the spectral pow r er distributions of the emissions for Long-Red Phosphor 700nm and Long -Red Phosphor 675nm are shown in Tables 61-63.
  • the luminescent materials can comprise phosphors comprising one or more of the following materials excited by light at about
  • the luminescent materials can comprise chemically modified versions of these phosphors having excitation bands overlapping with violet or blue LED wavelengths.
  • the luminophoric mediums can include luminescent materials that comprise one or more quantum materials.
  • quantum material means any luminescent material that includes: a quantum dot; a quantum wire; or a quantum well. Some quantum materials may absorb and emit light at spectral power distributions having narrow wavelength ranges, for example, wavelength ranges having spectral widths being within ranges of between about 25 nanometers and about 50 nanometers.
  • two or more different quantum materials may be included in a lumiphor, such that each of the quantum materials may have a spectral power distribution for tight emissions that may not overlap with a spectral power distribution for light absorption of any of the one or more other quantum materials.
  • the term“quantum dot” means: a nanocrystal made of semiconductor materials that are small enough to exhibit quantum mechanical properties, such that its excitons are confined in ail three spatial dimensions.
  • the term“quantum wire” means: an electrically conducting wire in which quantum effects influence the transport properties.
  • the term“quantum well” means: a thin layer that can confine (quasi-)particles (typically electrons or holes) in the dimension perpendicular to the layer surface, whereas the movement in the other dimensions is not restricted.
  • the bioactive circadian-inducing blue light in the display systems can have circadian-stimulating energy (CSE) characteristics that lead to biological effects in users.
  • the circadian-inducing blue, and overall light emissions including the circadian-inducing blue can have a first circadian-stimulating energy characteristic related to the associated first spectral power distribution of the circadian- inducing blue or overall light emissions, while light emissions from the non-circadian- inducing blue and related overall light emissions can have a second circadian-stimulating energy characteristic related to the associated second spectral power distribution of the circadian-inducing blue or overall light emissions.
  • the first circadian-stimulating energy characteristic and the second circadian-stimulating energy characteristic can be the percentage of the spectral power in the associated first spectral pow3 ⁇ 4r distribution and the second spectral power distribution, respectively, between a first wavelength value and a second wavelength value, forming a particular wavelength range therein greater than the first wavelength valise and less than or equal to the second wavelength value.
  • the first and second circadian-stimulating energy characteristics can be one or more of the percentage of spectral power in the wavelength ranges of 470 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 480 nm, 480 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 490 nm, and 490 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 500 nm in comparison to the total energy from 320 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 800 nm in the first and second spectral power distributions respectively.
  • the percentage of spectral power in the wavelength ranges of 470 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 480 nm in comparison to the total energy from 320 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 800 nm of the first spectral power distribution can be between about 2.50 and about 6.00, between about 3.00 and about 5.50, between about 3.00 and about 4.00, between about 3.50 and about 4.00, about 3.0, about 3.1, about 3.2, about 3.3, about 3.4, about 3.5, about 3.6, about 3.7, about 3.8, about 3.9, about 4.0, about 4.1, about 4.2, about
  • the percentage of spectral power in the wavelength ranges of 480 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 490 nm in comparison to the total energy from 320 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 800 nm in the first spectral power distribution can be between about 4.0 and about 6.5, between about 4.5 and about 5.5, between about 4.4 and about 4.6, between about 5.2 and about 5.8, about 4.0, about 4.1, about 4.2, about 4.3, about 4.4, about 4.5, about 4.6, about 4.7, about 4 8, about 4.9, about 5.0, about 5.1 , about 5.2, about 5.3, about 5.4, about 5.5, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, about 6.0, about 6.1 , about 6.2, about 6.3, about
  • the percentage of spectral power in the wavelength ranges of 490 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 500 nm in comparison to the total energy from 320 nrn ⁇ l ⁇ 800 nm in the first spectral power distribution can be between about 3 5 and about 6.0, between about 4.0 and about 5.0, between about 4.5 and about 5.5, between about 4.5 and about 5.0, about 3.5, about 3.6, about 3.7, about 3.8, about 3 9, about 4.0, about 4.1 , about 4.2, about 4.3, about 4.4, about 4.5, about 4.6, about 4.7, about 4.8, about 4.9, about 5.0, about 5.1, about 5.2, about 5.3, about 5.4, about 5.5, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, or about 6.0.
  • the percentage of spectral pow3 ⁇ 4r in the wavelength ranges of 470 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 480 nm in comparison to the total energy from 320 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 800 nm in the second spectral pow3 ⁇ 4r distribution can be between about 0.025 and about 0.080, between about 0.030 and about 0.060, between about 0.050 and about 0.070, between about 0.050 and about 0.060, about 0.025, about 0.030, about 0.035, about 0.040, about 0.045, about 0.050, about 0.055, about 0.56, about 0.57, about 0.58, about 0.59, about 0.060, about 0.61, about 0.62, about 0.63, about 0.64, about 0.065, about 0.66, about 0.67, about 0.68, about 0.69, about 0.070, about 0.075, or about 0.080.
  • the percentage of spectral power in the wavelength ranges of 480 run ⁇ l ⁇ 490 run in comparison to the total energy from 320 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 800 nm in the second spectral pow r er distribution can be between about 0.10 and about 0.30, between about 0.10 and about 0.15, between about 0.20 and about 0.25, between about 0.13 and about 0.24, about 0.10, about 0.11, about 0.12, about 0.13, about 0.14, about 0.15, about 0.016, about 0.17, about 0.18, about 0.19, about 0.20, about 0.21, about 0.22, about 0.23, about 0.24, about 0.25, about 0.26, about 0.27, about 0.28, about 0.29, or about 0.30.
  • the percentage of spectral power in the wavelength ranges of 490 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 500 nm in comparison to the total energy from 320 nm ⁇ l ⁇ 800 nm in the second spectral power distribution can be between about 0.25 and about 0.75, between about 0.25 and about 0.40, between about 0.55 and about 0.70, between about 0.30 and about 0.35, about 0.25, about 0.26, about 0.27, about 0.28, about 0.29, about 0.30, about 0.31, about 0.32, about 0.33, about 0.34, about 0.35, about 0.36, about 0.37, about 0.38, about 0.39, about 0.40, about 0.41, about 0.42, about 0.43, about 0.44, about 0 45, about 0.46, about 0.47, about 0.48, about 0.49, about 0.50, about 0.51, about 0.52, about 0.53, about 0.54, about 0.55, about 0.56, about 0.57, about 0 58, about 0.59, about 0 60, about 0.61 , about
  • the first and second circadian-stimulating energy characteristics can relate to spectral energy within particular wavelength ranges.
  • spectral energy concentrations within particular wavelength ranges can lead to biological effects by providing photostimulation to intrinsically photosensitive retinal ganglion cells (ipRGCs), which express melanopsm, a photopigment that can respond to light directly , and can be associated with non-image- formmg functions such as circadian photoentrainment and pupil-size control in addition to some image-forming functions.
  • ipRGCs are sensitive to light at wavelengths between about 400 nm and about 600 nm, with a peak sensitivity and response to light with wavelengths around 480 nm to 490 nm.
  • the characteristic can be the percentage of the spectral power in the first spectral power distribution and the second spectral power distribution, respectively, between a first wavelength value and a second wavelength value, forming a particular wavelength range therein greater than the first wavelength value and less than or equal to the second wavelength value.
  • the first wavelength value can be about 400 nm, about 410 nm, about 420 nm, about 430 nm, about 440 nm, about 450 nm, about 460 nm, about 470 nm, about 480 nm, about 490 nm, about 500 nm, about 510 nm, about 520 nm, about 530 nm, about 540 nm, about 550, about 560 nm, about 570 nm, about 580 nm, about 590 nm, or about 600 nm.
  • the second wavelength value can be about 410 nm, about 420 nm, about 430 nm, about 440 nm, about 450 nm, about 460 nm, about 470 nm, about 480 nm, about 490 nm, about 500 nm, about 510 nm, about 520 nm, about 530 nm, about 540 nm, about 550, about 560 nm, about 570 nm, about 580 nm, about 590 nm, about 600 nm, or about 610 nm.
  • the first wavelength value can be 440 nm and the second wavelength value can be 490 nm, with the particular wavelength range being 440 ⁇ l ⁇ 490 nm, as shown for values for the exemplary first and second lighting channels shown in Table 3, which shows the percent spectral energy in the range 440 ⁇ l ⁇ 490 nm in comparison to the total spectral energy in the range 380 ⁇ l ⁇ 780 nm.
  • first and second wavelength values can be selected for the first circadian- stimulating energy characteristic and the second circadian -stimulating energy characteristic of the percentages of the spectral power m the first spectral power distribution and the second spectral power distribution between the first and second wavelength values, including but not limited to wavelength ranges (in nm) from about 400 to about 410, about 410 to about 420, about 420 to about 430, about 430 to about 440, about 440 to about 450, about 450 to about 460, about 460 to about 470, about 470 to about 480, about 480 to about 490, about 490 to about 500, about 500 to about 510, about 510 to about 520, about 520 to about 530, about 530 to about 540, about 540 to about 550, or about 550 to about 560.
  • one or more of the circadian-stimulating energy characteristics of the lighting systems can be EML values of the first, second, and third white light.
  • the lighting systems can provide a ratio of a first EML value of the first spectral power distribution to a second EML valise of the second spectral power distribution.
  • the ratio of the first EML value to the second EML valise can be between about 2.0 and about 5.5, between about 3.0 and about 5.0, between about 2.8 and about 3.8, between about 2.6 and about 3.3, between about 4.0 and about 5.5, between about 4.5 and about 5.5, between about 5.5 and about 6.5, between about 6.5 and about 7.5, between about 7.5 and about
  • the ratio of the first EML value to the second EML value can be about 2.0, about 2.1, about 2.2, about 2.3, about 2.4, about 2.5, about 2.6, about 2.7, about 2 8, about 2.9, about 3.0, about
  • the first spectral power distribution has a first circadian-stimulating energy characteristic
  • the second spectral power distribution has a second circadian- stimulating energy characteristic.
  • the first circadian-stimulating energy characteristic can be a first percentage, the first percentage comprising the percentage of the spectral power between 380 nm and 780 nm in the first spectral pow3 ⁇ 4r distribution between 440 nm and 490 nm.
  • the second circadian-stimulating energy characteristic can be a second percentage, the second percentage comprising the percentage of the spectral power between 380 nm and 780 nm in the second spectral power distribution between 440 nm and 490 nm.
  • the first percentage can be between about 15% and about 25%, between about 16% and about 22%, about 16%, about 17%, about 18%, about 19%, about 20%, about 21%, about 22%, about 23%, about 24%, or about 25%.
  • the second percentage can be between about 0.9% and about 1.05%, between about 0.85% and about 0.95%, between about 0.85% and about 0.90%, between about 0.90% and about 0.95%, about 0.90%, about 0.91%, about 0.92%, about 0.93%, about 0.94%, about 0.95%, about 0.96%, about 0.97%, about 0.98%, about 0.99%, about 1.00%, about 1.01%, about 1.02%, about 1.03%, about 1.04%, or about 1.05%.
  • the lighting systems can have a ratio of the first percentage to the second percentage of between about 13 and about 30, between about 15 and about 25, between about 20 and about 25, between about 20 and about 30, between about 18 and about 22, about 13, about 14, about 15, about 16, about 17, about 18, about 19, about 20, about 21, about 22, about 23, about 24, about 25, about 26, about 27, about 28, about 29, or about 30.
  • the bioactive LRNE red light in the display systems can have long red near infrared energy characteristics that lead to biological effects in users.
  • the LRNE and overall light emissions including the LRNE can have a first LRNE energy characteristic related to the associated first spectral power distribution of the long red portion of the LRNE or overall light emissions.
  • the LRNE and overall light emissions including the LRNE can have a second LRNE energy characteristic related to the associated second spectral power distribution of the near infrared portion of the LRNE or overall light emissions.
  • Lighting systems that may he used in a bioactive computer display system in accordance with the principles of the present disclosure may he controlled over time to affect a person’s circadian cycle, and other physiological functions and/or psychological functions throughout the day m different ways. Modes include controlled application or reduction of CSE and application or reduction of LRNE.
  • the lighting systems may be automatically or manually adj usted.
  • the lighting systems may be adjusted based on sensor data, activity data, social media data, etc.
  • the display systems are installed in the environment of a lighting installation, networking features automatically engage upon powering up one or more the display systems, and the display systems may automatically commission themselves, such as by connecting to an overall control platform and/or to other display systems.
  • the display systems in an installation may self-commission and seif- configure to create a network connection between the display systems m the environment and a remote operator (such as in the cloud).
  • the display systems may configure in a master/slave, ring, mesh, or peer-to-peer network, by which autonomous control features may be engaged in the environment.
  • remote control features may be engaged using the network connection to the platform or other remote operators.
  • networked communication can be used among components in a deployed lighting installation that includes display systems. Once installed and commissioned, control of the lighting installation may be handed over to an operator of a platform, such as a building owner, occupant, landlord, tenant, or the like.
  • handoff may include using identity and authentication features, such as using keys, passwords, or the like that allow operation of the lighting installation by permitted users.
  • a remote-control interface of the platform may be used by an operator for remote operation of the lighting installation.
  • the remote-control interface may use a lighting project data structure as a source of knowledge about the properties, configurations, control capabilities, and other elements of a lighting installation, so that the same platform used for the design of the lighting installation may he used to control the lighting installation.
  • the remote-control interface may include operational guidance features, such as guiding users through the operation of a lighting installation.
  • an autonomous control system may be provided for a lighting installation that includes display systems of the present disclosure, by which the lighting installation may control various features of the lighting system, such as based on information collected locally in the environment, such as from one or more sensors.
  • the autonomous control system may automatically adjust control parameters for a tight source, including but not limited to display systems, to achieve improved adherence to the overall specifications for a lighting installation, may adjust timing variables based on detected usage patterns in a space, may adjust lighting properties based on changes in a space (such as changes in colors paints, carpet and fabrics), and the like.
  • the lighting installation may include an operational feedback system, configured to collect information about the lighting installation, which may include interfaces for soliciting and receiving user feedback (such as regarding satisfaction with the installation or indicating desired changes) and which may include a lighting installation sensor system, such as including light sensors, motion sensors, temperature sensors, and others to collect information about the actual lighting conditions in the environment, activities of occupants within the environment, and the like.
  • an operational feedback system configured to collect information about the lighting installation, which may include interfaces for soliciting and receiving user feedback (such as regarding satisfaction with the installation or indicating desired changes) and which may include a lighting installation sensor system, such as including light sensors, motion sensors, temperature sensors, and others to collect information about the actual lighting conditions in the environment, activities of occupants within the environment, and the like.
  • Information collected by the lighting installation sensor system may be relayed to a validation system of the lighting platform, such as for validation that an installation is operating as designed, including by comparison of light properties at various locations in the environment with the specifications and requirements provided in the lighting design environment, such as reflected in the lighting project data structure.
  • the variances from the specifications and requirements may be provided to the autonomous control system and/or the remote- control system, so that adjustments may be made, either autonomously or by a local or remote operator of the lighting installation, to enable adjustments (such as to colors, intensities, color temperatures, beam directions, and other factors), such as to cause the lighting installation to better meet the specifications and requirements.
  • the operational feedback system may also capture feedback that leads to revisiting the lighting design in the lighting design environment, which may induce further iteration, resulting m changes to control parameters for the display systems, as well as automated ordering of additional or substitute display systems, with updated installation and operational guidance.
  • remote control may enable field programmable lighting systems, such as for transitional environments like museums (where art objects change regularly), stores (where merchandise shifts) and the like as well as for customizable environments (such as personalizing lighting in a hotel room according to a specification for a guest (which may include having the guest select an aesthetic filter) or personalized lighting for a workstation for an employee in an office setting.
  • Such features may enable the lighting installation to change configurations (such as among different aesthetic filters) for multi-use environments, multi-tenant environments, and the like where lighting conditions may need to change substantially over time.
  • a lighting system may include navigation features, such as being associated with beacons, where the lighting system interacts with one or more devices to track users within a space.
  • the display systems and their locations may be associated with a map, such as the map of the lighting space in the design
  • the map may be provided from the lighting design environment to one or more other location or navigation systems, such that locations of display systems may be used as known locations or points of interest within a space.
  • the lighting installation may be designed for an operation that is coordinated with one or more external systems, which may serve as inputs to the lighting installation, such as music, video and other entertainment content (such as to coordinate lighting with sound).
  • Inputs may include voice control inputs, which may include systems for assessing tone or mood from vocal patterns, such as to adjust lighting based on the same.
  • inputs may also include inputs from wearable devices, such as enabling adjustment of lighting control parameters (autonomously or with remote or local control features) based on physiological factors, such as ones indicating health conditions, emotional states, moods, or the like.
  • Inputs from wearable devices may be used in the operational feedback system, such as to measure reactions to lighting conditions (such as to enable automated adjustment of a lighting installation), as well as to measure impacts on mood, health conditions, energy, wellness factors, and the like.
  • the platform may be configured to change settings or parameters for a lighting installation (including but not limited to display systems of the present disclosure, such as by using a custom tuning system) based on a variety of real time data, with a view to having the lighting installation, including display systems included therein, best suit its environment m a dynamic way.
  • data may ⁇ be obtained that serves as an indicator of the emotional state or the stress level of an environment, and the lighting installation may respond accordingly to that state or stress level.
  • data about the environment may be collected by a wearable device, such as a smartwatch, armband, or the like; for example, data may be collected on acceleration, location, ambient light characteristics, and heart rate, among other possibilities.
  • the data may be provided to the platform for analysis, including using machine learning, such as to observe physiological indicators of stress, mood, or the like under given lighting conditions.
  • the analysis may enable model-based controls (such as where a given mood or state of the users in a room are linked to a set of control parameters appropriate for that state).
  • machine learning may be used; for example, over time, by variation of parameters for lighting objects and fixtures (such as color, color temperature, illumination patterns, lighting distributions, and many others), a machine learning system may, using feedback on outcomes based at least in part on physiological data and other data collected by a wearable device, select and/or promotion lighting installation parameters that improve various measures of stress, mood, satisfaction, or the like.
  • data collected at least in part by a physiological monitor or wearable device may be used as an input to processing logic on a lighting object that changes lighting levels or other parameters to accommodate the‘emotional state' of the users in an environment where the lighting object is located.
  • processing logic on a lighting object that changes lighting levels or other parameters to accommodate the‘emotional state' of the users in an environment where the lighting object is located.
  • inputs may include sy stems that take data harvested from sensors in the lighting installation environment as well as sensors that reflect information about users, such as one or more of physiological sensors (including wearable devices, such as armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, clothing, and the like), sensors on various devices used by a user, ambient sensors, and the like. These may include sensing one or more of temperature, pressure, ambient lighting conditions, localized lighting conditions, lighting spectrum characteristics, humidity, UV light, sound, particles, pollutants, gases (e.g., oxygen, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and radon), radiation, location of objects or items, motion (e.g., speed, direction and/or acceleration).
  • physiological sensors including wearable devices, such as armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, clothing, and the like
  • sensors on various devices used by a user ambient sensors, and the like.
  • ambient sensors and the like. These may include sensing one or more of temperature, pressure, ambient lighting conditions, localized lighting conditions, lighting spectrum characteristics, humidity, UV light, sound, particles, pollutants, gases
  • wearable or physiological sensors may sense one or more of a person' s temperature, blood pressure, heart rate, oxygen saturation, activity type, activity level, galvanic skin response, respiratory rate, cholesterol level (including HDL, LDL and triglyceride), hormone or adrenal levels (e.g., Cortisol, thyroid, adrenaline, melatonin, and others), histamine levels, immune system characteristics, blood alcohol levels, drug content, macro and micro nutrients, mood, emotional state, alertness, sleepiness, and the like.
  • hormone or adrenal levels e.g., Corti
  • the platform may connect to or integrate with data sources of information about users, such as including social networks (FacebookTM, LinkedlnTM, TwitterTM, and the like, sources of medical records (23&MeTM and the like), productivity, collaboration and/or calendaring software (GoogleTM, OutlookTM, scheduling apps and the like), information about web browsing and/or shopping activity, activity on media streaming services (NetflixTM, SpotifyTM, YouTubeTM, PandoraTM and the like), health record information and other sources of insight about the preferences or characteristics of users of the space of a lighting installation, including psychographic, demographic and other characteristics.
  • the platform may use information from sources that indicate patterns, such as patterns involving periods of time (daily patterns, weekly patterns, seasonal patterns, and the like), paterns involving cultural factors or norms (such as indicating usage patterns or preferences in different regions), patterns relating to personality and preferences, paterns relating to social groups (such as family and work group patterns), and the like in embodiments, the platform may make use of the data harvested from various sources noted above to make recommendations and/or to optimize (such as automatically, under computer control) the design, ordering, fulfillment, deployment and/or operation of a lighting installation, such as based on understanding or prediction of user behavior.
  • sources that indicate patterns such as patterns involving periods of time (daily patterns, weekly patterns, seasonal patterns, and the like), paterns involving cultural factors or norms (such as indicating usage patterns or preferences in different regions), patterns relating to personality and preferences, paterns relating to social groups (such as family and work group patterns), and the like in embodiments, the platform may make use of the data harvested from various sources noted above to make recommendations and
  • the platform may anticipate user needs and optimize the lighting installation to enhance productivity, alertness, emotional well-being, satisfaction, safety and/or sleep.
  • the platform may control one or more display systems of the present disclosure in accordance with the user needs of the environment based on this information.
  • the platform may store a space utilization data structure that indicates, over time, how people use the space of the lighting installation, such as indicating what hallways are more trafficked, and the like. This may inform understanding of a space, such as indicating what is an entry, what is a passage, what is a workspace, and the like, winch may be used to suggest changes or updates to a lighting design.
  • sensors may be used to collect and read where people have been in the space, such as using one or more video cameras, IR sensors, microwave sensors. LIDAR, ultrasound or the like.
  • the platform may collect and read what adjustments people have made, such as task lamp activation and other activities that indicate how a lighting fixture is used by an individual in a space. By way of these examples, aggregate usage information may be used to optimize a lighting design and adjust other lighting designs. Based on these factors, a space may be dynamically adjusted, and the lighting model for an installation may be updated to reflect the actual installation.
  • control capabilities of the display systems may include dynamic configuration of control parameters, such as providing a dimming curve for a light source, including but not limited to a display system of the present disclosure, that is customized to the preferences of a designer or other user. This may include a selection from one or more modes, such as ones described elsewhere herein that have desired effects on mood or aesthetic factors, that have desired health effects, that meet the functional requirements, or the like.
  • a melanopic flux may, m many embodiments, need to be at least 10: 1 and in further embodiments, may need to be 20: 1 , 50: 1, 100: 1, or a greater ratio. It will be appreciated m light of the disclosure that most conventional systems simply adjust from a warm CCT to a cool CCT, which may only provide a 2: 1 or 3: 1 ratio of melanopic flux, which may not be enough to provide health benefits.
  • the platform may include spectral tuning targets for display systems of the present disclosure that may optimize this ratio based on local installation environments. These targets, along with adjustments intensity of light fe.g., 4: 1) may provide a higher ratio, such as a 10: 1 ratio or greater, and thus provide greater melanopic flux ratios.
  • the platform may support an ability to shift the bias of light in a room.
  • controlled variation of one or more display systems of the present disclosure in a lighting environment can contribute to generating a lighting bias typical of being outside.
  • various other programmable modes may be provided, such as display system settings where using different combinations of color light sources to achieve a given mixed color output may be optimized for efficacy, efficiency, color quality, health impact (e.g., circadian action), or to satisfy other requirements.
  • the programmable modes may also include programmable dimming curves, color tuning curves, and the like (such as allowing various control interfaces, such as extra-low voltage (ELY) controllers or voltage-based dimmers to affect fixture colors, such as where a custom tuning curve provides a start point, an end point and a dimming and/or color tuning path in response to a level of dimming).
  • ELY extra-low voltage
  • programmable modes may use conventional tuning mechanisms, such as simple interpolation systems (which typically use two or three white color LEDs) are dimmable on a zero to ten-volt analog system, and have a second voltage-based input for adjusting the CCT of a fixture between warm and cool CCTs
  • the display systems as described herein can provide for tunable ranges of color points at various x, y coordinates on the 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram. Because of the wide range of potential white or non white colors produced by the display systems, they may be controlled by the platform that may specify a particular x, y coordinate on the CIE diagram. Lighting control protocols like DMXTM and Dali 2.0TM may achieve this result.
  • a programmable color curve for an LED driver may be input, such as through an interface of the platform, or through a desktop software interface, a mobile phone, a tablet app, or the like, that enables a user to define a start and stop point to a color tuning curve and to specify how it will be controlled by a secondary- input, such as a voltage-based input (e.g., a 0 to 10-volt input) to the fixture.
  • a secondary- input such as a voltage-based input (e.g., a 0 to 10-volt input) to the fixture.
  • a voltage-based input e.g., a 0 to 10-volt input
  • an exemplary color curve can have a starting point around 8000K biased above the black body curve, with the color curve crossing the black body around 2700K, and finishing around 1800K below the black body curve.
  • another exemplary curve could be programmed such that the start was 4000K well above the black body, with the end being 4000K well below the black body.
  • any adjustment would be in hue only, not CCT.
  • Further examples may include a curve that never produces a white color, such as starting in the purple and finishing in orange. In any of these cases, these curves may be programmed into display systems via the interface of the platform, the desktop, mobile phone or tablet. In embodiments, the curves may be designed, saved, and then activated, such as using the secondary
  • a three-channel warm dim mode may be used, such as that described more fully in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/712,182 filed July 30, 2018, which is incorporated herein in its entirety for all purposes, for target applications where the“fully on” CCT falls between 3000K and 2500K
  • the CCT may be gradually decreased to between 2500K and 1 800K.
  • the hue adjustment may all occur below the black body curve.
  • Alternative embodiments may use a cyan channel as described elsewhere herein, either long-blue- pumped cyan or short-blue-pumped cyan, and a red channel as described elsewhere herein, plus a 4000K white channel as described elsewhere herein to achieve a warm dimming mode that allows for adjustment both above and below the black body curve.
  • the white channel can have a color point within a 7-step MacAdam ellipse around any point on the black body locus having a correlated color temperature between about 3500K and about 6500K.
  • the display systems of the present disclosure can include a 4-channel color system as described elsewhere herein and in U.S.
  • a programmable mode may be included within the driver that adjusts color with the dimming percentage as well. In some aspects, this may be similar to a conventional control mode, except that the color control would not be on the secondary 0 to 10-volt channel, but may be activated through the primary 0 to 10-volt input channel or ELY controller.
  • the“starting” color point may be the one when the fixture was“fully on.”
  • the “ending” color point may be the one where the fixture is maximally dimmed. It is thus possible to make full range color change, such as purple to orange, which is slaved to the 0 to 10-volt or ELY dimming signal.
  • an optimized mode may be provided.
  • the maximally efficient mode may typically be one that uses the colors that have x, y coordinates closest to the target x, y coordinate. But for best color quality', utilizing a fourth channel (and thereby requiring more light from the color in the opposite“comer”) may help provide a desired spectral power distribution.
  • a digital power system is provided herein (including firmware-driven powar conversion and LED current control) that controls a multichannel color system, such as a 4-channel color sy stem, and allows for the inclusion of“modes” which may calculate the correct color balance between the various channels to provide optimized outputs.
  • modes may occur around one or more of efficacy, color quality, circadian effects, and other factors. Other modes are possible, such as optimizing for contrast, particular display requirements.
  • machine learning may be used, such as based on various feedback measures, such as relating to mood (stated by the user or measured by one or more sensors), noise levels (such as indicating successful utilization of a space based on a desired level of noise), returns on investment (such as where display systems are intended to promote retail merchandise), reported pain levels, measured health levels, performance levels of users (including fitness, wellness, and educational performance, among others), sleep levels, vitamin D levels, melatonin levels, and many others.
  • various feedback measures such as relating to mood (stated by the user or measured by one or more sensors), noise levels (such as indicating successful utilization of a space based on a desired level of noise), returns on investment (such as where display systems are intended to promote retail merchandise), reported pain levels, measured health levels, performance levels of users (including fitness, wellness, and educational performance, among others), sleep levels, vitamin D levels, melatonin levels, and many others.
  • the lighting installations including the display systems may be operated or controlled based on external information, such as based on seasonal lighting conditions, weather, climate, collective mood indicators (such as based on stock market data, news feeds, or sentiment indices), analyses of social network data, and the like. This may include controlling a system to reflect, or influence, the mood of occupants.
  • the simulations also included the absorption spectrum and particle size of phosphor particles.
  • the LED strings generating combined emissions within blue, short-blue-pumped cyan, and red color regions were prepared using spectra of a LUXEON Z Color Line royal blue LEDs (product code LXZ1-PR01) of color bin codes 3, 4, 5, or 6, one or more LUXEON Z Color Line blue LEDs (LXZ1-PB01) of color bin code 1 or 2, or one or more
  • the LED strings generating combined emissions with color points within the long-blue-pumped cyan regions were prepared using spectra of LUXEON Rebel Blue LEDs (LXML-PB01, LXML-PB02) of color bins 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, which have peak wavelengths ranging from 460 nm to 485 nm, or LUXEON Rebel Cyan LEDs (LXML-PE01) of color bins 1, 2, 3,
  • LED strings generating combined emissions with color points within the yellow and violet regions were simulated using spectra of LEDs having peak wavelengths of between about 380 nm and about 420 nm, such as one or more 410 nm peak wavelength violet LEDs, one or more LUXEON Z UV LEDs (product codes LHUV-0380-, LHUV-0385-, LHUV- 0390-, LHUV-0395-, LHUV-0400-, LHUV-0405-, LHUV-0410-, LHUV-0415-, LHUV- 0420-,) (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), one or more LUXEON UV EC LEDs (product codes LxF3-U4l O) (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam,
  • the emission, excitation and absorption curves are available from commercially available phosphor manufacturers such as Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Corporation (Tokyo, Japan), Intematix Corporation (Fremont, CA), ENID Performance Materials of Merck KGaA (Darmstadt, Germany), and PhosphorTech Corporation (Kennesaw, GA).
  • the luminophoric mediums used in the LED strings were combinations of one or more of Compositions A, B, and D and one or more of Compositions C, E, and F as described more fully elsewhere herein.
  • Those of skill in the art appreciate that various combinations of LEDs and luminescent blends can be combined to generate combined emissions with desired color points on the 1931 C1E chromaticity diagram and the desired spectral power distributions.
  • the red channel may be deployed as one or more LRNE channels only or a red channel with at least one LRNE channel.
  • the LRNE can be used m a method, device or system m conjunction with blue light providing CSE or any blue channel providing or the LRNE may be used independently of CSE or lots of blue.
  • a display system was simulated having four LED strings.
  • a first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and
  • a second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of Red Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5 and 7-9.
  • a third LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a short-blue-pumped cyan color channel having the color point and characteristics of Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5.
  • a fourth LED string is driven by a cyan LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 505 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a long-blue-pumped cyan channel having the color point and characteristics of Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1 as described abo ve and shown m Tables 3-5.
  • Tables 16-19 shows light- rendering characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus.
  • Table 18 shows data for white light color points generated using only the first, second, and third LED strings in high-CRl mode.
  • Table 16 shows data for white light color points generated using all four LED strings in highest-CRI mode.
  • Table 17 shows data for white light color points generated using only the first, second, and fourth LED strings in high- EML mode.
  • Table 19 show performance comparison between white light color points generated at similar approximate CCT values under high-EML mode and high-CRI mode.
  • a display system was simulated having four LED strings.
  • a first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5.
  • a second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of Red Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5 and 7-9.
  • a fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 380 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow' color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15.
  • a sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 380 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 10-12.
  • Tables 23-24 shows light- rendering characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus.
  • Table 23 shows data for white light color points generated using the first, second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the blue, red, yellow, and violet channels, in low-EML mode.
  • Table 24 shows data for white light color points generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-low-EML mode.
  • a display system was simulated having four LED strings.
  • a first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5.
  • a second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of Red Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5 and 7-9.
  • a fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 400 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 2 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15.
  • a sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 400 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 2 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 10-12.
  • Tables 25-26 shows light- rendering characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus.
  • Table 25 shows data for white light color points generated using the first, second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the blue, red, yellow, and violet channels, in low-EML mode.
  • Table 26 shows data for white light color points generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-low-EML mode.
  • a display system was simulated having four LED strings.
  • a first LED siring is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5.
  • a second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of Red Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5 and 7-9.
  • a fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 410 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 3 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15.
  • a sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 410 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 3 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 10-12.
  • Tables 27-28 shows light- rendering characteri stics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus.
  • Table 27 shows data for white light color points generated using the first, second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the blue, red, yellow, and violet channels, in low-EML mode.
  • Table 28 shows data for white light color points generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-low-EML mode.
  • a display system was simulated having four LED strings.
  • a first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5.
  • a second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of Red Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5 and 7-9.
  • a fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 420 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow' color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow' Channel 4 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15.
  • a sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 420 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 4 as described above and shown m Tables 5 and 10-12.
  • Table 29 shows light-rendering characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus.
  • Table 29 shows data for white light color points generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the red, yellow', and violet channels, m very-low-EML mode.
  • a display system was simulated having six lighting channels.
  • the six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 1 and Example 3: Blue Channel 1, Red Channel 1, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Yellow Chanel 1, and Violet Channel 1
  • the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels.
  • Tables 30-31 show EML and CS values at various nominal CCT values under different operating modes and the % changes that can be achieved by switching between operating modes at the same nominal CCT.
  • a display system was simulated having six lighting channels.
  • the six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 1 and Example 4: Blue Channel 1 , Red Channel 1 , Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Yellow Chanel 2, and Violet Channel 2.
  • the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels.
  • Tables 32-33 show EML and CS values at various nominal CCT values under different operating modes and the % changes that can be achieved by switching between operating modes at the same nominal CCT.
  • a display system was simulated having six lighting channels.
  • the six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 1 and Example 5: Blue Channel 1, Red Channel 1, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan Channel l , Yellow' Chanel 3, and Violet Channel 3.
  • the device can he operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels.
  • Tables 34-35 show EML and CS values at various nominal CCT values under different operating modes and the % changes that can be achieved by switching between operating modes at the same nominal CCT.
  • a display system was simulated having six lighting channels.
  • the six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 1 and Example 6: Blue Channel 1, Red Channel 1, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Yellow Chanel 4, and Violet Channel 4.
  • the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels.
  • Tables 36-37 show EML and CS values at various nominal CCT values under different operating modes and the % changes that can be achieved by switching between operating modes at the same nominal CCT.
  • the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise three lighting channels as described elsewhere herein.
  • the three lighting channels comprise a red lighting channel, a yellow lighting channel, and a violet lighting channel.
  • the display systems can be operated m a very-low-EML operating mode in which the red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used.
  • the display systems can further comprise a control system configured to control the relative intensities of light generated in the red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel in order to generate white light at a plurality of points near the Planckian locus between about 4000K and about 1400K CCT.
  • the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise four lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain implementations, the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise four lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain
  • the four lighting channels comprise a red lighting channel, a y ellow lighting channel, a violet lighting channel, and a blue lighting channel.
  • the display systems can be operated in a very-low-EML operating mode in which the red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used.
  • the display systems can be operated in a low-EML operating mode in which the blue lighting channel, the red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used.
  • the display systems can transition between the low-EML and the very- low-EML operating modes m one or both directions while the display systems are providing white light along a path of color points near the Planckian locus.
  • the display systems can transition between the low-EML and very-low- EML operating modes in one or both directions while the display systems are changing the CCT of the white light along the path of color points near the Planckian locus.
  • the low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 10000K and about 1800K.
  • the very-low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 4000K and about 1400K.
  • the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise five lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain implementations, the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise five lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain
  • the five lighting channels comprise a red lighting channel, a yellow lighting channel, a violet lighting channel, a blue lighting channel, and a long-blue- pumped cyan lighting channel.
  • the display systems can be operated in a very-low-EML operating mode in which the red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used.
  • the display systems can be operated in a Jow-EML operating mode in which the blue lighting channel, the red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used.
  • the display systems can be operated in a high-EML operating mode in which the blue lighting channel, the red lighting channel, and the long-blue-pumped cyan lighting channel are used in certain implementations, the display systems can transition among two or more of the low-EML, the very-low-EML, and high-EML operating modes while the display systems are providing white light along a path of color points near the Planckian locus.
  • the display systems can transition among two or more of the low-EML, the very-low-EML, and high-EML operating modes while the display systems are changing the CCT of the white light along the path of color points near the Planckian locus.
  • the low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 10000K and about 1800K.
  • the very-low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 4000K and about 1400K.
  • the high-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about I00QQK and about 1800K.
  • a semiconductor light emitting device was simulated having three LED strings.
  • a first LED string is a commercially available 6500K white LED having a spectral power distribution as shown in FIG. 32.
  • a second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 rim to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a LRNE channel having the characteristics of Long-Red (LRNE) Channel A as shown in Tables 7-9.
  • the spectral power distribution for Long-Red Channel A is shown in FIG. 34.
  • the phosphor materials can include a YAG phosphor, a red phosphor with emission peak at about 630 nm, and a red phosphor with an emission peak at about 700 nm
  • a third LED string is a commercially available“lime” LED having a spectral power distribution as shown in FIG. 33.
  • Table 64 shows light rendering characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus.
  • EXAMPLE 13B A semiconductor light emitting device was simulated having three LED strings.
  • a first LED string is a commercially available 6500K white LED having a spectral power distribution as shown in FIG. 32.
  • a second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient lummophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a long-red (LRNE) channel having the characteristics of Long-Red Channel B as shown in Tables 7-9.
  • the spectral power distribution for Long-Red Channel B is shown in FIG. 35.
  • the phosphor materials can include a YAG phosphor, a red phosphor with emission peak at about 630 nm, and a red phosphor with an emission peak at about 750 nm.
  • a third LED string is a commercially available“lime” LED having a spectral power distribution as shown in FIG. 33.
  • Table 65 show3 ⁇ 4 light-rendering characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus
  • a display system was simulated having four LED strings.
  • a first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5.
  • a second LED string generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of Long- Red Channel A, Red Channel B, or Exemplary Long-Red Channel Average as described above and shown in Tables 7-9.
  • a third LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a short-blue- pumped cyan color channel having the color point and characteristics of Short-Blue- Pumped Cyan Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5.
  • a fourth LED string is driven by a cyan LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 505 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a long-blue-pumped cyan channel having the color point and characteristics of Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5.
  • White light color points can generate using only the first, second, and third LED strings in a high-CRI mode.
  • White light color points can be generated using all four LED strings in a highest-CRI mode.
  • ⁇ hite light color points can be generated using only the first, second, and fourth LED strings m a high-EML mode.
  • a display system was simulated having four LED strings.
  • a first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophorie medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5.
  • a second LED string generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of LRNE in Long-Red Channel A, Red Channel B, or Exemplary Long-Red Channel Average as described above and shown in Tables 7-9.
  • a fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 380 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophorie medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15.
  • a sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 380 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophorie medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 10-12.
  • White light color points can be generated using the first, second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the blue, long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in low-EML mode.
  • White light color points can be generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-iow-EML. mode.
  • a display system was simulated having four LED strings.
  • a first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophorie medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5.
  • a second LED string generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of LRNE / Long-Red Channel A, Red Channel B, or Exemplary Long-Red Channel A verage as described above and shown in Tables 7-9.
  • a fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 400 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow' color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 2 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15.
  • a sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission w'aveiength of about 400 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 2 as described above and shown m Tables 5 and 10-12.
  • White light color points can be generated using the first, second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the blue, long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in low-EML mode.
  • White light color points can be generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-low-EML mode.
  • a display system was simulated having four LED strings.
  • a first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5.
  • a second LED string generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of LRNE described in Long-Red Channel A, Red Channel B, or Exemplary Long-Red Channel Average as described above and shown in Tables 7-9.
  • a fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 410 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 3 as described above and shown m Tables 5 and 13-15.
  • a sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 410 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and
  • White light color points can be generated using the first, second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the blue, long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in low-EML mode.
  • White light color points can be generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-low-EML mode.
  • a display system was simulated having four LED strings.
  • a first LED siring is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5.
  • a second LED string generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of ERNE in Long-Red Channel A, Red Channel B, or Exemplary Long-Red Channel Average as described above and shown in Tables 7-9.
  • a fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 420 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 4 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15.
  • a sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 420 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 4 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 10-12.
  • White light color points can be generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-low-EML mode.
  • a display system was simulated having six lighting channels.
  • the six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 13C and
  • Example 13E Blue Channel 1 , a long-red channel, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Yellow' Chanel 1, and Violet Channel 1.
  • the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels.
  • EXAMPLE 131 [00225] A display system was simulated having six lighting channels.
  • the six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 13C and Example 13F: Blue Channel 1, a long-red channel, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1 , Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Yellow Chanel 2, and Violet Channel 2.
  • Blue Channel 1 a long-red channel
  • Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1 a long-red channel
  • Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1 Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1
  • Yellow Chanel 2 and Violet Channel 2.
  • the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels.
  • a display system was simulated having six lighting channels.
  • the six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 13C and Example 13G: Blue Channel 1, a long-red channel, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Yellow Chanel 3, and Violet Channel 3.
  • the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels.
  • a display system was simulated having six lighting channels.
  • the six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 13C and Example 13H: Blue Channel 1 , a long-red channel, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1 , Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1 , Yellow Chanel 4, and Violet Channel 4.
  • the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels.
  • the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise three lighting channels as described elsewhere herein.
  • the three lighting channels comprise a long-red lighting channel, a yellow lighting channel, and a violet lighting channel.
  • the display systems can be operated in a very-low-EML operating mode in which the long-red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used.
  • the display systems can further comprise a control sy stem configured to control the relative intensities of light generated in the long-red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel in order to generate white light at a plurality of points near the PJanckian locus between about 4000K and about 140QK CCT.
  • the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise four lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain implementations,
  • the four lighting channels comprise a long-red lighting channel, a yellow lighting channel, a violet lighting channel, and a blue lighting channel.
  • the display systems can be operated m a very-low-EML operating mode in which the long-red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used.
  • the display systems can be operated in a low-EML operating mode in which the blue lighting channel, the long-red lighting channel, the yellow r lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used.
  • the display systems can transition between the low-EML and the very-low-EML operating modes in one or both directions while the display systems are providing white light along a path of color points near the Planckian locus.
  • the display systems can transition between the low-EML and very-low- EML operating modes in one or both directions while the display systems are changing the CCT of the white light along the path of color points near the Planckian locus.
  • the low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 10000K and about 1800K
  • the very-low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 4000K and about 1400K.
  • the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise five lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain implementations, the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise five lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain
  • the five lighting channels comprise a long-red lighting channel, a yellow lighting channel, a violet lighting channel, a blue lighting channel, and a long- blue-pumped cyan lighting channel.
  • the display systems can be operated m a very-low-EML operating mode in winch the long-red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used.
  • the display systems can be operated in a low-EML operating mode in which the blue lighting channel, the long-red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used.
  • the display systems can be operated in a high-EML operating mode in which the blue lighting channel, the long-red lighting channel, and the long-blue-pumped cyan lighting channel are used.
  • the display systems can transition among two or more of the low-EML, the very-low-EML, and high-EML operating modes while the display systems are providing white light along a path of color points near the Planckian locus.
  • the display systems can transition among two or more of the low-EML, the very-low-EML, and high-EML operating modes while the display systems are changing the CCT of the white light along the path of color points near the Planckian locus.
  • the low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 10000K and about 1800K.
  • the very-low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 4000K and about 1400K.
  • the high-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 10000K and about 1 BOOK
  • the simulated lighting systems can be used to provide one or more white light sources for a backlighting system in the display systems of the present disclosure.
  • LED strings and recipient lummophonc mediums with particular emissions were selected, and then spectral power distributions and various light rendering characteristics and circadian- stimulating energy characteristics were calculated.
  • Ra, R9, R13, R15, LER, Rf, Rg, CLA, CS, EML, BLH factor, CAF, CER, COI, GAI, GAI15, GAIBB, and circadian-stimulating energy characteristics were calculated at each representative point. Characteristics and aspects of the spectral power distributions are shown in Tables 3-12 and FIGs 9-16.
  • Each lighting channel was simulated with an LED emission spectrum and excitation and emission spectra of luminophoric medium(s).
  • the lummophonc mediums can comprise luminescent compositions of phosphors, quantum dots, or combinations thereof, with simulations performed based on absorption/emission spectrums and particle sizes.
  • the exemplary first lighting channels were simulated using spectra of LEDs having peak wavelengths of between about 440 nm and about 510 nm, such as a 450 nm peak wavelength blue LED, one or more LUXEON Z Color Line royal blue LEDs (product code LXZ1-PR01) of color bin codes 3, 4, 5, or 6 (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), one or more LUXEON Z Color Line blue LEDs (LXZ1-PB01) of color bin code 1 or 2 (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), one or more LUXEON royal blue LEDs (product code LXML-PROl and LXML-PR02) of color bins 3, 4, 5, or 6 (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), one or more LUXEON Rebel Blue LEDs (LXML-PB01, LXML-PB02) of color bins 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 (Lumileds Holding B.V.,
  • the exemplary second lighting channels were simulated using spectra of LEDs having peak wavelengths of between about 380 nm and about 420 nm, such as one or more 410 nm peak wavelength violet LEDs, one or more LUXEON Z UV LEDs (product codes LHUV-0380-, LHUV-0385-, LHUV-0390-, LHUV-0395-, LHUV-0400-, LHUV- 0405-, LHUV-0410-, LHUV-0415-, LHUV-0420-,) (Lumileds Holding B.V.,
  • the emission, excitation and absorption curves for phosphors and quantum dots are available from commercial manufacturers such as Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Corporation (Tokyo, Japan), Intematix Corporation (Fremont, CA), EMD Performance Materials of Merck KGaA (Darmstadt, Germany), and PhosphorTech Corporation (Kennesaw, GA).
  • the luminophoric mediums used m the first and second lighting channels were simulated as combinations of one or more of luminescent compositions as described more fully elsewhere herein.
  • Those of skill in the art appreciate that various combinations of LEDs and luminescent blends can he combined to generate combined emissions with desired color points on the 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram and the desired spectral power distributions.
  • a lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 8.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown m Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak -wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch2” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 9, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 8.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for tins pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was Simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch3” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 10, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“24QQK Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 8.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch4” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 5, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 8.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“5000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 12, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51 , 53, and 56 and in FIG. 8.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • EXAMPLE 19 A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch2” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 7.
  • the valises for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown m Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was Simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch3” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 10, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch2” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 7.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was Simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch4” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 5, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“24QQK Ch2” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 7.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown m Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“5000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 12, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch2” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 7.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch3” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 6.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown m Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch2” m Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 9, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch3” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 6.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch3” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 10, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch3” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 6.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch4” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG 5, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch3” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 6.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated lummophonc medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“5000K Chi” m Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 12, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch3” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 6.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown m Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof
  • a lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“1800K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 1 1.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • EXAMPLE 30 [00250] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch2” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 9, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“1800K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 11.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated lummophonc medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak w3 ⁇ 4velength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was Simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch4” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 5, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“1800K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 1 1.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was Simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“5000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 12, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“1800K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 11.
  • the values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • a lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“Exemplary' 1 st channels avg” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as
  • the first lighting channel has a first color point at (0.3735, 0.3719) ccx, ccy coordinates.
  • the second lighting channel has a second color point at (0.5021, 0.4137) ccx, ccy coordinates.
  • the first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
  • the second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof
  • a display system was simulated having three LED strings for use in a warm-dim operation mode.
  • a first LED stung is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a white color point with a 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram (ccx, ccy) coordinates of (0.3818, 0.3797).
  • a second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a red color point with a 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram color point of (0.5932, 0.3903).
  • a third LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient lummophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a cyan color point with a 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram color point of (0.373, 0.4978).
  • Tables 58 and 59 below r shows the spectral power distributions for the red and cyan color points generated by the display system of this Example, with spectral power shown within wavelength ranges in nanometers from 380 nm to 780 nm, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for each color range and normalized to a value of 100.0.
  • Table 60 show3 ⁇ 4 color- rendering and circadian performance characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus.
  • any of the systems of Examples 1-13 and 14-35 can be modified to further include an additional lighting channel, a LRNE channel, that can be controlled to selectively provide LRNE spectral energy in the visible long-red or non-visible near infrared wavelengths ranges described herein.
  • the spectral power distribution of the LRNE channel can be substantially equal to the spectral power of Long-Red Phosphor 675nm or Long-Red Phosphor 700nm shown in Tables 61 -63.
  • the LRNE channel can have a spectral power distribution substantially equal to that of Long-Red Channel A, Long-Red Channel B, or Exemplary Long-Red Channel Average shown in Tables 7-9.
  • One or more of the other channels in the lighting systems can have intensity reduced or turned off entirely when the LRNE channel is activated. Control methods and hardware as described elsewhere herein can be used to control the timing and amount of LRNE spectral energy provided by the systems.
  • external systems can include, but are not limited to one or more computing environments, networks, local devices, remote devices, mobile devices, and wearable technology.
  • each of those systems may provide the external input utilizable with control systems and embodiments discussed herein.
  • external inputs may include, but are not limited to audible, tactile, sensory, and user information through one or more sensors and other means, depending on the external system and its capabilities.
  • external systems and external information may also comprise the same types systems and information discussed below and in various embodiments herein.
  • inputs may also include inputs from sensors associated with wearable devices 3330, such as enabling adjustment of lighting control parameters (autonomously or with remote or local control features) based on
  • physiological factors such as ones indicating health conditions, emotional states, moods, or the like.
  • Inputs from wearable devices may be used in the operational feedback system, such as to measure reactions to lighting conditions (such as to enable automated adjustment of a lighting installation), as well as to measure impacts on mood, health conditions, energy, wellness factors, and the like.
  • the platform may be configured to change settings or parameters for a lighting installation (including but not limited to panel systems of the present disclosure, such as by using a custom tuning system) based on a variety of real time data, with a view to having the lighting installation, including panel systems included therein, best suit its environment in a dynamic way.
  • data may be obtained that serves as an indicator of the emotional state or the stress level of an environment, and the lighting installation may respond accordingly to that state or stress level.
  • data about the environment may be collected by a wearable device 3333, such as a smartwatch, armband, or the like; for example, data may be collected on acceleration, location, ambient light characteristics, and heart rate, among other possibilities.
  • the data may be provided to the platform for analysis, including using machine learning, such as to observe physiological indicators of stress, mood, or the like under given lighting conditions.
  • the analysis may enable model-based controls (such as where a given mood or state of the users in a room are linked to a set of control parameters appropriate for that state).
  • machine learning may be used; for example, over tune, by variation of parameters for lighting objects and fixtures (such as color, color temperature, illumination patterns, lighting distributions, and many others), a machine learning system may, using feedback on outcomes based at least in part on physiological data and other data collected by a wearable device, select and/or promotion lighting installation parameters that improve various measures of stress, mood, satisfaction, or the like.
  • data collected at least in part by a physiological monitor or wearable device may be used as an input to processing logic on a lighting object that changes lighting levels or other parameters to accommodate the 'emotional state' of the users m an environment where the lighting object is located.
  • inputs may include systems that take data harvested from sensors 3335 in the lighting installation environment as well as sensors that reflect information about users, such as one or more of physiological sensors (including wearable devices, such as armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, clothing, and the like), sensors on various devices used by a user, ambient sensors, and the like. These may include sensing one or more of temperature, pressure, ambient lighting conditions, localized lighting conditions, lighting spectrum characteristics, humidity, UV light, sound, particles, pollutants, gases (e.g , oxygen, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and radon), radiation, location of objects or items, motion (e.g., speed, direction and/or acceleration).
  • physiological sensors including wearable devices, such as armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, clothing, and the like
  • sensors on various devices used by a user ambient sensors, and the like. These may include sensing one or more of temperature, pressure, ambient lighting conditions, localized lighting conditions, lighting spectrum characteristics, humidity, UV light, sound, particles, pollutants, gases (e.g , oxygen, carbon dioxide
  • wearable or physiological sensors may sense one or more of a person' s temperature, blood pressure, heart rate, oxygen saturation, activity type, activity level, galvanic skin response, respiratory rate, cholesterol level (including HDL, LDL and triglyceride), hormone or adrenal levels (e.g., Cortisol, thyroid, adrenaline, melatonin, and others), histamine levels, immune system characteristics, blood alcohol levels, drug content, macro and micro nutrients, mood, emotional state, alertness, sleepiness, and the like.
  • hormone or adrenal levels e.g., Corti
  • the platform may connect to or integrate with data sources of information about users, such as including social networks (FacebookTM, LinkedlnTM, TwitterTM, and the like, sources of medical records (23&MeTM and the like), productivity, collaboration and/or calendaring software (GoogleTM, OutlookTM, scheduling apps and the like), information about web browsing and/or shopping activity, activity on media streaming services (NetflixTM, SpotifyTM, YouTubeTM, PandoraTM and the like), health record information and other sources of insight about the preferences or characteristics of users of the space of a lighting installation, including psychographic, demographic and other characteristics.
  • the platform may use information from sources that indicate patterns, such as patterns involving periods of time (daily patterns, weekly patterns, seasonal patterns, and the like), patterns involving cultural factors or norms (such as indicating usage patterns or preferences in different regions), patterns relating to personality and preferences, paterns relating to social groups (such as family and work group patterns), and the like.
  • the platform may make use of the data harvested from various sources noted above to make recommendations and/or to optimize (such as automatically, under computer control) the design, ordering, fulfillment, deployment and/or operation of a lighting installation, such as based on understanding or prediction of user behavior.
  • This may include recommendation or optimization relating to achieving optimal sleep time and duration, setting optimal mealtimes, satisfying natural light exposure requirements during the day, and maintaining tolerable artificial light exposure levels (such as during night time).
  • the platform may anticipate user needs and optimize the lighting installation to enhance productivity, alertness, emotional well-being, satisfaction, safety and/or sleep.
  • the platform may control one or more panel systems of the present disclosure in accordance with the user needs of the environment based on this information.
  • the platform may store a space utilization data structure that indicates, over time, how people use the space of the lighting installation, such as indicating what hallways are more trafficked, and the like. This may inform understanding of a space, such as indicating what is an entry, what is a passage, what is a workspace, and the like, which may be used to suggest changes or updates to a lighting design in embodiments, sensors may be used to collect and read where people have been in the space, such as using one or more video cameras, IR sensors, microwave sensors. LIDAR, ultrasound or the like. In embodiments, the platform may collect and read what adjustments people have made, such as task lamp activation and other activities that indicate how a lighting fixture is used by an individual in a space. By way of these examples, aggregate usage information may be used to optimize a lighting design and adjust other lighting designs. Based on these factors, a space may be dynamically adjusted, and the lighting model for an installation may be updated to reflect the actual installation.
  • control capabilities of the panel systems may include dynamic configuration of control parameters, such as providing a dimming curve for a light source, including but not limited to a panel system of the present disclosure, that is customized to the preferences of a designer or other user. This may include a selection from one or more modes, such as ones described elsewhere herein that have desired effects on mood or aesthetic factors, that have desired health effects, that meet the functional requirements, or the like.
  • Bioactive thresholds may, in some instances, benefit from prolonged exposure to at least one of one of CSE and LRNE.
  • a melanopic flux of at least 10: 1 may be suitable , in other instances the melanopic flux may be 20: 1 , 50: 1, 100: 1 , or a greater ratio. It will be appreciated in light of the disclosure that traditional systems simply adjust from a warm CCT to a cool CCT, which may only provide a 2: 1 or 3 : 1 ratio of melanopic flux, which are below said threshold.
  • the platform may include spectral tuning targets for panel systems of the present disclosure that may optimize this ratio based on local installation
  • a first operational mode along with adjustments intensity of light (e.g., 4: 1) may provide a higher ratio, such as a 10: 1 ratio or greater, and thus provide greater melanopic flux ratios.
  • the platform may support an ability to shift the bias of light in a room.
  • controlled variation of one or more panel systems of the present disclosure in a lighting environment can contribute to generating a lighting bias typical of being outside.
  • various other programmable modes may be provided, such as bioactive panel system settings where using different combinations of color light sources to achieve a given mixed color output may be optimized for efficacy, efficiency, color quality, health impact (e.g., circadian action and/or LRNE action), or to satisfy other requirements.
  • the programmable modes may also include programmable dimming curves, color tuning curves, and the like (such as allowing various control interfaces, such as extra-low voltage (ELY) controllers or voltage-based dimmers to affect fixture colors, such as where a custom tuning curve provides a start point, an end point and a dimming and/or color tuning path in response to a level of dimming).
  • ELY extra-low voltage
  • programmable modes may use conventional tuning mechanisms, such as simple interpolation systems (which typically use two or three white color LEDs) are dimmable on a zero to ten-volt analog system, and have a second voltage-based input for adjusting the CCT of a fixture between warm and cool CCTs.
  • the bioactive panel systems as described herein can provide for tunable ranges of color points at various x, y coordinates on the 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram. Because of the wide range of potential white or non-white colors produced by the panel systems, they may be controlled by the platform that may specify a particular x, y coordinate on the CIE diagram. Lighting control protocols like DMXTM and Dali 2.0TM may achieve this result.
  • control system described herein controls output of at least one CSE and LRNE.
  • a programmable color curve for an LED driver may be input, such as through an interface of the platform, or through a desktop software interface, a mobile phone 3330, a tablet app, or the like, that enables a user to define a start and stop point to a color tuning curve and to specify how it will be controlled by a secondary input, such as a voltage-based input (e.g., a 0 to 10-volt input) to the fixture.
  • a voltage-based input e.g., a 0 to 10-volt input
  • an exemplary color curve can have a starting point around 8000K biased above the black body curve, with the color curve crossing the black body around 2700K, and finishing around 1 BOOK below' the black body curve.
  • another exemplary curve could be programmed such that the start was 4000K well above the black body, with the end being 4000K well below the black body.
  • any adjustment would be in hue only, not CCT.
  • Further examples may include a curve that never produces a white color, such as starting in the purple and finishing in orange. In any of these cases, these curves may be programmed into panel systems via the interface of the platform, the desktop, mobile phone or tablet. In embodiments, the curves may be designed, saved, and then activated, such as using the secondary (supplemental) 0 to 10-volt input.
  • a three-channel warm dim operational mode may be used, such as that described more fully in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/712,182 filed July 30, 2018, which is incorporated herein in its entirety for all purposes, for target applications where the“fully on” CCT falls between 3000K and 2500K.
  • the CCT may be gradually decreased to between 2500K and 1800K.
  • the hue adjustment may all occur below' the black body curve.
  • a cyan channel as described elsewhere herein, either long-blue-pumped cyan or short-blue-pumped cyan, and a red channel which may be ERNE with cyan pumped near infrared as described elsewhere herein, additionally ERNE especially in the infrared region may be produced with phosphors configured for generation of ERNE emission from a below 280 nm LED include but are not limited to: composition formula M700_rb4_lime and s_M750_rb4_M630_yag] LiA102:Fe3+ (peak at 770nms), CdS: Ag+,Cl- (peak at 800nms), ZnSbGaTe:Cr3+,Nd3+ (peak at 845nms), La3In2Ga3012:Cr3+, Dy3+ (peak at 905nms), BaGd2Zn05: Yb3+ (peak at 979nms) and Ba(GdY)2Z
  • the panel systems of the present disclosure can include a 4-channel color system as described elsewhere herein and in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/757,672 filed November 8, 2018, and U.S.
  • a programmable mode may be included within the driver that adjusts color with the dimming percentage as well. In some aspects, this may be similar to a conventional control mode, except that the color control would not be on the secondary 0 to 10-volt channel, but may be activated through the primary 0 to 10-volt input channel or ELY controller.
  • the“starting” color point may be the one when the fixture was“fully on.”
  • the “ending” color point may be the one where the fixture is maximally dimmed. It is thus possible to make full range color change, such as purple to orange, which is slaved to the 0 to 10-volt or ELY dimming signal.
  • an optimized mode may be provided.
  • the maximally efficient mode may typically be one that uses the colors that have x, y coordinates closest to the target x, y coordinate. But for best color quality ⁇ , utilizing a fourth channel (and thereby requiring more light from the color in the opposite“comer”) may help provide a desired spectral power distribution.
  • a digital power system is provided herein (including firmware-driven power conversion and LED current control) that controls a multichannel color system, such as a 4-channel color system, and allows for the inclusion of“modes” which may calculate the correct color balance between the various channels to provide optimized outputs.
  • optimization may occur around one or more of efficacy, color quality, circadian effects, LRNE effects, and other factors.
  • machine learning may be used, such as based on various feedback measures, such as relating to mood (stated by the user or measured by one or more sensors), noise levels (such as indicating successful utilization of a space based on a desired level of noise), returns on investment (such as where panel systems are intended to promote retail merchandise), reported pain levels, measured health levels, performance levels of users (including fitness, wellness, and educational performance, among others), sleep levels, vitamin D levels, melatonin levels, and many others.
  • various feedback measures such as relating to mood (stated by the user or measured by one or more sensors), noise levels (such as indicating successful utilization of a space based on a desired level of noise), returns on investment (such as where panel systems are intended to promote retail merchandise), reported pain levels, measured health levels, performance levels of users (including fitness, wellness, and educational performance, among others), sleep levels, vitamin D levels, melatonin levels, and many others.
  • the lighting installations including the panel systems may be operated or controlled based on external information, such as based on seasonal lighting conditions, weather, climate, collective mood indicators (such as based on stock market data, news feeds, or sentiment indices), analyses of social network data, and the like. This may include controlling a system to reflect, or influence, the mood of occupants.
  • FIG. 36 depicts an example computing environment 3000 suitable for implementing aspects of the embodiments of the present invention, including the control system, which can integrate one or more devices, computing, and lighting systems.
  • the phrase“computing system” generally refers to a dedicated computing device with processing power and storage memory, which supports operating software that underlies the execution of software, applications, and computer programs thereon.
  • computing environment 3000 includes bus 3010 that directly or indirectly couples the following components: memory 3020, one or more processors 3030, I/O interface 3040, and network interface 3050.
  • Bus 3010 is configured to communicate, transmit, and transfer data, controls, and commands between the various components of computing environment 3000.
  • Computing environment 3000 typically includes a variety of computer- readable media.
  • Computer-readable media can be any available media that is accessible by computing environment 3000 and includes both volatile and nonvolatile media, removable and non-removable media.
  • Computer-readable media may comprise both computer storage media and communication media. Computer storage media does not comprise, and in fact explicitly excludes, signals per se.
  • Computer storage media includes volatile and nonvolatile, removable and non-removable, tangible and non-transient media, implemented in any method or technology for storage of information such as computer-readable instructions, data structures, program modules or other data.
  • Computer storage media includes RAM; ROM; EE-PROM; flash memory or other memory technology; CD-ROMs; DVDs or other optical disk storage; magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices; or other mediums or computer storage devices which can be used to store the desired information and which can be accessed by computing environment 3000.
  • Communication media typically embodies computer-readable instructions, data structures, program modules or other data in a modulated data signal such as a carrier wave or other transport mechanism and includes any information delivery media.
  • modulated data signal means a signal that has one or more of its characteristics set or changed in such a manner as to encode information in the signal.
  • communication media includes wired media, such as a wired network or direct-wired connection, and wireless media, such as acoustic, RF, infrared and other wireless media. Combinations of any of the above should also be included within the scope of computer-readable media.
  • Memory 3020 includes computer-storage media in the form of volatile and/or nonvolatile memory .
  • the memory may be removable, non-removable, or a combination thereof.
  • Memory 3020 may be implemented using hardware devices such as solid-state memory, hard drives, optical-disc drives, and the like.
  • Computing environment 3000 also includes one or more processors 3030 that read data from various entities such as memory 3020, I/O interface 3040, and network interface 3050.
  • I/O interface 3040 enables computing environment 3000 to
  • input devices include a keyboard, a pointing device, a touchpad, a touchscreen, a scanner, a
  • I/O interface 3040 is configured to coordinate I/O traffic between memory 3020, the one or more processors 3030, network interface 3050, and any combination of input devices and/or output devices.
  • Network interface 3050 enables computing environment 3000 to exchange data with other computing devices via any suitable network.
  • program modules depicted relative to computing environment 3000, or portions thereof, may be stored in a remote memory storage device accessible via network interface 3050. It will be appreciated that the network connections shown are exemplary and other means of establishing a communications link between the computers may be used.
  • a server that implements a portion or all of one or more of the technologies described herein may include a general-purpose computer system that includes or is configured to access one or more computer- accessible media.
  • FIG. 37 depicts a general-purpose computer system that includes or is configured to access one or more computer-accessible media.
  • computing device 3100 includes one or more processors 3110a, 3110b, and/or 3110h (which may be referred herein singularly as a processor 1010 or in the plural as the processors 3110) coupled to a system memory 3120 via an mput/output (“I/O”) interface 3130.
  • Computing device 3100 further includes a network interface 3140 coupled to I/O interface 3130.
  • computing device 3100 may be a uniprocessor system including one processor 3110 or a multiprocessor system including several processors 31 10 (e.g., two, four, eight, or another suitable number).
  • Processors 31 10 may ⁇ be any suitable processors capable of executing instructions.
  • processors 3110 may be general-purpose or embedded processors implementing any of a variety of instruction set architectures (“ISAs”), such as the x86, PowerPC, SPARC or MIPS ISAs, or any other suitable ISA.
  • ISAs instruction set architectures
  • each of processors 3110 may commonly, but not necessarily, implement the same ISA.
  • a graphics processing unit (“GPU”) 3112 may participate in providing graphics rendering and/or physics processing capabilities.
  • a GPU may, for example, comprise a highly parallelized processor architecture specialized for graphical computations.
  • processors 3110 and GPU 3112 may be implemented as one or more of the same type of device.
  • System memory' 3120 may be configured to store instructions and data accessible by processor(s) 3110.
  • system memory 3120 may be implemented using any suitable memory technology, such as static random access memory (“SRAM”), synchronous dynamic RAM (“SDRAM’), nonvolatile/Flash®-type memory , or any other type of memory.
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic RAM
  • nonvolatile/Flash®-type memory any other type of memory.
  • system memory 3120 stores instructions and data implementing one or more desired functions, such as those methods, techniques, and data described above, as code 3125 and data 3126.
  • I/O interface 3130 may be configured to coordinate I/O traffic between processor 31 10, system memory 3120, and any peripherals in the device, including network interface 3140 or other peripheral interfaces.
  • I/O interface 3130 may perform any necessary' protocol, timing or other data transformations to convert data signals from one component (e.g., system memory- 3120) into a format suitable for use by another component (e.g., processor 31 10).
  • I/O interface 3130 may include support for devices attached through various types of peripheral buses, such as a variant of the Peripheral Component Interconnect (“PCI”) bus standard or the Universal Serial Bus (“USB”) standard, for example.
  • PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
  • USB Universal Serial Bus
  • I/O interface 3130 may be split into two or more separate components, such as a north bridge and a south bridge, for example. Also, in some embodiments some or all of the functionality of I/O interface 3130, such as an interface to system memory 3120, may be incorporated directly into processor 31 10.
  • Network interface 3140 may be configured to allow data to be exchanged between computing device 3100 and other device or devices 3160 attached to a network or networks 3150, such as other computer systems or devices, for example.
  • network interface 3140 may support communication via any suitable wared or wireless general data networks, such as types of Ethernet networks, for example. Additionally, network interface 3140 may support communication via telecommunications/telephony networks, such as analog voice networks or digital fiber communications networks, via storage area networks, such as Fibre Channel SANs (storage area networks), or via any other suitable type of network and/or protocol.
  • system memory 3120 may be one embodiment of a computer-accessible medium configured to store program instructions and data as described above for implementing embodiments of the corresponding methods and apparatus.
  • program instructions and/or data may be received, sent, or stored upon different types of computer-accessible media.
  • a computer-accessible medium may include non-transitory storage media or memory media, such as magnetic or optical media, e.g., disk or DVD/CD coupled to computing device 3100 via I/O interface 3130.
  • a non-transitory computer-accessible storage medium may also include any volatile or non-volatile media, such as RAM (e.g., SDRAM, DDR SDRAM, RDRAM, SRAM, etc.), ROM, etc., that may be included in some embodiments of computing device 3100 as system memory 3120 or another type of memory.
  • a computer-accessible medium may include transmission media or signals, such as electrical, electromagnetic or digital signals, conveyed via a
  • communication medium such as a network and/or a wireless link, such as those that may ⁇ be implemented via network interface 3140.
  • a network and/or a wireless link such as those that may ⁇ be implemented via network interface 3140.
  • Portions or all of multiple computing devices, such as those illustrated in FIG. 31, may be used to implement the described functionality in various embodiments; for example, software components running on a variety of different devices and servers may collaborate to provide the functionality in some embodiments, portions of the described functionality may be implemented using storage devices, network devices or special-purpose computer systems, in addition to or instead of being implemented using general-purpose computer systems.
  • a compute node which may be referred to also as a computing node, may be implemented on a wide variety of computing environments, such as tablet computers, personal computers, smartphones, game consoles, commodity-hardware computers, virtual machines, web services, computing clusters, and computing appliances. Any of these computing devices or environments may, for convenience, be described as compute nodes or as computing nodes.
  • a network set up by an entity, such as a company or a public sector organization, to provide one or more web services (such as various types of cloud-based computing or storage) accessible via the Internet and/or other networks to a distributed set of clients may be termed a provider network.
  • a provider network may include numerous data centers hosting various resource pools, such as collections of physical and/or virtualized computer servers, storage devices, networking equipment, and the like, needed to implement and distribute the infrastructure and web sendees offered by the provider network.
  • the resources may in some embodiments be offered to clients in various units related to the web service, such as an amount of storage capacity for storage, processing capability for processing, as instances, as sets of related services, and the like.
  • a virtual computing instance may, for example, comprise one or more servers with a specified computational capacity (which may be specified by indicating the type and number of CPUs, the main memory size, and so on) and a specified software stack (e.g., a particular version of an operating system, which may in turn run on top of a hypervisor).
  • a specified computational capacity which may be specified by indicating the type and number of CPUs, the main memory size, and so on
  • a specified software stack e.g., a particular version of an operating system, which may in turn run on top of a hypervisor.
  • a number of different types of computing devices may be used singly or in combination to implement the resources of the provider network in different embodiments, including general-purpose or special-purpose computer servers, storage devices, network devices, and the like in some embodiments a client or user may be provided direct access to a resource instance, e.g., by giving a user an administrator login and password.
  • the provider network operator may allow' clients to specify execution requirements for specified client applications and schedule execution of the applications on behalf of the client on execution platforms (such as application server instances, JavaTM virtual machines (“JVMs”), general-purpose or special-purpose operating systems, platforms that support various interpreted or compiled programming languages, such as Ruby, Perl, Python, C, C++, and the like, or high-performance computing platforms) suitable for the applications, without, for example, requiring the client to access an instance or an execution platform directly.
  • execution platforms such as application server instances, JavaTM virtual machines (“JVMs”), general-purpose or special-purpose operating systems, platforms that support various interpreted or compiled programming languages, such as Ruby, Perl, Python, C, C++, and the like, or high-performance computing platforms
  • a given execution platform may utilize one or more resource instances in some implementations: in other
  • the computing resource provider may provide facilities for customers to select and launch the desired computing resources, deploy application components to the computing resources, and maintain an application executing in the environment.
  • the computing resource provider may provide further facilities for the customer to quickly and easily scale up or scale down the numbers and types of resources allocated to the application, either manually or through automatic scaling, as demand for or capacity requirements of the application change.
  • the computing resources provided by the computing resource provider may be made available m discrete units, which may be referred to as instances.
  • An instance may represent a physical server hardware platform, a virtual machine instance executing on a server, or some
  • instances may be made available, including different sizes of resources executing different operating systems (“OS”) and/or hypervisors, and with various installed software applications, runtimes, and the like. Instances may further be available in specific availability zones, representing a logical region, a fault tolerant region, a data center, or other geographic location of the underlying computing hardware, for example. Instances may be copied within an availability zone or across availability zones to improve the redundancy of the instance, and instances may be migrated within a particular availability zone or across availability zones. As one example, the latency for client communications with a particular server in an availability zone may be less than the latency for client communications with a different server. As such, an instance may be migrated from the higher latency server to the lower latency server to improve the overall client experience.
  • OS operating systems
  • hypervisors hypervisors
  • Instances may further be available in specific availability zones, representing a logical region, a fault tolerant region, a data center, or other geographic location of the underlying computing hardware, for example. Instances may
  • the provider network may be organized into a plurality of geographical regions, and each region may include one or more availability zones.
  • An availability zone (which may also be referred to as an availability container) m turn may comprise one or more distinct locations or data centers, configured in such a way that the resources in a given availability zone may be isolated or insulated from failures in other availability zones. That is, a failure in one availability 7 zone may not be expected to result m a failure in any other availability zone.
  • the availability 7 profile of a resource instance is intended to be independent of the availability 7 profile of a resource instance in a different availability zone.
  • Clients may be able to protect their applications from failures at a single location by launching multiple application instances in respective availability zones.
  • inexpensive and low latency network connectivity may be provided between resource instances that reside wdthm the same geographical region (and network transmissions between resources of the same availability zone may be even faster).
  • Each of the processes, methods, and algorithms described in the preceding sections may be embodied in, and fully or partially automated by, code modules executed by one or more computers or computer processors.
  • the code modules may be stored on any type of non-transitory computer-readable medium or computer storage device, such as hard drives, solid state memory 7 , optical disc, and/or the like.
  • the processes and algorithms may be implemented partially or wholly in application-specific circuitry.
  • the results of the disclosed processes and process steps may be stored, persistently or otherwise, in any type of non-transitory computer storage, such as, e.g., volatile or non-volatile storage.
  • some or all of the systems and/or modules may be implemented or provided in other ways, such as at least partially in firmware and/or hardware, including, but not limited to, one or more application-specific integrated circuits (“ASICs”), standard integrated circuits, controllers (e.g , by executing appropriate instructions, and including microcontrollers and/or embedded controllers), field- programmable gate arrays (“FPGAs”), complex programmable logic devices (“CPLDs”), etc.
  • ASICs application-specific integrated circuits
  • controllers e.g , by executing appropriate instructions, and including microcontrollers and/or embedded controllers
  • FPGAs field- programmable gate arrays
  • CPLDs complex programmable logic devices
  • Some or all of the modules, systems, and data structures may also be stored (e.g., as software instructions or structured data) on a computer-readable medium, such as a hard disk, a memory, a network, or a portable media article to be read by an appropriate device or via an appropriate connection.
  • the systems, modules, and data structures may also be transmitted as generated data signals (e.g., as part of a carrier wave or other analog or digital propagated signal) on a variety of computer-readable transmission media, including wireless-based and wired/cable-based media, and may take a variety of forms (e.g., as part of a single or multiplexed analog signal, or as multiple discrete digital packets or frames).
  • generated data signals e.g., as part of a carrier wave or other analog or digital propagated signal
  • Such computer program products may also take other forms in other embodiments. Accordingly, the present invention may be practiced with other computer system configurations.
  • Conditional language used herein such as, among others, “can,” “could,” “might,” “may,”“e.g.,” and the like, unless specifically stated otherwise, or otherwise understood within the context as used, is generally intended to convey that certain embodiments include, while other embodiments do not include, certain features, elements, and/or steps. Thus, such conditional language is not generally intended to imply that features, elements and/or steps are in any way required for one or more embodiments or that one or more embodiments necessarily include logic for deciding, with or without author input or prompting, whether these features, elements and/or steps are included or are to be performed in any particular embodiment.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Radiology & Medical Imaging (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Developmental Disabilities (AREA)
  • Child & Adolescent Psychology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Psychology (AREA)
  • Social Psychology (AREA)
  • Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)
  • Radiation-Therapy Devices (AREA)
  • Led Device Packages (AREA)

Abstract

Bioactive display systems for displaying digital content. The display systems have one or more LED-based lighting channels adapted to generate one or more of a long red near infrared (LRNE) red light, a circadian-inducing blue light output in first operational mode and a less-circadian-inducing blue light output in a second operational mode. The bioactive lighting can have a first circadian-stimulating energy characteristic related to the associated first spectral power distributions of light generated m the first operational mode, and the non-circadian-inducing blue light can have a second circadian-stimulating energy characteristic related to the associated second spectral power distribution of light generated in the second operational mode. Disclosure methods of generating digital display content with the display systems described herein. The methods can generate a circadian-inducing blue light output in first operational mode and one of a LRNE output and a less-circadian-inducing blue light output in a second operational mode.

Description

INTERNATIONAL PATENT APPLICATION
DISPLAY LIGHTING SYSTEMS WITH BIOACTIVE LIGHTING
[0001] This application claims the benefit of U.S Patent Application No 16/393,660 filed April 24, 2019, which is a Continuation of International Patent Application No PCT/US2019/013380 filed January 11, 2019, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/758,411 filed November 9, 2018; International Patent Application No. PCT/US2019/013359 filed January 11 , 2019, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No 62/757,672 filed November 8, 2018: International Patent Application No. PCX/ US2019/013356 filed January 1 1, 2019, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent
Application No. 62/757,664 filed November 8, 2018; International Patent Application No. P CT/U S2019/013379 filed January 11, 2019, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/758,447 filed November 9, 2018; and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/885, 162 filed August 9, 2019, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein.
FIELD OF THE DISCLOSURE
[0002] This disclosure is in the field bioactive digital display devices. In particular, the disclosure relates to devices for use in, and methods of, providing bioactive lighting systems for use in bioactive display systems that can provide controllable biological effects. BACKGROUND
[0003] A wide variety of light emiting devices are known in the art including, for example, incandescent light bulbs, fluorescent lights, and
semiconductor light emitting devices such as light emitting diodes (“LEDs”)
[0004] Displays for digital content can rely on arrays of pixels that produce individual color points. Displays can be backlit with a white light source, which can be LED-based, and then filtered at the pixel-level to produce colored pixels as desired. Alternatively, displays that are not based on backlighting with white light and filtering downstream can include LEDs at the pixel-level that directly emit light at each colored pixel.
[0005] There are a variety of resources utilized to describe the light produced from a light emitting device, one commonly used resource is 1931 CIE (Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage) Chromaticity Diagram. The 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram maps out the hum an color perception in terms of two CIE parameters x and y. The spectral colors are distributed around the edge of the outlined space, which includes all of the hues perceived by the human eye. The boundary line represents maximum saturation for the spectral colors, and the interior portion represents less saturated colors including white light. The diagram also depicts the Planckian locus, also referred to as the black body locus (BBL), with correlated color temperatures, which represents the chromaticity coordinates (i.e., color points) that correspond to radiation from a black-body at different temperatures. Illuminants that produce light on or near the BBL can thus be described in terms of their correlated color temperatures (CCT). These illuminants yield pleasing“white light” to human observers, with general illumination typically utilizing CCT values between 1,800K and 10.000K.
[0006] Color rendering index (CRT) is described as an indication of the vibrancy of tire color of tight being produced by a light source. In practical terms, the CRI is a relative measure of the shift in surface color of an object when lit by a particular lamp as compared to a reference light source, typically either a black-body radiator or the daylight spectrum. The higher the CRI value for a particular light source, the better that the light source renders the colors of various objects it is used to illuminate.
[0007] Color rendering performance may be characterized via standard metrics known in the art. Fidelity Index (Rf) and the Gamut Index (Rg) can be calculated based on the color rendition of a light source for 99 color evaluation samples (“CES”). The 99 CES provide uniform color space coverage, are intended to he spectral sensitiv ity neutral, and provide color samples that correspond to a variety of real objects. Rf values range from 0 to 100 and indicate the fidelity with which a light source renders colors as compared with a reference illuminant. In practical terms, the Rf is a relative measure of tire shift in surface color of an object when lit by a particular lamp as compared to a reference light source, typically either a black- body radiator or the daylight spectrum . The higher the Rf value for a particular light source, the better that the light source renders the colors of various objects it is used to illuminate. The Gamut Index Rg evaluates how well a light source saturates or desaturates the 99 CES compared to the reference source
[0008] LEDs have the potential to exhibit very high power efficiencies relative to conventional incandescent or fluorescent lights. Most LEDs are substantially monochromatic light sources that appear to emit light having a single color. Thus, the spectral power distribution of the light emitted by most LEDs is tightly centered about a“peak” wavelength, which is the single wavelength where the spectral power distribution or“emission spectrum” of the LED reaches its maximum as detected by a photo-detector LEDs typically have a full-width half-maximum wavelength range of about 10 nm to 30 nm, comparatively narrow with respect to the broad range of visible light to the human eye, which ranges from approximately from 380 nm to 800 nm.
[0009] In order to use LEDs to generate white light, lighting systems have been provided that include two or more LEDs that each emit a light of a different color. The different colors combine to produce a desired intensity and/or color of white light. For example, by simultaneously energizing red, green and blue LEDs, the resulting combined light may appear white, or nearly white, depending on, for example, the relative intensities, peak wavelengths and spectral power distributions of the source red, green and blue LEDs. The aggregate emissions from red, green, and blue LEDs typically provide poor color rendering for general illumination applications due to the gaps in the spectral power distribution in regions remote from the peak wavelengths of the LEDs.
[0010] White light may also be produced by utilizing one or more luminescent materials such as phosphors to convert some of the light emited by one or more LEDs to light of one or more other colors. The combination of the light emitted by the LEDs that is not converted by the luminescent material(s) and the light of other colors that are emitted by the luminescent material(s) may produce a white or near-white light.
[0011] LED lamps have been provided that can emit white light with different CCT values within a range. Such lamps utilize two or more LEDs, with or without luminescent materials, with respective drive currents that are increased or decreased to increase or decrease the amount of light emitted by each LED. By control] ably altering the power to the various LEDs in the lamp, the overall light emitted can be tuned to different CCT values. The range of CCT values that can be provided with adequate color rendering values and efficiency is limited by the selection of LEDs.
[0012] The spectral profiles of light emitted by white artificial lighting can impact circadian physiology, alertness, and cognitive performance levels. Bright artificial light can be used in a number of therapeutic applications, such as in the treatment of seasonal affective disorder (SAD), certain sleep problems, depression, jet lag, sleep disturbances in those with Parkinson’s disease, die health consequences associated with shift work, and the resetting of the human circadian clock. Artificial lighting may change natural processes, interfere with melatonin production, or disrupt the circadian rhythm. Blue light may have a greater tendency than other colored light to affect living organisms through the disruption of their biological processes which can rely upon natural cycles of daylight and darkness. Exposure to blue light late in the evening and at night may be detrimental to one’s health. Some blue or royal blue light within lower wavelengths can have hazardous effects to human eyes and skin, such as causing damage to the retina.
[0013] Significant challenges remain in providing LED lamps that can provide white light across a range of CCT values while simultaneously achieving high efficiencies, high luminous flux, good color rendering, and acceptable color stability it is also a challenge to provide lighting apparatuses that can provide desirable lighting performance while addressing for the control of circadian stimulating energy (CSE) performance.
Figure imgf000006_0001
[0014] In some aspects, the present disclosure provides bioactive display- methods, systems and devices for providing bioactive illumination while displaying digital content including one or more LED-based lighting channels adapted to generate a circadian stimulating energy (CSE) of a circadian-inducing blue light output in a first operational mode; a less-circadian-inducing blue light output in a second operational mode; and, a long red near infrared energy (LRNE) output in a third operating mode. In some instances the circadian-inducing bine light has a first circadian-stimulating energy characteristic related to an associated first spectral power distribution of light generated in the first operational mode. In some instances the less-circadian-inducing blue light output has a second circadian-stimulating energy- characteristic related to an associated second spectral power distribution of light generated in the second operational mode.
[0015] In some aspects, the present disclosure provides bioactive display- methods, systems and devices for providing bioactive illumination while displaying digital content including one or more LED-based lighting channels adapted to generate a circadian stimulating energy (CSE) of a circadian-inducing blue light output in a first operational mode; a less-circadian-inducing blue light output in a second operational mode; and, a long red near infrared energy (LRNE) output in a third operating mode. In some instances the LRNE is in the non-visible spectrum. In some instances the LRNE is in both the visible and the non-visible spectrum.
[0016] In the above bioactive displays the LED-based lighting channels provide the individual pixels in a pixel array of the display system. In some instances the individual pixels are provided as microLED pixels or OLED pixels. In some instances different combinations of different types of pixels are used in the first operational mode and second operational mode.
[0017] In some instances the LED-based lighting channels provide one or more white light sources for a backlighting system in the display system. In some instances the one or more white light sources are provided as white lighting channels comprising an LED and an associated luminophoric medium that a produce a combined white light at a white color point within ±7 DUV of the Planckian locus on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram. In some instances the display system comprises two or more white lighting channels, with a first white lighting channel used in the first operational mode and a second white lighting channel used in the second operational mode.
[0018] In some instances the first operational mode is a blue light output and the second operational mode is a LRNE red light output. In some instances the first operational mode is a circadian stimulating energy blue light output and the second operational mode is a LRNE red light output.
[0019] In some instances the LED-based lighting channels provide one or more white light sources for a backlighting system in the display system . In some instances the one or more white light sources are provided as white lighting channels comprising an LED and an associated iuminophoric medium that a produce a combined white light at a white color point within ±7 DUV of the Planckian locus on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram. In some instances the display system comprises two or more white lighting channels, with a first white lighting channel used in the fi rst operational mode and a second white lighting channel used in the second operational mode and each of the plurality of lighting channels comprises an LED and an associated Iuminophoric medium that produce a combined light at a color point, with the combinations of the plurality of lighting channels producing combined white light at a white color points within ±7 DUV of the Pl anckian locus on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram
[0020] In some instances the bioactive display generates a circadian- inducing blue light output in a first operational mode and a less-circadian-inducing blue light output in a second operational mode. In some instance a control system controls the display system based on external information. In some instances the external information comprises one or more of seasonal lighting conditions, weather, climate, collective mood indicators, analyses of social network data, and the like. In some instances the external information comprises one or more collective mood indicators selected from the group consisting of stock market data, news feeds, and sentiment indices. In some instances the control includes controlling the display system based on data harvested from sensors in a lighting installation environment in proximity to the display system. In some instances the control includes controlling the display system based on data from one or more sensors that reflect information about one or more users in proximity to the display system. In some instances the control includes utilizing data from one or more sensors comprise one or more of physiological sensors, sensors on various devices used by the one or more users, and ambient sensors. The one or more sensors are configured to sense one or more of temperature, pressure, ambient lighting conditions, localized lighting conditions, lighting spectrum characteristics, humidity, UV light, sound, particles, pollutants, gases, radiation, location of objects or items, and motion. In some instances physiological sensors comprise one or more wearable devices incorporated in armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, or clothing.
[0021] Aspects of the control m ethods include the physiol ogical sensors configured to sense one or more of a person' s temperature, blood pressure, heart rate, oxygen saturation, activity type, activity level, galvanic skin response, respirator}' rate, cholesterol level (including HDL, LDL and triglyceride), hormone or adrenal levels (e.g., Cortisol, thyroid, adrenaline, melatonin, and others), histamine levels, immune system characteristics, blood alcohol levels, drug content, macro and micro nutrients, mood, emotional state, alertness, and sleepiness. In some instances the bioactive display generated one or more of CSE and LRNE in a first or second operational mode.
[0022] Aspects of various control systems and methods as discussed herein may comprise: a plurality of light emiting device outputting a first circadian stimulating energy (CSE); at least one external device receiving feedback comprising information associated with at least one of the semiconductor light emitting devices and the first CSE; and a master device in communication with the plurality of semiconductor light emitting devices, the master device configured to adjust a parameter on at least one of the plurality of semiconductor light emiting devices based on the feedback, and cause the at least one semiconductor light emitting devices to emit a second CSE.
[0023] In various examples, tire external device may be a display system, wherein the display system comprises: one or more LED-based lighting channels adapted to generate a circadian-inducing blue light output in a first operational mode; a less-circadian-inducing blue light output in a second operational mode; and a long red near infrared energy (LRNE) output m a third operating mode. In aspects of embodiments, the LRNE may be in at least one of the visible and the non-visible spectrum.
[0024] In additional aspects of control systems and methods, the one external device is a mobile device, a wearable device, a sensor, a panel system, a lighting device, and a computing system. As discussed herein, the external device may be configured to sense one or more of temperature, pressure, ambient lighting conditions, localized lighting conditions, lighting spectrum characteristics, humidity, UV light, sound, particles, pollutants, gases, radiation, locati on of objects or items, and motion. In examples, the wearable device is incorporated in at least one of armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, or clothing. [0Q25] In additional aspects, the one or more external devices are configured to sense one or more of a person' s temperature, blood pressure, heart rate, oxygen saturation, activity type, activity level, galvanic skin response, respiratory rate, cholesterol level (including HDL, LDL and triglyceride), hormone or adrenal levels (eg., Cortisol, thyroid, adrenaline, melatonin, and others), histamine levels, immune system characteristics, blood alcohol levels, drug content, macro and micro nutrients, mood, emotional state, alertness, and sleepiness. In examples, the feedback is indicative of information relating to at least one of light, motion, temperature, environment, physiological data, usage patterns, user feedback, and location.
[0026] In aspects, with respect to the master device, the master device is at least one of a mobile device, a wearable device, and a computing device, and may be configured to receive user input. Additionally, the parameter may be associated with lighting control based on at least one of physiological factors, health conditions, emotional states, user mood, and user input. The master device may also be in communication with the plurality of semiconductor light emitting devices through one or more of a wired network, a wireless network, and Bluetooth communication.
[0027] he general disclosure and the following further disclosure are exemplary and explanatory only and are not restrictive of the disclosure, as defined in the appended claims. Other aspects of the present disclosure will be apparent to those skilled in the art in view of the details as provided herein. In the figures, like reference numerals designate corresponding parts throughout the different views. All callouts and annotations are hereby incorporated by this reference as if fully set forth herein.
[0028] The summary, as well as the following detailed description, is further understood when read in conjunction with the appended drawings. For the purpose of illustrating the disclosure, there are shown in the drawings exemplar}
implementations of the disclosure; however, the disclosure is not limited to the specific methods, compositions, and devices disclosed. In addition, the drawings are not necessarily drawn to scale. In the drawings:
[0029] FIG. 1 illustrates aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure;
[0Q30] FIG. 2 illustrates aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of lighting systems therein; [0031] FIGS 3a, 3b, 3c, and 3d illustrates aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including spectral power distributions for some exemplary lighting channels;
[0032] FIG. 4 illustrates aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure;
[0033] FIG 5 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by componen ts of the devices;
[0034] FIG 6 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
[0Q35] FIG. 7 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
[0036] FIG. 8 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
[0037] FIG. 9 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the de vices;
[0038] FIG. 10 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
[0039] FIG. 11 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
[0040] FIG. 12 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices;
[0041] FIG. 13 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral pow¾r distributions for light generated by components of the devices; [0042] FIG. 14 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the devices
[0043] FIG. 15 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color points for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0044] FIG. 16 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0045] FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B illustrate some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0046] FIG. 18 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure in comparison with some prior art and some theoretical light sources, including some light characteristics of white light generated by display systems in various operational modes;
[0047] FIG. 19 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0048] FIG. 20 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0049] FIG. 21 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0050] FIGS. 22A-22B illustrate some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0051] FIG. 23 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0052] FIG. 24 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems; [0053] FIG. 25 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0054] FIG. 26 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0055] FIG. 27 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems; and
[0056] FIG. 28 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including some suitable color ranges for light generated by components of the display systems.
[0057] FIG. 29 illustrates some aspects of light emitting devices according to the present disclosure, including aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices.
[0058] FIG. 30 illustrates some aspects of light emitting devices according to the present disclosure, including aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices.
[0Q59] FIG. 31 illustrates some aspects of light emitting devices according to the present disclosure, including aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the devices.
[0060] FIG. 32 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0061] FIG. 33 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0062] FIG. 34 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0063] FIG. 35 illustrates some aspects of display systems according to the present disclosure, including aspects of spectral power distributions for light generated by components of the display systems;
[0001] FIG. 36 depicts aspects of control of the bioactive illumination; [0002] FIG. 37 is a block diagram of computing systems and methods of control of bioactive illumination; and,
[0003] FIG. 38 is an overview of a bioactive illumination control systems and methods
[0Q64] FIG. 39 illustrates some aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of display systems according to the present disclosure.
[0065] FIG. 40 illustrates some aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of display systems according to the present disclosure
[0066] FIG. 41 illustrates some aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of display systems according to the present disclosure.
[0067] FIG. 42 illustrates some aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of display systems according to the present disclosure.
[0068] FIG. 43 illustrates some aspects of LRNE spectral power distributions for light generated by components of display systems according to the present disclosure.
[0069] All descriptions and callouts in the Tables and Figures are hereby incorporated by this reference as if fully set forth herein.
[0070] The present disclosure may be understood more readily by reference to the following detailed description taken in connection with the accompanying figures and examples, which form a part of this disclosure. It is to be understood that this disclosure is not limited to the specific devices, methods, applications, conditions or parameters described and/or shown herein, and that the terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular exemplars by way of example only and is not intended to be limiting of the claimed disclosure. Also, as used in the specification including the appended claims, the singular forms“a,”“an,” and“the” include the plural, and reference to a particular numerical value includes at least that particular value, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. The term“plurality”, as used herein, means more than one. Wien a range of values is expressed, another exemplar includes from the one particular value and/or to the other particular value. Similarly, when values are expressed as approximations, by use of the antecedent“about,” it will he understood that the particular value forms another exemplar. All ranges are inclusive and combmabie.
|0Q71 ] The term“circadian-stimulating energy characteristics” refers to any characteristics of a spectral power distribution that may have biological effects on a subject in some aspects, the circadian-stimulating energy characteristics of aspects of the lighting systems of this disclosure can include one or more of CS, CLA, EML, BLH, CER, CAP, LEE, circadian power, circadian flux, and the relative amount of power within one or more particular wavelength ranges. Circadian-stimulating energy may be referred to as“CSE” The application of CSE to biological systems in doses, amount, aliquots and volumes may be referred to as CSE therapy.
Benefits of Blue Light
[0072] Exposure to blue light including CSE affects various bio- physiological and psychological functions of the human body and may be called “bioactive”. Many of these effects are beneficial. For instance, a region of what is commonly called the blue wavelength region of light may improve memory performance and cognitive function. Exposure to blue wavelength light during memory consolidation has been shown to improve subsequent delayed memory recall when compared to placebo wavelength light exposure. Alkozei, A., Smith R., Dailey N.S., Baja] S , & Killgore W.D.S. (2017). Acute Exposure to a quantity, volume, aliquot or dose of a specific Blue Wavelength Light During Memory Consolidation Improves Verbal Memory Performance. PLoS ONE 12(9), 1-11. Additionally, blue wavelength light may decrease blood pressure, increase blood flow, and improve overall endothelial function. Full body irradiation with blue light has been shown to promote release nitric oxide from the skin into circulating blood. As a result, systolic blood pressure and vascular resistance have been shown to decrease. Stem, M. et al. (2018). Blue Light Exposure Decreases Systolic Blood Pressure, Arterial Stiffness, and Improves Endothelial Function in Humans. European Journal of Preventive Cardiology 0(00), 1-9.
Challenges of Blue Light,
[0073] In some instances exposure to a quantity of blue light may be involved in damage in human eyes. Blue Light Hazard (BLH) is a known risk and the measure of BLH provides a measure of potential for a photochemical induced retinal injury that results from radiation exposure. Such exposure is one factor which has been linked to photoreceptor damage. It has been reported that the blue light appears to decrease Adenosine Triphosphate (ATP) energy production in retinal ganglion cells. This has a negative effect on mitochondrial function and oxidative stress which has been shown to decrease survival of ganglion cells. Tosini, G., Ferguson, I., & Tsubota, K. (2016). Effects of Blue Light on the Circadian System and Eye
Physiology. Molecular Vision: Biolog y and Genetics in Vision Research 22. 61-72.
As ganglion cells play a major role in synchronizing circadian rhythms, their destruction inhibits the eye’s ability to determine length-of-day and length-of-night. Retinal ganglion cell death further leads to impaired vision. There is also increasing evidence that excessive blue light exposure may cause damage in human skin; it may contribute to wrinkles, worsening skin laxity, and pigmentation issues. Arjmandi, N., Mortazavi G.H., Zarei, S., Faraz M., & Mortazavi, S.A R. (2018). Can Light Emitted from Smartphone Screens and Taking Selfies Cause Premature Aging and Wrinkles? Journal of Biomedical and Physical Engineering 8(4), 447-452. When blue light penetrates the skin it can damage DNA, leading to inflammation, the breakdown of healthy collagen and elastin, and hyperpigmentation. Vandersee, S., Beyer, M., Lademann, J., & Darvin, M.E (2015). Blue-Violet Light Irradiation Dose
Dependently Decreases Carotenoids in Human Skin, Which Indicates the Generation of Free Radicals. Oxidative Medicine and Cellular Longevity doi:
10.1 155/2015/579675. It is also reported that excessive blue light at night negatively affects the human body’s natural sleep cycle. Blue light, which inhibits melatonin production, reduces both quantity and quality of sleep.
Benefits of Long Red and Near IR.
[0074] Blue light is not the only light in the visible spectrum that can be used to affect bio-physiological functions and/or psychological functions (also referred to herein as“bioactive”) of the human body. Recent studies indicate that therapy which may include doses of long red and near-IR: Long Red typically with a spectrum of > 625 nms to <700 nms with peak wavelengths > 640 - 670nm and Near- Infrared typical ranges from >700 nms and <1400nm (with typical peak wavelengths: 850nm, 94Gnm, 1064nm) may affect bio-physiological functions and are also described herein as“bioactive” they may improve eye health, skin health, hair growth, and cognitive function. Tire spectral sensitivity corresponding to the human eye can be considered to be based on the color-matching functions of the 1931 Standard Observer (XYZ tristimulus values for CIE 1931 2° color-matching), which show that the effect of light above 700 nm on color perception to be substantially negligible. In other words, it will have no significant impact on the overall (ccx, cey) color point on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram of emitted light from a lighting system .
Emissions of Long Red and Near-Infrared may be referred to collectively as Long Red and Near-Infrared Energy (LRNE). How the human eye perceives red, long red and near infrared in a given individual may vary based on a plethora of
factors including but not limited to age, stimulation of eye before exposure, eye health and health in general. Accordingly, there will be an overlap between the end of long red and the beginning of near infrared. Those of ordinary skill in the art and the skilled artisan wall recognize variation is narrow and does not create substantial uncertainty in the terms. Hence the terminology LRNE is encompasses the entirety of both long red and near-infrared.
[0075] Additionally, LRNE may be beneficial by reducing, limiting, counteracting or ameliorating some of the negative effects associated with excessive blue light exposure. Disclosed herein are methods and systems to provide therapeutic doses of LRNE either to address a biological condition or as a prophylactic or health supplement means to limit or prevent at least one of an emotional, neurological, immune, and biological condition or system J“Bioactive Exposure refers to one or both of LRNE and CSE and directing at least one of LRNE and CSE at a biological system which may be a specific organ or any part of the body.
[0076] The Bioactive Exposure may be controlled by a control system (described herein, see e.g., FIG. 38 whereby at least one controller, e.g., a computing device receives inputs including fixed, variable and dynamically changing from a variety of sources and the processor associated with the system and method applies at least one of LRNE and CSE in accordance with said control system. Control input data is at least one of input by: users, server, database, derived from a decisioning engine and collected by at least one sensor. The inputs are provided to a processor via signal communication. The processor may be local to the therapeutic device, remote from the therapeutic device or the processing may take place both locally and remote from the therapeutic device. Control systems disclosed herein may adjust the amount and timing of aliquots of bioactive Exposure. The control of aliquots and frequency in response to input may be used to dynamically adjust the therapeutic or health supplement application of one or more of CSE and LRNE to users. Dynamic adjustment of Bioactive Exposure to a user may be viewed as personalized whereby data harvested from sensors in the lighting installation environment as well as sensors that reflect information about users, such as one or more of physiological sensors (including wearable devices, such as armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, clothing, and the like), sensors on various devices used by a user, ambient sensors, and the like. The control system may have modules within the platform which may connect to or integrate with data sources of information about users as described below. Tire frequency of the ERNE and CSE are controllable and the range of emission spans constant on to micro-pulses of less than a tenth of a second. Light pulses can be used to provide Bioactive Exposure. Such pulse may have a duration of less than 100 ms, with a frequency between 10 Hz and 0.5 mHz and have been shown to have a bioactive effect, such pulses may vary from a single pulse up to 400,000 pulses.
[0077] Disclosed herein are additional methods and systems to provide Bioactive Exposure as one of a supplement and therapeutic dose of LRNE to:
[0078] A. Lessen the effect of age-related macular degeneration by stimulating mitochondria in retinal ganglion eye cells to produce more ATP energy. (Caiaza, K.C., Kam, J.H., Hogg, C., & Jeffery G. (2015) and Neurobiology of Aging 36, 2869-2876.) The increase in ATP production has been shown to slow the decline m vision associated with aging. LRNE may additionally improve the effects of glaucoma, a condition that destroys ganglion eye cells, by protecting the cornea and the retina. (Olmo-Aguado, S., Nunez- Alvarez, C , & Osborne, N.N (2016). Red Light of the Visual Spectrum Attenuates Cell Death in Culture and Retinal Ganglion Cell Death in Situ. Acta Ophthalmologica 94, e481-e491).
[0079] B. Address a biological condition or as a prophylactic or supplement means to limit or prevent a biological condition. Examples include but are not limited to, to prevent fluid build-up in the front of the eye, a mam complication of glaucoma known to result in cell death of ganglion cells. LRNE has been shown to prevent the death of retinal ganglion cells when the optic nerve has been damaged, thereby preventing vision loss that would otherwise occur. (Kwok-Fai, S., Leung, M.C.P., & Cui, Q. (2014). Effects of Low' Laser Treatment on the Survival of Axotomized Retinal Ganglion Cells in Adult Hamsters. Neural Regeneration Research 9(21), 1863-1869.) [0080] C. improve skin health and appearance by the application of LRNE therapy. LRNE can reduce acute and chronic inflammation by increasing blood flow to damaged tissues. (Hamblin, M.R. (2017). Mechanisms and Applications of the An ti-Inflammatory Effects of Photobiomodulation. AIMS Biophysics 4(3), 337-361.) LRNE may be applied to increase natural collagen production, resulting in younger, healthier looking skin. Rats that were exposed to doses of LRN experienced an increase in collagen synthesis and neoformed bone. Brassoiiatti, P. et al . (2018). Photobiomodulation on Critical Bone Defects of Rat Calvaria: A Systematic Review. Lasers in Medical Science 33(9), 1841-1848. Patients dealing with acne or depigmentation conditions, such as vitiligo, may benefit from undergoing LRN therapy, as it can control sebum production (which leads to acne), and it can stimulate melanocyte proliferation (which enhances skin re-pigmentation). Skin that has been wounded, burned, or scarred also repairs more rapidly if it is exposed to LRN , as red light significantly increases tensile strength and wound contraction while decreasing inflammation. Avci, P. et al. (2013). Low-level Laser (Light) Therapy (LLLT) in Skin: Stimulating, Healing, Restoring. Semin Cutan Medical Surgery (32)(1), 41-52.
[0081] D. A myriad of other bio-physiological function are impacted by LRNEs, including but not limited to, hair growth and cognitive function. LRNE therapy may be used in conjunction with or as an alternative treatment to hormone regulating drugs typically used to treat hair loss. LRNE exposure has been shown to be a treatment in terms of hair regrowth. Gupta, A.K., Mays, et al. (2018). Efficacy of Non-Surgical Treatments for Androgenetic Alopecia: A Systematic Review and Network Meta- Analysis. Journal of The European Academy of Dermatology and Venereology 32(12), 2112-2125. Research has also demonstrated that LRNE exposure may lead to improved cognitive function with few side effects. In one study, those exposed to LRNE experienced quicker reaction times, better memory, a more positive mood, and the ability to learn new information faster. These beneficial effects on the human brain may7 be related to LRNE’s increasing cerebral blood flow and oxygen availability and boost ATP energy production Hennessy, M , & Hamblin, M. (2017). Photobiomodulation and die Brain: A New7 Paradigm. Journal of Optics
19(1)1)13003.
[0082] E. LRNE therapy may7 be able to counteract, limit or ameliorate the negative effects from excessive CSE and blue light exposure. Wren humans absorb natural blue light from the sun, they also absorb natural red light from the sun— together the two provide numerous health benefits. However, an overload of artificial blue light such as CSE by itself may be determinantal. This damage can be mitigated through LRN exposure. Balancing and/or controlling an exposure of both artificial blue light and LRNE support wellness benefits similar to those that flow from natural, sunlight exposure.
[0083] It is to be appreciated that certain features of tire disclosure which are, for clarity, described herein in the context of separate exemplar, may also be provided in combination in a single exemplary' implementation. Conversely, various features of the disclosure that are, for brevity, described in the context of a single exemplary implementation, may also be provided separately or in any
subcombination. Further, reference to values stated in ranges include each and every' value within that range.
[0084] The 1931 C1E Chromaticity diagram is a two-dimensional chromaticity space in which every visible color is represented by a point having x- and y-coordinates, also referred to herein as (ccx, ccy) coordinates. Fully saturated (monochromatic) colors appear on the outer edge of the diagram, while less saturated colors (which represent a combination of wavelengths) appear on the interior of the diagram. The term“saturated”, as used herein, means having a purity of at least 85%, the term“purity” having a well-known meaning to persons skilled in the art, and procedures for calculating purity' being well-known to those of skill in the art. The Planckian locus, or black body locus (BBL), is known to those of skill in the art and follows the color an incandescent black body would take in the chromaticity space as the temperature of the black body changes from about 1000K to 10,000 K. Hie black body locus goes from deep red at low temperatures (about 1000 K) through orange, yellowish white, white, and finally bluish white at very high temperatures. The temperature of a black body radiator corresponding to a particular color in a chromaticity space is referred to as the“correlated color temperature.” In general, light corresponding to a correlated color temperature (CCT) of about 2700 K to about 6500 K is considered to be“white” light. In particular, as used herein,“white light” generally refers to light having a chromaticity point that is within a 10-step MacAdam ellipse of a point on the black body locus having a CCT between 2700K and 6500K. However, it will be understood that tighter or looser definitions of white light can be used if desired. For example, white light can refer to light having a chromaticity point that is within a seven step MacAdam ellipse of a point on the black body locus having a CCT between 27Q0K and 6500K. The distance from the black body locus can be measured in the CIE 1960 chromaticity diagram, and is indicated by the symbol Diin, or DUV or duv as referred to elsewhere herein. If the chromaticity point is above the Planckian locus the DUV is denoted by a positive number; if the chromaticity point is below' the locus, DUV is indicated with a negative number. If the DUV is sufficiently positive, the light source may appear greenish or yellowish at the same CCT. If tire D UV is sufficiently negative, the light source can appear to be purple or pinkish at the same CCT. Observers may prefer light above or below the Planckian locus for particular CCT values, and light above or below' the Planckian locus may be more or less suitable for use in displaying digital content on display systems in different settings or operational modes DUV calculation methods are well known by those of ordinary skill in the art and are more fully described in ANSI C78.377, American National Standard for Electric Lamps— Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting (SSL) Products, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety for all purposes. The CIE Standard Illuminant D65 illuminant is intended to represent average daylight and has a CCT of approximately 6500K and the spectral power distribution is described more fully in Joint ISO/CIE Standard, ISO
10526: 1999/CIE S005/E-1998, CIE Standard Illuminants for Colorimetry, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety for all purposes.
[0085] The color points described in the present disclosure can be within color-point ranges defined by geometric shapes on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram that enclose a defined set of ccx, ccy color coordinates. It should be understood that any gaps or openings in any described or depicted boundaries for color-point ranges should be closed with straight lines to connect adjacent endpoints in order to define a closed boundary for each color-point range.
[0086] Tire light emitted by a light source may be represented by a point on a chromaticity diagram, such as the 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram, having color coordinates denoted (ccx, ccy) on the X-Y axes of the diagram. A region on a chromaticity diagram may represent light sources having similar chromaticity coordinates.
[0087] The ability of a light source to accurately reproduce color in illuminated objects can be characterized using the color rendering index (“CRI”), also referred to as the CIE Ra value. The Ra value of a light source is a modified average of the relative measurements of how the color rendition of an illumination system compares to that of a reference black -body radiator or daylight spectrum when illuminating eight reference colors R1-R8. Thus, the Ra value is a relative measure of the shift in surface color of an object when lit by a particular lamp. The Ra value equals 100 if the color coordinates of a set of test colors being illuminated by the illumination system are the same as the coordinates of the same test colors being irradiated by a reference light source of equivalent CCT. For CCTs less than 5000K, the reference iiluminants used in the CRI calculation procedure are the SPDs of blackbody radiators; for CCTs above 5000K, imaginary SPDs calculated from a mathematical model of daylight are used. These reference sources were selected to approximate incandescent lamps and daylight, respectively. Daylight generally has an Ra value of nearly 100, incandescent bulbs have an Ra value of about 95, fluorescent lighting typically has an Ra value of about 70 to 85, while monochromatic light sources have an Ra value of essentially zero. Light sources for general illumination applications with an Ra value of less than 50 are generally considered very poor and are typically only used in applications where economic issues preclude other alternatives. The calculation of CIE Ra values is described more fully in Commission Internationale de 1'Eclairage. 1995. Technical Report: Method of Measuring and Specifying Colour Rendering Properties of Light Sources, CIE No. 13.3-1995.
Vienna, Austria: Commission Internationale de FEclairage, which is incorporated by- reference herein in its entirety for all purposes. In addition to the Ra value, a light source can also be evaluated based on a measure of its ability to render a saturated red reference color R9, also known as test color sample 9 (“TCS09”), with the R9 color rendering value (“R9 value”). Light sources can also be evaluated based on a measure of ability to render additional colors R10-R15, which include realistic colors like yellow , green, blue, Caucasian skin color (R13), tree leaf green, and Asian skin color (R15), respectively. Light sources can further be evaluated by calculating the gamut area index (‘GAT ). Connecting the rendered color points from tire determination of the CIE Ra value in two dimensional space will form a gamut area. Gamut area index is calculated by dividing the gamut area formed by the light source with the gamut area formed by a reference source using the same set of colors that are used for CRI. GAI uses an Equal Energy Spectrum as the reference source rather than a black body radiator. A gamut area index related to a black body radiator (“GAIBB”) can be calculated by using the gamut area formed by the blackbody radiator at the equivalent CCT to the light source. [0088] The ability of a light source to accurately reproduce color in illuminated objects can be characterized using the metrics described in IBS Method for Evaluating Light Source Color Rendition Illuminating Engineering Society, Product ID; TM-30-15 (referred to herein as the“TM-30-15 standard”), which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety for all purposes. The TM-30-15 standard describes metrics including the Fidelity Index (Rf) and the Gamut Index (Rg) that can be calculated based on the color rendition of a light source for 99 color evaluation samples (“CES”). The 99 CES provide uniform color space coverage, are intended to be spectral sensitivity neutral, and provide color samples that correspond to a variety of real objects. Rf values range from 0 to 100 and indicate the fidelity with which a light source renders colors as compared with a reference illuminant. Rg values provide a measure of the color gamut that the light source provides relative to a reference illuminant. The range of Rg depends upon the Ilf value of the light source being tested. The reference illuminant is selected depending on the CCT. For CCT values less than or equal to 4500K, Planckian radiation is used. For CCT values greater than or equal to 55QQK, CIE Daylight illuminant is used. Between 4500K and 5500K a proportional mix of Planckian radiation and the CIE Daylight illuminant is
Figure imgf000023_0001
Daylight illuminant.
[0089] Circadian illuminance (CL A) is a measure of circadian effective light, spectral irradiance distribution of the light incident at the cornea weighted to reflect the spectral sensitivity of the human circadian system as measured by acute melatonin suppression after a one-hour exposure, and CS, which is the effectiveness of the spectrally weighted irradiance at the cornea from threshold (CS = 0.1 ) to saturation (CS =: 0.7). The values of CLA are scaled such that an incandescent source at 2856K (known as CIE Illuminant A) which produces 1000 lux (visual lux) will produce 1000 units of circadian lux (CLA). CS values are transformed CLA values and correspond to relative melotonian suppression after one hour of light exposure for a 2.3 mm diameter pupil during the mid-point of melotonian production. CS is calculated from
Figure imgf000024_0001
. The calculation of CLA is more folly described in Rea et al.,“Modelling the spectral sensitivity of the human circadian system,” Lighting Research and Technology, 2011: 0: 1-12, and Figueiro et al,“Designing with Circadian Stimulus”, October 2016, LD+A Magazine,
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, which are incorporated by reference herein in its entirety for all purposes. Figueiro et al. describe that exposure to a CS of 0.3 or greater at the eye, for at least one hour in the early part of the day, is effective for stimulating the circadian system and is associated with better sleep and improved behavior and mood.
[0090] Equivalent Melanopic Lux (EML) provides a measure of photoreceptive input to circadian and neurophysiological light responses in humans, as described in Lucas et al,“Measuring and using light in the melanopsin age.” Trends in Neurosciences, Jan 2014, Vol. 37, No. 1, pages 1-9, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety, including all appendices, for all purposes.
Melanopic lux is weighted to a photopigment with Linax 480 nm with pre-receptoral filtering based on a 32 year old standard observer, as described more fully in the Appendix A, Supplementary Data to Lucas et al. (2014), User Guide: Irradiance Toolbox (Oxford 18th October 2013), University of Manchester, Lucas Group, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety for all purposes. EML values are shown in the tables and Figures herein as the ratio of melanopic lux to luminous flux, with luminous flux considered to he 1000 lumens. It can be desirable for biological effects on users to provide illumination having higher EML in the morning, but lower EML in tire late afternoon and evening.
[0091] Blue Light Hazard (BLH) provides a measure of potential for a photochemical induced retinal injury that results from radiation exposure. Blue Light Hazard is described in IEC/EN 62471, Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems and Technical Report IEC/TR 62778: Application of IEC 62471 for the assessment of blue light hazard to light sources and luminaires, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety for all purposes A BLH factor can be expressed in (weighted power/lux) in units of pW/cm2/lux.
[0092] In some aspects the present disclosure relates to lighting devices and methods to provide light having particular vision energy and circadian energy performance. Many figures of merit are known m the art, some of which are described in Ji Hye Oh, Su Ji Yang and Young Rag Do,“Healthy, natural, efficient and tunable lighting: four-package white LEDs for optimizing the circadian effect, color quality and vision performance,” Light: Science & Applications (2014) 3: el4l-el49, which is incorporated herein in its entirety, including supplementary information, for all purposes. Luminous efficacy of radiation (“LER”) can be calculated from the ratio of the luminous flux to the radiant flux (S( . )).. i.e. the spectral power distribution of the light source being evaluated, with the following equation:
Figure imgf000025_0001
Figure imgf000025_0002
“blm” refers to biolumens, units for measuring circadian flux, also known as circadian lumens. The term“1m” refers to visual lumens. U(l) is the photopie spectral luminous efficiency function and C(X) is the circadian spectral sensitivity function. The calculations herein use the circadian spectral sensitivity function, C(2), from Gall et al. Proceedings of the CIE Symposium 2004 on Light and Health: Non-Visual
Effects, 30 September-2 October 2004; Vienna, Austria 2004. CIE: Wien, 2004, ppl29- 132, which is incorporated herein in its entirety for ail purposes. By- integrating the amount of light (milliwatts) within the circadian spectral sensitivity function and dividing such value by the number of photopic lumens, a relative measure of melatonin suppression effects of a particular light source can be obtained.
A scaled relative measure denoted as melatonin suppressing milliwatts per hundred lumens may be obtained by dividing the photopic lumens by 100. The term
"melatonin suppressing milliwatts per hundred lumens" consistent with the foregoing calculation method is used throughout this application and tire accompanying figures and tables. The melatonin suppression index (MSI) of a light source can be calculated from the ratio of the integration of cross product constant lumen spectrum of lamp with melatonin suppression action spectrum in wavelength range 380 nm to 780 nm to the integration of cross product of constant lumen spectrum of Day light spectrum at 6500K w ith melatonin suppression action spectrum in 380 nm to 780 nm region. The function melatornn suppression action spectrum,“MS AS” or M(l), is defined by Thapan K,“An action spectrum for melatonin suppression: evidence for a novel non rod, non-cone photoreceptor system in humans”, Journal of Physiology, 2001, 535: 261 -267, which is incorporated herein for all purposes
[0093] The ability of a light source to provide illumination that allows for the clinical observation of cyanosis is based upon the light source’s spectral power density in the red portion of the visi ble spectrum, particularly around 660 mm. The cyanosis observation index (“COI”) is defined by AS/NZS 1680.2.5 Interior Lighting Part 2 5: Hospital and Medical Tasks, Standards Australia, 1997 which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety, including all appendices, for all purposes. COI is applicable for CCTs from about 3300K to about 5500K, and is preferably of a value less than about 3.3. If a light source’s output around 660 nm is too low a patient’s skin color may appear darker and may be falsely diagnosed as cyanosed. If a light source’s output at 660nm is too high, it may mask any cyanosis, and it may not be diagnosed when it is present. COI is a dimensionless number and is calculated from the spectral power distribution of the light source. Hie COI value is calculated by calculating the color difference between blood viewed under tire test light source and viewed under the reference lamp (a 4000 K Planckian source) for 50% and 100% oxygen saturation and averaging the results. The lower the value of COI, the smaller the shift in color appearance results under illumination by the source under consideration.
[0094] The ability of a light source to accurately reproduce color in illuminated objects can be characterized by the Television Lighting Consistency Index (“TLCI-2012” or“TLCI”) value Qa, as described fully in EBU Tech 3355, Method for the Assessment of the Colorimetric Properties of Luminaires, European
Broadcasting Union (“EBU”), Geneva, Switzerland (2014), and EBU Tech 3355-sl, An Introduction to Spectroradiometry, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety, including all appendices, for all purposes. The TLCI compares the test light source to a reference luminaire, which is specified to be one whose chromaticity falls on either the Planckian or Daylight locus and having a color temperature which is that of the CCT of the test light source. If the CCT is less than 3400 K, then a Planckian radiator is assumed. If tire CCT is greater than 5000 K, then a Daylight radiator is assumed. If the CCT lies between 3400 K and 5000 K, then a mixed illuminant is assumed, being a linear interpolation between Planckian at 3400 K and Daylight at 5000 K. Therefore, it is necessary to calculate spectral power distributions for both Planckian and Daylight radiators. The mathematics for both operations is known in the art and is described more fully in CIE Technical Report 15:2004, Colorimetry 3rd ed., International Commission on Illumination (2004), which is incorporated herein in its entirety for all purposes.
Displays
[0095] Aspects of the present inventions relate to display systems that are adapted to produce and display color(s) at the pixel level that can he used to help in inducing and/or regulating a circadian rhythm cycle in a person looking at the displays or otherwise proximate the display. The display systems may be computer displays or television displays. The lighting system for the display systems pixels may be arranged to produce colors of the pixels in the display that effect the circadian rhythm over the course of time. The lighting system may be adapted to generate a circadian stimulating energy (CSE) blue frequency of light (e.g. cyan, energy at and/or near 485nm) that causes activity associated with‘waking’ the person through the circadian cycle (e.g. effecting, causing, or maintaining a wakeful and alert state in the viewer by enabling melatonin suppression by exciting the Intrinsically photosensitive retinal ganglion ceils (ipRGCs)). It may also be adapted to reduce the circadian -inducing blue frequency over time to reduce the‘waking’ effect. The lighting system may further be adapted with two or more separate blue frequencies such that either or both may be used to generate the blue in the pixels of the display. One of the blue frequencies may be a standard blue color (e.g. substantial energy around approximately 450nm, a narrow- band emission around approximately 450nm) such that the display pixel generates standard display colors and another blue frequency may be a circadian-inducing blue (e.g. a cyan emission, substantial energy around approximately 485nm, a narrow or broad band emission around approximately 485nm) that is designed to effect the circadian rhythm in a more Significant way by waking the person. With such a display, the display pixel colors can be changed from standard colors to represent colors accurately, according to display color standards, to display colors that are similar but not necessarily standard colors to generate an effect of the person’s circadian rhythm. While the non-standard blue pixels may not be standard and may not display computer generated content in accordance with a standard color pallet, in many situations the colors may be acceptable by a user because the colors may still be acceptable while also inducing a circadian rhythm to awaken the person while using the display in the special color mode. [0096] The CSE blue may have significant energy at a longer wavelength than the typical blue used in a display. The inventors have appreciated that longer wavelengths in the blue and cyan regions (e.g. wavelengths between the typical display blue and typical display green) can be used to both generate acceptable colors in the computer-generated content and also have a greater effect on a person’s circadian rhythm. In some embodiments, the energy may be provided in a narrow band (e.g. a typical LED narrow band emission spectra with a maximum energy between 460nm and SOQnm, 460nm and 480nm, 470nm and 480nm, or 490nm and 500nm). In embodiments, the energy may be more broadly spread (e.g. through the use of a phosphor or quantum dot structure) such that there is significant energy produced in the region between 460nm and 500nm. In such broad width systems the maximum energy may or may not fall within the 460nm to 500nm region. For example, the peak may be at or near the typical display blue of 450nm and also have significant energy in the 460nm to 500nm region. The significant energy may be an intensity of more than 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, or 50% of the maximum energy. That significant energy may' fall within the regions of 460 and 470nm, 470nm and 480nm, or 490nm and 500nm for example.
[0097] A computer display according to the principles of the present inventions may include a micro-LED array where the micro-LED array includes a pixel array formed of micro-LEDs including red, green and blue generating LEDs. In embodiments, the blue LED may be a circadian rhythm inducing blue LED (as described herein). If only three colors are arranged in the pixel array, the circadian- inducing blue for the pixel may not fall within the standard color gamut for the display but will generally generate acceptable colors while effecting the circadian rhythm. In embodiments, the pixel array includes two different color generating blue LEDs, one with a standard color for the display and one that may not be within the standard color gamut for display but that is adapted to affect the arcadian rhythm to induce a waking effect. This arrangement would include four colors per pixel in the pixel array of the micro-LED array. In embodiments, the computer display includes only a portion of micro-LEDs with the circadian rhythm effecting blue. The micro- LED pixels may be built with different color generating LEDs, white LEDs with filters, LEDs with phosphors, etc.
[0098] In some embodiments, the CSE blue microLED may have a narrow emission characteristic where substantially all of the energy is produced over 120nm or so and having a full width at half maximum (FWHM) of about 40 nm Figure 3a illustrates and example spectral power distribution of such a microLED. In embodiments, the circadian-inducing blue microLED may have a broader emission characteristic. Figure 3c illustrates one such example spectral power distribution. The broader emission may be developed by adding a phosphor to the microLED system, by using a number of narrow band emission microLEDs, etc. In embodiments, a filter may be associated with the microLED. For example, the desired blue color point may include an emission band that is broader than is achievable through a single narrow emission microLED so a phosphor or multiple narrow band LEDs may be used to broaden the emission and then a filter may be used to cut the broader emission down to the desired amount.
[00099] A standard color computer display rnay use a blue LED with a narrow emission characteristic, such as is illustrated in figure 3b. In some embodiments, the standard blue may he replaced with a broader band blue, such as is illustrated in figure 3d, to add some cyan to the emission (i .e slightly longer wavelength energy). This configuration may also include a filter to cut the long tail but maintain some emission m the circadian blue emission region.
[00100] Aspects of a computer di splay in some implementations may include an LCD backlit pixel array. Generally, an LCD backlit display has a backlight that generates a broadband of colors (e.g. white LEDs, white fluorescent) or one that generates narrow bands of color (e.g. red, green, and blue LEDs). Manufactures have typically adopted an arrangement where the backlight is a broadband white LED based system and each pixel of the LCD array is associated with a colored filter (e.g. red, green and blue) to produce the full color gamut for each pixel of the display. In some embodiments, the LCD pixel array includes filters to produce three colors per pixel based on a backlighting system that produces white light. Tire pixel filters filter the white light into red, green and blue. The backlight also generally produces a constant amount of light and the LCD’s at each sub pixel color are changed to regulate the intensity of the color of the sub pixel (e.g. 256 steps based on a polarization setting at the sub pixel level). In embodiments, the blue filter is adapted to transmit light that is more effective at effecting the circadian rhythm (e.g. 485nm). In embodiments, each pixel includes a fourth filter for a fourth sub pixel color. The fourth pixel uses a circadian blue pass filter such that light transmitting the sub pixel filter effects the circadian cycle in a more significant way than light passing through a standard blue filter in the pixel array. With the fourth filter configuration, the display may be set to use one and/or the other color of blue to form the blue in the pixels.
[00101] In some embodiments, the backlight produces red, green and blue in a sequence and only one LCD is used per pixel position such that the one LCD will turn on in sequence with the desired corresponding required color for the pixel. The sequential lighting system may than include a circadian-inducing blue color to affect the circadian rhythm. The sequential lighting system may further include two different colors of blue (e.g. standard blue and circadian blue) and the sequence cycles through all four colors. In embodiments, the circadian blue color may or may not be included in every cycle of the sequence. Reducing the number of cycles involves may have an effect on the perceived combined color of the pixel and of the effect of the circadian rhythm.
[00102] In some embodiments of the LCD configuration(s), the backlight may be modified to include enhanced emission at the circadian blue region. For example, a cyan LED may be included in the backlight itself such that it produces enough emission in the circadian blue region that it can generate adequate color for display and effect on the person’s circadian rhythm. The backlight may include a broadband emission source (e.g. as illustrated in figure 3c) or a narrow emission source (e.g. as illustrated in figure 3a) for this purpose. The filter associated with the circadian blue pixels can then be adjusted to transmit the desired bandwidth of light in the region. Traditionally, the backlights used in a display do not produce much emission in this desired region so changing the lighting system to include more emission in this region may be desirable.
[00103] A computer display according to aspects of some implementations may include an OLED pixel array where the OLED array includes a pixel array fonned of OLED sub pixels. The OLEDs may include red, green and blue generating OLEDs. In some embodiments, the OLEDs may produce white light and include filters to pass only the particular color desired for the sub pixel. In embodiments, the blue OLED or filter may be adapted to produce a circadian rhythm inducing blue color. If only three colors are arranged in the pixel array, the blue for the pixel may not fall within the standard color for the display but wall generally generate acceptable colors while effecting the circadian rhythm. In embodiments, the pixel array may include two different color blue OLEDs, one with a standard color for the display and one that may not be within the standard color gamut for display but that is adapted to affect the circadian rhythm wake cycle. This arrangement would include four colors per pixel in the pixel array of the OLED array. In embodiments, the computer display includes only a portion of OLEDs with the circadian rhythm effecting blue.
[00104] In some embodiments, the OLED may produce a broadband of light in the region and be filtered. In embodiments, the circadian-inducing OLED may produce a narrow band emission and possibly be filtered or not.
[00105] In some implemenations aspects relate to the inclusion of more than three standard colors in a computer display pixel array. The more than three colors may include the addition of a color(s) that is intended to provide a bioactive display that is switchable between a standard color gamut and a modified color gamut. The modification to the pixel colors may be adapted to produce pixel colors that can affect a person’s physiological and psychological functions while maintaining the display as an effective computer display for the presentation of digital content. A control system! computer processor associated with the display may be used, either automatically (e.g. based on sensed conditions, based on time of day, based on a schedule) or through a user interface, to switch between the two modes. Such a system may also be operated in a mode where both a standard blue and circadian blue are operated simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode (e.g. pulse width modulation to regulate the apparent intensity of each one). The modified color pixel array is bioactive and may be regulated by tire control system and/or a computer system to determine dose or aliquot of light of a particular characteristic or mode by a change the pixel colors over time to assist in regulating the person’s circadian cycle or other physiological and psychological functions.
[00106] In some implementations the red spectrum may be positioned in the long red near infrared energy (LRNE) region. In some instances the system may- switch between the two modes. Such a system may also be operated in a mode where both a standard red and LRNE red are operated simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode (e.g. pulse width modulation to regulate the apparent intensity of each one). The modified color pixel array is bioactive and may be regulated by the control system. In some instances red in the LRNE non-visible region also referred to as near infrared may be used simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode with red or long red. Spectral power distributions shown in FIGS. 29 - 31. Region 1550 represents LRNE emissions which are considered by CIE standards previously noted to be outside the visual spectrum of humans [00107] The control system may further operate based on data sources that describe the user of the display (e.g. wearable sensors, sleep sensors, as described herein)
[00108] Figure 1 illustrates some examples of computer displays 102 in various configurations. Each of the configurations includes an array of pixels 106 positioned and controlled to display computer-generated content. One configuration is a desktop computer display 102a. The desktop configuration includes a peripheral 104 (e.g. keyboard, mouse, drawing pad, Bluetooth connected device, WiFi connected device). The desktop, or any other configuration, may receive data from personal devices (e.g. a user’s fitbit, sleep sensor) and adjust the color and/or intensity of the light emitted by the pixels 106. Device 102b is a small touch screen device (e.g. phone, pda). Device 102c is a tablet device, which may have a touch screen. The display could also be a tele vision, which may be an Internet device, radio receiver device, cable TV device, satellite TV device, etc.
[00109] Figure 2 illustrates various examples of bioactive lighting pixel constructions that may be built into a display in accordance with the principles of the present in ventions. These examples are simplified examples of the basic construction of the vari ous display technologies at a pixel level. The three examples presented are the microLED 200, OLED 230, and backlit LCD 240. Each of these examples uses a pixel technology that generates light at the pixel level that is outside of the normal display color gamut and at a color point or frequency that is known to affect a person’s circadian rhythm and other physiological and psychological functions.
[00110] A microLED based computer display may be based on an array of microLED pixels 200. Each micoLED pixel 200 in the area of the display may include different color producing mieroLEDs 200, electrodes 208 to power and control each microLED in each pixel, and a substrate 208. Each of the mieroLEDs may emit light of a particular color based on the materials used in the construction of the microLED. As a secondary example, the microLED(s) may be arranged to irradiate a phosphor for color conversion or they may be arranged to transmit light through a filter. In embodiments, the mieroLEDs in the pixel may be red, green and circadian blue. Tire circadian blue may be a blue outside of the normal blue gamut that is used in a display. It may be a blue with spectral characteristics of the circadian lighting systems disclosed herein. In a configuration where only three colors are included in the pixel, the color gamut of the display may always be outside of the standard display gamut. Tills may be acceptable to a user that is less concerned about the exact color of displayed content and more concerned with receiving a light that effects the user’s circadian rhythm while still having reasonable colors produced. In another embodiment, the pixel may include four colors: red, green, standard display blue and circadian blue. This configuration lends itself to a control system that can switch between the standard blue and the arcadian blue. The circadian blue may be used in the morning hours, for example, and then the display may switch to the standard blue in later hours. In yet later hours, the standard blue may be turned down to further reduce the stimulation of the circadian rhythm. The two blues may fade in and out in a synchronized fashion. Both may be on at one time to reduce the circadian blue as the system transitions to the standard blue. In some implementations described herein the red spectrum may be positioned in the long red near infrared energy (LRNE) region. In some instances the system may switch between the two modes. Such a system may also be operated in a mode where both a standard red and LRNE red are operated simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode (e.g. pulse width modulation to regulate the apparent intensity of each one). The modified color is bioactive and may be regulated by the control system. In some instances red in the LRNE non-visible region also referred to as near infrared may be used simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode with red or long red. The LRNE may be applied in doses or aliquots based on sensor data or other inputs to the control systems. Such LRNE may be used as a health supplement based controls systems. Application of LRNE may also be coordinated with a measure of CSE received by a user over a period of time as a counter effect of excessive CSE. Application of LRNE may also be controlled, at least in part, by physiological measures of the user including but not limited to data harvested from sensors associated with or information about users, such as one or more of physiological sensors. An OLED based computer display may be based on an array of OLED pixels 230. The OLED pixel 230 may have three separately controllable QLEDs 212 in each pixel. Each one may emit a similar color (eg. white) and each one may be optically associated with a different colored filter 211 to generate red, green and circadian blue. In an alternate construction, each OLED emitter may generate its own color (e.g. through a different material, through a phosphor conversion). Each OLED pixel may be constructed with electrodes 214 to power and control each color and a substrate 216. In embodiments, the color set includes a circadian blue (e.g. as described herein). In embodiments, the color set has only three colors, including the circadian blue, and the display produces colors outside of the standard display color gamut. In embodiments, the color set has four colors, including a standard blue and a circadian blue, such that a control system could choose which blue to activate and control as described herein . In some
implementations the red spectrum may be positioned in the long red near infrared energy (LRNE) region. In some instances the system may switch between the two modes. Such a system may also be operated in a mode where both a standard red and LRNE red are operated simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode (e.g. pulse width modulation to regulate the apparent intensity of each one). The modified color is bioactive and may be regulated by the control system. In some instances red in the LRNE non-vi sible region also referred to as near infrared may be used simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode with red or long red. The LRNE may be applied in doses or aliquots based on sensor data or other inputs to the control systems. Such LRNE may be used as a health supplement based controls systems. Application of LRNE may also be coordinated with a measure of CSE received by a user over a period of time. Application of LRNE may also be controlled, at least in part, by physiological measures of the user including but not limited to data harvested from sensors associated with or information about users, such as one or more of physiological sensors.
[001 1 1 1 A backlit LCD based computer display may be based on an array of backlit LCD pixels 240. The construction of the LCD display may include liquid crystals 206 for multiple channels at each pixel where each liquid crystal in the pixel is associated with a filter that filters the light from a backlight 210. In this configuration, the backlight 210 makes white light and the filters cut the white light into a particular color, generally red, green and blue. In embodiments, the blue filter in the color filter layer 210 is a circadian blue color filter. In embodiments, the filter layer 210 includes two blue filters, associated with two separate liquid crystals: one for circadian blue and one for the standard display blue. In embodiments, the color set includes a circadian blue (e.g. as described herein). In embodiments, the filter color set has only three colors, including the circadian blue, and the display produces colors outside of the standard display color gamut. In embodiments, the filter color set has four colors, including a standard blue and a circadian blue, such that a control system could choose which blue to activate and control . In some implementations the red spectrum may be positioned in the long red near infrared energy (LRNE) region. In some instances the system may switch between the two modes. Such a system may also be operated in a mode where both a standard red and LRNE red are operated simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode (e.g. pulse width modulation to regulate the apparent intensity of each one). The modified color is bioactive and may be regulated by the control system. In some instances red in the LRNE non-visible region also referred to as near infrared may be used simultaneously or through a rapid switching mode with red or long red. The LRNE may be applied in doses or aliquots based on sensor data or other inputs to the control systems. Such LRNE may be used as a health supplement based controls systems. Application of LRNE may also be coordinated with a measure of CSE received by a user over a period of time.
Application of LRNE may also be controlled, at least in part, by physiological measures of the user including but not limited to data harvested from sensors associated with or information about users, such as one or more of physiological sensors.
[00112] In embodiments, the LCD pixels may be arranged with a backlight 210 that sequentially cycles through separate colors and the liquid crystal layer in this arrangement may only have one liquid crystal per pixel and it may not include a filter layer. As the backlight sequences through its colors the liquid crystal can be turned on to emit the correct color. By quickly cycling through the colors the user’s eye can integrate the color and perceive it as a combined color. For example, leaving tire liquid crystal in the‘on’ or transmit mode and cycling very' quickly between red and blue of equal intensity can cause the person to perceive the pixel as purple. In such a construction, the backlight 210 may include a circadian blue emitter(s). In some embodiments, the backlight 210 includes standard display blue and a circadian blue.
In some embodiments, the backlight 210 includes standard display red and a visible LRNE red. In some embodiments, the backlight 210 includes standard display red and a non-visible LRNE red. In some embodiments, the backlight 210 includes standard display red a visible LRNE red and a non-visible LRNE red. In some embodiments, the backlight 210 includes one of a standard display blue and a circadian blue emitter, a standard display red and a visible LRNE red. In some embodiments, the backlight 210 includes one of a standard display blue and a circadian blue emitter, standard display red and a non-visible LRNE red. In some embodiments, the backlight 210 includes one of a standard display blue and a circadian blue emitter, standard display red a visible LRNE red and a non-visible LRNE red. [00113] Another aspect of the present inventions relates to a computer display edge lighting system or peripheral. An edge lighting system may surround the computer display and emit light that effects the circadian rhythm of a person using or proximate the computer display. The edge lighting system may include a lighting system similar to the display lighting systems described herein or a panel lighting system as described herein. The edge lighting system may be coordinated with the pixels of the display (e.g. through a computer system associated with both devices). It may otherwise be controlled separately (e.g. as described herein).
Types of Circadian Lighting Systems for Display Systems
[00114] Lighting systems that may be used in display systems in accordance with the principles of the present inventions include, for example, 2-channel, 3- channel, 4-channel, 5-channel, or 6-channel LED-based color-tuning systems.
Individual channels within the multi-channel systems may have particular color points and spectral power distributions for the light output generated by the channel. As used herein, the term“channel” refers to all the components in a light-generating pathway from an LED (microLED, OLED) through any filtering or other components until tire light exits the display system.
[00115] In some implementations, 2-channel systems can be used having two white light channels. The two white light channels can be those described more fully in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/757,664, filed November 8, 2018, entitled“Two-Channel Tunable Lighting Systems with Controllable Equivalent Melanopic Lux and Correlated Color Temperature Outputs,” and International Patent Application No. PCT/US2G 19/013356, filed January 11, 2019, entitled‘Two-Channel Tunable Lighting Systems With Controllable Equivalent Melanopic Lux And Correlated Color Temperature Outputs” the entirety of which is incorporated herein for all purposes.
White Light Channels
[00116] In some aspects, the present disclosure provides for display systems that incorporate two white lighting channels, which can be referred to herein as a first lighting charmel and a second lighting channel. The white lighting channels can be used to backlight a display system that utilizes color filtering in order to generate a digital display.
First lighting channels [00117] In some aspects, the present disclosure provides first lighting channels for use in lighting systems. The first lighting channels can have first color points with CCT values between about 4000K and about 6500K. In some
implementations, the first color point can have a CCT of about 4000K. In certain implementations, the first color point can have a CCT of about 4000K, about 4100K, about 4200K, about 4300K, about 4400K, about 4500K, about 4600K, about 4700K, about 4800K, about 4900K, about 5000K, about 5100K, about 5200K, about 5300K, about 5400K, about 5500K, about 5600K, about 5700K, about 5800K, about 5900K, about 6000K, about 6100K, about 6200K, about 6300K, about 64Q0K, or about 6500K.
[00118] In some implementations, the first lighting channel can have one or more LEDs having an emission with a first peak wavelength of between about 440 nm and about 510 nm. In certain implementations, the first lighting channel can have one or more LEDs having an emission with a first peak wavelength of about 450 nm.
[00119] In some implementations, the first lighting channel can have a first color point with a CCT value of about 4000K. The first lighting channel can have a first color point with a color-point range 304A can be defined by a polygonal region on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram defined by the following ccx, ccy color coordinates: (0.4006, 0.4044), (0.3736, 0.3874), (0.3670, 0.3578), (0.3898, 0.3716), winch correlates to an ANSI C78.377-2008 standard 4000K nominal CCT white light with target CCT and tolerance of 3985+275K and target duv and tolerance of 0.00 IίO.006, as more fully described in American National Standard ANSI C78.377- 2008,“Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products,” National Electrical Manufacturers Association, American National Standard Lighting Group, which is incorporated herein in its entirety for all purposes. In some implementations, suitable color-point ranges for the first color point can be described as MacAdam ellipse color ranges in the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram color space, as illustrated schematically in FIG. 14, which depicts a color-point range 402, the black body locus 401, and a line 403 of constant ccy coordinates on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram. In FIG. 14, MacAdam ellipse ranges are described with major axis“a”, mmor axis“b”, and ellipse rotation angle Q relative to line 403. In some
implementations, the color-point range for the first color point can be range 304B, an embodiment of color range 402, and can be defined as a single 5-step MacAdam ellipse with center point (0.3818, 0.3797) with a major axis“a” of 0.01565, minor axis“b” of 0.00670, with an ellipse rotation angle Q of 52.70°, shown relative to a line 403. In some implementations, the color-point range for the first color point can be range 304C, an embodiment of color range 402, and can be defined as a single 3-step MacAdam ellipse with center point (0.3818, 0.3797) with a major axis‘a” of 0.00939, minor axis“b” of 0.00402, with an ellipse rotation angle Q of 53.7°, shown relative to a line 403. In further implementations, the first color point can be within the color- point ranges described in Table 57 for the selected boundary for each nominal CCT value. In other implementations, the color-point range for the first color point can be a region on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram defined by a polygon connecting the (ccx, ccy) coordinates (0.0.3670, 0.3575), (0.3737, 0.3875), (0.4007, 0.4047), and (0.3898, 0.3720). In yet further implementations, the color-point range for the first color point can be a region on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram defined by a 4- step MacAdam ellipse centered at 3985K CCT and dm 0.9845. In other implementations, the color-point range for the first color point can be a region on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram defined by a polygon connecting the (ccx, ccy) coordinates (0.3703, 0.3590), (0.3851, 0.3679), (0.3942, 0.3972), and (0.3769, 0.3864).
[00120] In some implementations, the first lighting channel can have certain spectral power distributions. Some aspects of some exemplary first lighting channels are shown in Table 44. Aspects of the spectral power distributions for the exemplary first lighting channels shown in Table 44 and an average of the exemplary first lighting channels (shown as‘Exemplary' 1 st channels avg”) are provided in Tables 46, 48, 50, 52, and 53, which show' the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for each exemplary first lighting channel or average thereof and nonnalized to a value of 100.0, except for Table 53, in which the values are normalized to a value of 1.000. In certain implementations, the first lighting channel can have a first spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Tables 46, 48, 50, 52, and 53. In some implementations, the first lighting channel can have a spectral power distribution that falls between the minimum (shown as“min”) and maximum (shown as“max”) values in each of the wavelength ranges as shown in one or more of the Tables 46, 48, 50, 52, and 53. In further implementations, the first lighting channel can have a spectral power distribution that fails between values 5% less, 10% less, 20% less, or 30% less than the minimum (shown as‘"min”) and values 5% more, 10% more, 20% more, or 30% more than the maximum (shown as“max”) values in each of the wavelength ranges as shown in one or more of the Tables 46, 48, 50, 52, and 53. FIGs. 5, 9, 10, 12 and 29-31 depict aspects of first spectral power distributions for the exemplary first lighting channels described herein. FIG. 12 depicts a spectral power distribution 1600 for the exemplary lighting channel“5000K Ch i” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein. FIG. 10 depicts a spectral power distribution 1400 for the exemplary lighting channel“4000K Ch3” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein. FIG. 9 depicts a spectral power distribution 1300 for the exemplary' lighting channel “4000K Ch2” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein. FIG. 9 depicts a spectral power distribution 900 for the exemplary lighting channel“4000K Ch4” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein. FIG. 5 further depicts some exemplary' wavelength ranges 901 A, 90 IB, 901 C, 90 ID, and 90 IE, which correspond to the wavelength ranges shown in Table 53. As shown in Table 53, in some implementations, first lighting channels may have particular spectral power values within one or more of wavelength ranges 901A, 901B, 901C, 901D, and 901E, or other wavelength ranges not depicted in FIG. 5 or shown in Table 53 but described elsewhere herein.
[00121] In some aspects, the first lighting channel can have a first white light having a first color point with a CCT and EML value that falls within a range of possible pairings of CCT and EML values, also referred to herein as a CCT-EML range. A suitable CCT-EML range 1710 for first lighting channels of the present disclosure is shown graphically in FIG. 13, which also shows exemplary' point pairings of CCT and EML for the exemplary first lighting channels shown in Table 3. Tables 1 and 2 show' CCT and EML values for color points generated by some commercially-available fixed-CCT LED-driven white light systems having Ra values of approximately 80.
Second lighting channels
[00122] In some aspects, tire present disclosure provides second lighting channels for use in lighting systems. The second lighting channels can have second color points w'ith CCT values between about 1800K and about 2700K. In some implementations, the first color point can have a CCT of about 2400K. In some implementations, the first color point can have a CCT of about 1800K, about 1900K, about 2000K, about 21Q0K, about 2200K, about 2300K, about 2400K, about 2500K, about 2600K, or about 2700K.
[00123] In some implementations, the second lighting channel can have one or more LEDs having an emission with a second peak wavelength of between about 380 nm and about 420 nm. In certain implementations, the second lighting channel can have one or more LEDs having an emission with a second peak wavelength of about 410 nm. In some aspects, the use of a different peak wavelength for the LEDs in the second lighting channel in comparison to the LEDs in the first lighting channel can contribute to the desired performance of the lighting systems of the disclosure.
[00124] In some implementations of the present disclosure, the second lighting channel can produce light having a second color point within a suitable color- point range. In certain implementations, the second color point can be within the color-point ranges described in Table 57 for the selected boundary for each nominal CCT value. In some implementations, the second color point can be within a color- point range defined by a region bounded by a polygon connecting the (ccx, ccy) coordinates on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram of (0.4593, 0.3944), (0.5046, 0.4007), (0.5262 0.4381), and (0.4813 0.4319). In further implementations, the second color point can be within a color-point range defined by a region bounded by a 4-step MacAdam ellipse centered at 2370K CCT value and duv=-0.3. In yet further implementations, the second color point can be within a color-point range defined by a region bounded by a polygon connecting the (ccx, ccy) coordinates on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram of (0.4745, 0.4025), (0.4880, 0.4035), (0.5036, 0.4254), (0.4880, 0.4244).
[00125] In some implementations, the second lighting channel can have certain spectral power distributions. Some aspects of some exemplary second lighting channels are shown in Table 44. Aspects of the spectral power distributions for the exemplary second lighting chann el s shown in Table 44 and an average of the exemplary second lighting channels (shown as“Exemplary 2nd channels avg”) are provided in Tables 45, 47, 49, 51, and 53, which show tire ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for each exemplary second l ighting channel or average thereof and normalized to a value of 100.0, except for Table 53, in which the values are normalized to a value of 1.000. In certain implementations, the second lighting channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than tire values shown in one or more of Tables 45, 47, 49, 51, and 53. In some implementations, the second lighting channel can have a spectral power distribution that falls between the minimum (shown as“min’') and maximum (shown as“max’') values in each of the wavelength ranges as shown in one or more of the Tables 45, 47, 49, 51, and 53. In further implementations, the second lighting channel can have a spectral power distribution that falls between values 5% less, 10% less, 20% less, or 30% less than the minimum (shown as“min”) and values 5% more, 10% more, 20% more, or 30% more than the maximum (shown as“max”) values in each of the wavelength ranges as shown in one or more of the Tables 45, 47, 49, 51, and 53. FIG. 7 depicts a spectral power distribution 1100 for the exemplary lighting channel “2400K Ch2” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein. FIG. 8 depicts a spectral power distribution 1200 for the exemplary lighting channel“2400K Ch3” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein. FIG. 11 depicts a spectral power distribution 1500 for the exemplary lighting channel“1800K Chi” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein. FIG. 6 depicts a spectral power distribution 1000 for the exemplary lighting channel“2400K Ch3” listed in Table 44 and further characterized elsewhere herein. FIG. 6 further depicts some exemplary wavelength ranges 1001A, 1001B, 1001C, 1001D, and 1001E, which correspond to the wavelength ranges shown in Table 53. As shown in Table 53, in some implementations, second lighting channels may have particular spectral power values within one or more of wavelength ranges 1001A, 1001B, 1001C, 100 ID, and 1001E, or other wavelength ranges not depicted in FIG. 6 or shown in Table 12 but described elsewhere herein.
Colored Lighting Channels
[00126] In some implementations, the 3-channel BIOACTIVE LED-based color-tuning systems can include channels as described in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/712,182 filed July 30, 2018, and U.S. Provisional Patent
Application No. 62/757,672, filed November 8, 2018, entitled“Switchable Systems for White Light with High Color Rendering and Biological Effects,” which is incorporated herein in its entirety for all purposes. [00127] In some implementations, the bioactive 4-channel, 5-channel, and 6- channel LED-based color tuning systems can include channels as described more fully in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/757,672, filed November 8, 2018, entitled“Switchable Systems for White Light with High Color Rendering and Biological Effects/’ which is incorporated herein in its entirety for all purposes.
[00128] In some implementations, bioactive display systems can comprise standard lighting channels for red, blue, and green color points used in digital display systems known to those of skill in the art, such as those described herein and shown in FIG. 3b, and additional lighting channels each comprising a cyan lighting channel with an output with a color point in a cyan color region . The standard lighting channels may have light emissions with substantially all of the spectral energy distribution contained within a wavelength range of about 120 nm a full width at half maximum (FWHM) of about 40 nm. In certain implementations, the cyan lighting channel may include cyan lighting elements and channels as described in International Patent Application No. PCT/US2018/020792, filed March 2, 2018, as short-blue- pumped cyan channels driven by LEDs having peak wavelengths of between about 430 nm to about 460 nm (referred to as“green” therein) and long-blue-pumped cyan channels driven by LEDs having peak wavelengths ranging from about 460 nm to about 485 nm (referred to as“cyan” therein). In further implementations, the cyan lighting channel may include cyan lighting elements and channels as described in U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/757,672, tiled November 8, 2018, as long-blue- pumped cyan and short-blue-pumped cyan. In some implementations, the display- systems can comprise at least one lighting channel that comprises a short-blue- puinped cyan channel and at least one lighting channel that comprises a long-blue- pumped cyan channel.
[00129] In some implementations, the cyan light channels can have spectral power distributions. Tables 1-4 show' the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for each color range and normalized to a value of 100 0. In certain implementations, the spectral power distribution of a cyan light channel falls between minimum and maximum values in particular wavelength ranges relative to an arbitrary reference wavelength range. In some implementations, the short-blue-pumped cyan can fall within the values between Short-blue-pumped cyan minimum 1 and Short-blue -pumped cyan maximum 1 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1, Table 2, or both Tables 1 and 2. In other implementations, the short-blue-pumped cyan can fall within the values between Short-blue-pumped cyan minimum 1 and Short-blue-pumped cyan maximum 2 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1. In some implementations, the Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan lighting channel can produce light with spectral power distribution that falls within the values between Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan minimum 1 and Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan maximum 1 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1, Table 2, or both Tables 1 and 2. Tables 3 and 4 show the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary' reference wavelength range selected for the short-blue-pumped cyan color range and normalized to a value of 100.0, for a short- blue-pumped cyan ch annel that may be used in some implementation s of the disclosure. The exemplary Short-blue-pumped cyan Channel 1 has a ccx, ccy color coordinate shown in Table 5. In certain implementations, the short-blue-pumped cyan channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Table 3 or 4. In some implementations, the long-blue-pumped cyan channel can produce cyan light having certain spectral power distributions. Tables 3 and 4 shows ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for the Iong-blue-pumped cyan color range and normalized to a value of 100.0, for several non-limiting embodiments of the iong-blue-pumped cyan channel. The exemplary' Long -blue -pumped cyan Channel 1 has a ccx, ccy color coordinate Shown in Table 5. In certain implementations, the Iong-blue-pumped cyan channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wav elength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Table 3 and 4.
Blue Channels
[00130] In some implementations of the present disclosure, lighting systems can include bioactive blue channels that produce light with a blue color point that falls within a blue color range. In certain implementations, suitable blue color ranges can include blue color ranges 301 A-F. FIG. 22A depicts a blue color range 301A defined by a line connecting the ccx, ccy color coordinates of the infinity point of the Planckian locus (0.242, 0.24) and (0.12, 0.068), the Planckian locus from 4000K and infinite CCT, the constant CCT fine of 4000K, the hne of purples, and the spectral locus. FIG. 22A also depicts a blue color range 30 ID defined by a line connecting (0.3806, 0.3768) and (0.0445, 0.3), the spectral locus between the monochromatic point of 490 nm and (0.12, 0.068), a line connecting the ccx, ccy color coordinates of the infinity point of the Planckian locus (0.242, 0.24) and (0.12, 0.068), and the Planckian locus from 4000K and infinite CCT. The blue color range may also be the combination of ranges 301A and 301D together. FIG. 25 depicts a blue color range 30 IB can be defined by a 60-step MacAdam ellipse at a CCT of 20000K, 40 points below the Planckian locus. FIG. 26 depicts a blue color range 301C that is defined by a polygonal region on the 1931 CIE Chromatieity Diagram defined by the following ccx, ccy color coordinates: (0.22, 0.14), (0 19, 0.17), (0.26, 0.26), (0 28, 0.23). FIG 10 depicts blue color ranges 301E and 301 F. Blue color range 301 E is defined by lines connecting (0.231, 0.218), (0.265, 0.260), (0.2405, 0.305), and (0.207, 0.256).
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000046_0001
Figure imgf000047_0001
Figure imgf000048_0001
Figure imgf000049_0001
Figure imgf000050_0001
Figure imgf000051_0001
[00131] in certain implementations, the cyan lighting channels described herein, including short-blue-pumped cyan channels and long-blue-pumped cyan channels as described herein, can generate light outputs with cyan color points that fall within a cyan color range. In certain implementations, suitable cyan color ranges can include cyan color ranges 303A-E, which can be seen in FIGs. 22B, 23, and 24. Cyan color range 303A is defined by7 a line connecting the ccx, ccy color coordinates (0.18, 0.55) and (0.27, 0.72), the constant CCT line of 9000K, the Planckian locus between 9000K and 1 BOOK, the constant CCT line of 1800K, and the spectral locus on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram. A cyan color range 303B can be defined by the region bounded by lines connecting (0.360, 0.495), (0.371, 0.518), (0.388, 0.522), and (0.377, 0.499). A cyan color range 303C is defined by a line connecting the ccx, ccy color coordinates (0.18, 0.55) and (0.27, 0.72), the constant CCT line of 9000K, the Planckian locus between 9000K and 4600K, the constant CCT line of 4600K, and the spectral locus. A cyan color range 303D is defined by the constant CCT line of 4600K, the spectral locus, the constant CCT line of I 800K, and the Planckian locus between 4600K and 1800K. In some implementations, the long-blue-pumped cyan channel can provide a color point within a cyan color region 303E defined by lines connecting (0.497, 0.469), (0.508, 0.484),
(0.524, 0 472), and (0 513, 0.459).
[00132] In some implementations, the LEDs in the cyan color channels can be LEDs with peak emission wavelengths at or below about 535 nm. In some
implementations, the LEDs emit light with peak emission wavelengths between about 360 nm and about 535 nrn. In some implementations, the LEDs in the cyan color channels can be formed from InGaN semiconductor materials. In some implementations, the LEDs used in the long-blue- pumped cyan channels can be LEDs having peak emission wavelengths between about 360 nm and about 535 nm, between about 380 nm and about 520 nm, between about 470 nm and about 505 nm, about 480 nm, about 470 nm, about 460 nm, about 455 nm, about 450 nm, or about 445 nm. In certain
implementations, the LEDs used in long-blue-pumped cyan channels can have a peak wavelength between about 460 nm and 51 5 nm. In some implementations, the LEDs in the long-blue-pumped cyan channels can include one or more LUXEON Rebel Blue LEDs (LXML-PB01, LXML-PB02) of color bins 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, which have peak wavelengths ranging from 460 nm to 485 nm, or LUXEON Rebel Cyan LEDs (LXML- PEOl) of color bins 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, which have peak wavelengths raving from 460 nm to 485 nm. In some implementations, the short-blue-pumped cyan channels can have LEDs having a peak wavelength between about 405 nm and about 485 nm, between about 430 nm and about 460 nm, between about 430 nm and about 455 nm, between about 430 nm and about 440 nm, between about 440 nm and about 450 nm, between about 440 nm and about 445 nm, or between about 445 nm and about 450 nm. The LEDs used in the short- blue-pumped cyan channels may have full-width half-maximum wavelength ranges of between about 10 nm and about 30 nm. In some preferred implementations, the short- blue-pumped cyan channels can include one or more LUXEON Z Color Line royal blue LEDs (product code LXZ1-PR01) of color bin codes 3, 4, 5, or 6, one or more LUXEON Z Color Line blue LEDs (LXZ1-PB01) of color bin code 1 or 2, or one or more
LUXEON royal blue LEDs (product code LXML-PR01 and LXML-PR02) of color bins 3, 4, 5, or 6 (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands).
[00133] In some implementations of the present disclosure, lighting systems can include yellow channels that produce light with a yellow color point that falls within a yellow color range. Non-limiting FIGs. 17A and 17B depicts some aspects of suitable yellow color ranges for implementations of yellow channels of the present disclosure. In some implementations, the yellow channels can produce light having a yellow color point that falls within a yellow color range 1401, with boundaries defined on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram of the constant CCT line of 5000K from the Planckian locus to the spectral locus, the spectral locus, and the Planckian locus from 5000K to 550K. In certain implementations, the yellow channels can produce light having a yellow color point that falls within a yellow color range 1402, with boundaries defined on the 1931 CIE
Chromaticity Diagram by a polygon connecting (ccx, ccy) coordinates of (0.47, 0.45), (0.48, 0.495), (0.41, 0.57), and (0.40, 0.53). In some implementations, the yellow channels can produce light having a color point at one of the exemplary yellow color points 1403A-D shown in FIG. 17B and described more fully elsewhere herein. Violet Channels
[00134] In some implementations of the present disclosure, lighting systems can include violet channels that produce light with a violet color point that falls within a violet color range. Non-limiting FIG. 16 depicts some aspects of suitable violet color ranges for implementations of violet channels of the present disclosure. In some implementations, the violet channels can produce light having a violet color point that falls within a violet color range 1301, with boundaries defined on the 1931 CTE
Chromaticity Diagram of the Pianckian locus between 1600K CCT and infinite CCT, a line between the infinite CCT point on the Pianckian locus and the monochromatic point of 470 nm on the spectral locus, the spectral locus between the monochromatic point of 470 nm and the line of purples, the line of purples from the spectral locus to the constant CCT line of 1600K, and the constant CCT line of 1600K between the line of purples and the 1600K CCT point on the Pianckian locus. In certain implementations, the violet channels can produce light having a violet color point that falls within a violet color range 1302, with boundaries defined on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity' Diagram by a 40-step MacAdam ellipse centered at 6500K CCT with DUV= -40 points. In some
implementations, the violet channels can produce light having a color point at one of the exemplary' violet color points 1303A-D shown in FIG. 16 and described more fully elsewtiere herein.
[00135] In some implementations of the present disclosure, lighting systems can include bioactive red channels that produce light with a red color point that falls within a red color range. In certain implementations, suitable red color ranges can include red color ranges 302A-D. FIG 22B depicts a red color range 302 A defined by the spectral locus between the constant CCT line of 1600K and the line of purples, the line of purples, a line connecting the ccx, ccy color coordinates (0.61, 0 21 ) and (0.47, 0.28), and the constant CCT line of 1600K bioactive LRNE is within that range. FIG. 23 depicts some suitable color ranges for some implementations of the disclosure. FIG. 25 shows a red color range 302B that can be defined by a 20-step MacAdam ellipse at a CCT of 1200K, 20 points below the Pianckian locus. FIG. 24 depicts some further color ranges suitable for some implementations of the disclosure. A red color range 302C is defined by a polygonal region on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram defined by the following ccx, ccy color coordinates: (0.53, 0.41), (0.59, 0.39), (0.63, 0.29), (0.58, 0.30). In FIG. 26, a red color range 302C is depicted and can be defined by a polygonal region on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram defined by the following ccx, ccy color coordinates: (0.53, 0.41), (0.59, 0.39), (0.63, 0.29), (0.58, 0.30). FIG. 27 depicts a red color range 302D defined by lines connecting the ccx, ccy coordinates (0.576, 0.393), (0.583, 0.400),
(0.604, 0.387), and (0.597, 0.380).
Long Red and Near Infrared Channel
[00136] In some aspects, the present disclosure relates to long red and near infrared lighting channels that can provide long red and near infrared energy (“LRNE”). Long red and near infrared channels can provide one or both of Visible LRNE and Non- Visible LRNE. Visible LRNE refers to light having spectral power in wavelengths between about 625 nm and about 700 nm. Non- Visible LRNE refers to light having spectral power in wavelengths greater than or equal to about 700 nm. The Long Red and Near Infrared Channels, also referred to as LRNE channels or LRNE lighting channels, of the present disclosure can be part of one or more red channels involved in color-tuning and providing white light, or as separate channel that can be operated independently of color-tuning or color-rendering requirements. In some implementations an additional LRNE channel includes the non- visible region of the LRNE also referred to as near infrared. Although the near infrared may not be visually perceived as red, such a channel can provide benefits of LRNE as described above. In FIGs. 29-31 , Region 1 550 represents LRNE emissions which are considered by most to be outside the visual spectrum of humans. FIG. 29 depicts the emission spectrum of an exemplary nitride long- red phosphor, Long -Red Phosphor 700nm, excited by violet or blue light wavelengths between about 380 nm and about 490 nm. In certain implementations red nitride phosphors having peak wavelengths between about 675 nm and about 775 nm can be included in one or more red channels or long-red channels. Aspects of exemplary- phosphors that may be suitable for use in LRNE channels of the present disclosure are shown in Tables 61-63.
[00137] FIG. 30 shows aspects of the spectral pownr distribution of an exemplary LRNE lighting channel, LRNE Channel B, with further details shown in Tables 7-9 below. Three phosphor materials can be provided in a luminophoric medium associated with an LED string in LKNE Channel B, and in some implementations the phosphor materials can include a YAG phosphor, a red phosphor with emission peak at about 630 nm, and a red phosphor with an emission peak at about 750 nm.
[00138] FIG. 31 shows aspects of the spectral power distribution of an exemplary LRNE lighting channel, LRNE Channel A, with further details show in Tables 7-9 below'. Three phosphor materials can be provided in a luminophoric medium associated with an LED string in LRNE Channel A, and m some implementations the phosphor materials can include a YAG phosphor, a red phosphor with emission peak at about 630 nm, and a red phosphor with an emission peak at about 700 nm.
[00139] In some implementations, the LRNE channels can produce red light having certain spectral pow'er distributions. Tables 7-9 show's the ratios of spectral power within w'aveiength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected and normalized to a value of 100.0, for LRNE channels that may be used in some
implementations of the disclosure. In some implementations, the LRNE channels can have a spectral power distribution that falls within the ranges between the Exemplary LRNE Channel Minimum and the Exemplary' LRNE Channel Maximum in the wavelength ranges shown in Tables 7-9. In certain implementations, the LRNE channels of the disclosure can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Tables 7-9 for LRNE Channels A-B and the Exemplary LRNE Channel Average
[00140] FIGs. 39-43 show aspects of some suitable commercially available LED systems that can be used in the LRNE channels of the present disclosure FIG. 39 shows the emission spectra of some the LUXEON TR 2720 Line of products from Lumileds (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands). The peak wavelength of the LUXEON® IR 2720 LED series can be selected from between about 840 nm and about 965 nm as desired for bioactive effects. FIG. 40 shows the emission spectra of some of the SST-10-IR product line from Luminus (Luminus, Inc , Sunnyvale,
California, USA). Peak wavelengths of 850 nm or 940 nm can be selected. FIG. 41 shows the emission spectra of some 850 ran and 940 nm type LEDs available from Vision Light Tech (Vision Light Tech, Protonenlaan 22, 5405 NE UDEN, The Netherlands). FIG. 42 shows the spectral power characteristics of LUXEON IR ONYX product from Lumileds (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands). FIG. 43 shows the emission spectra that can he isolated via a Long Pass (LP) filter (such as MidOpt LP920 (Midwest Optical Systems, Inc., 322 Woodwork Lane, Palatine, IL 60067 USA)). Between the spectra shown in FIGs. 42 and 43, the LP filter cuts the short wavelength part of the spectrum susceptible to being seen by the human eye. In other implementations, LP filters with higher or lower wavelength thresholds for cut-off can be selected to isolate the spectral power in wavelength ranges as desired for LRNE bioactive effects.
Spectral Power Distributions of Colored Channels:
[00141] In implementations utilizing LEDs that emit substantially saturated light at wavelengths between about 360 nm and about 535 nm, the display systems can include suitable recipient luminophoric mediums for each LED in order to produce light having color points within the suitable blue color ranges 301A-F, red color ranges 302A- D, cyan color ranges 303 A-E, violet color ranges 1301, 1302, and yellow color ranges 1401, 1402 described herein. The light emitted by each lighting channel (from each LED string, i.e., the light emitted from the LED(s) and associated recipient luminophoric medium together) can have a suitable spectral power distribution (“SPD”) having spectral power with ratios of power across the visible wavelength spectrum from about 380 nm to about 780 nm or across the visible, near-visible, and non-visible wavelength spectrum from about 320 nm to about 1000 nm. While not wishing to be bound by any particular theory, it is speculated that the use of such LEDs in combination with recipient luminophoric mediums to create unsaturated light within the suitable color ranges 301 A- F, 302A-D, 303A-E, 1301 , 1302, 1401, and 1402 provides for improved color rendering performance for white light across a predetermined range of CCTs from a single display systems. Further, while not wishing to be bound by any particular theory, it is speculated that the use of such LEDs in combination with recipient luminophoric mediums to create unsaturated light within the suitable color ranges 301A-F, 302A-D, 303 A-E, 1301, 1302, 1401 , and 1402 provides for improved light rendering performance, providing higher EML performance along with color-rendering performance, for white light across a predetermined range of CCTs from a single display systems. Some suitable ranges for spectral power distribution ratios of the lighting channels of the present disclosure are shown m Tables 1-4 and 7-15. The Tables show the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for each color range and normalized to a value of 100.0 except where indicated otherwise.
[00142] In some implementations, the lighting channels of the present disclosure can each product a colored light that falls between minimum and maximum values in particular wavelength ranges relative to an arbitrary reference wavelength range. Tables 1, 2, and 7-15 show some exemplary minimum and maximum spectral power values for the blue, red, long-red near infrared (LRNE), short-blue-pumped cyan, long-blue-pumped cyan, yellow, and violet channels of the disclosure. In certain implementations, the blue lighting channel can produce light with spectral power distribution that falls within the values between Blue minimum 1 and Blue maximum 1 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1, Table 2, or both Tables 1 and 2. In some implementations, the red lighting channel can produce light with spectral power distribution that falls within the values between Red minimum 1 and Red maximum 1 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1, Table 2, or both Tables 1 and 2. In some implementations, the red channel can produce red light having a spectral power distribution that falls within the ranges between the Exemplary Red Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Red Channels Maximum in the wavelength ranges shown in one or more of Tables 7-9. In some implementations, the short-blue-pumped cyan can fail within the values between Short-blue-pumped cyan minimum 1 and Short-blue-pumped cyan maximum 1 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1 , Table 2, or both Tables 1 and 2. In other implementations, the short-blue-pumped cyan can fall within the values between Short-blue-pumped cyan minimum 1 and Short-blue-pumped cyan maximum 2 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1. In some implementations, the Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan lighting channel can produce light with spectral power distribution that falls within the values between Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan minimum 1 and Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan maximum 1 in the wavelength ranges shown in Table 1, Table 2, or both Tables 1 and 2. In some implementations, the yellow channel can produce yellow light having a spectral power distribution that falls within the ranges between the Exemplary Yellow Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Yellow Channels Maximum in the wavelength ranges shown in one or more of Tables 13-15. in some implementations, the violet channel can produce violet light having a spectral power distribution that falls within the ranges between the Exemplary Violet Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Violet Channels Maximum in the wavelength ranges shown in one or more of Tables 10-12. While not wishing to be bound by any particular theory, it is speculated that because the spectral power distributions for generated light with color points within the blue, long-blue- pumped cyan, short-blue-pumped cyan, yellow, and violet color ranges contains higher spectral intensity' across visible wavelengths as compared to lighting apparatuses and methods that utilize more saturated colors, this allows for improved color rendering for test colors other than R1-R8. International Patent Application No. PCT/US2018/020792, filed March 2, 2018, discloses aspects of some additional red, blue, short-pumped-blue (referred to as“green” therein), and long-pumped-blue (referred to as“cyan” therein) channel elements that may be suitable for some implementations of the present disclosure, the entirety of which is incorporated herein for all purposes.
[00143] In some implementations, the short-blue-pumped cyan channel can produce cyan light having certain spectral power distributions. Tables 3 and 4 show the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for the short-blue-pumped cyan color range and normalized to a value of 100.0, for a short-blue-pumped cyan channel that may be used in some implementations of the disclosure. The exemplary' Short-blue-pumped cyan Channel 1 has a ecx, ccy color coordinate shown in Table 5. In certain implementations, the short-blue-pumped cyan channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Table 3 or 4.
[00144] In some implementations, the long-blue-pumped cyan channel can produce cyan light having certain spectral power distributions. Tables 3 and 4 shows ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for the long-blue-pumped cyan color range and normalized to a value of 100.0, for several non- limiting embodiments of the long-blue-pumped cyan channel. The exemplary Long-blue-pumped cyan Channel 1 has a ccx, ccy color coordinate Shown in Table 5. in certain implementations, the long-blue-pumped cyan channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power m one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Table 3 and 4.
[00145] In some implementations, the red channel can produce red light having certain spectral power distributions. Tables 3-4 and 7-9 show the ratios of spectral pow¾r within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for the red color range and normalized to a value of 100.0, for red lighting channels which may be LRNE channels that may be used in some implementations of the disclosure. The exemplary Red Channel 1 has a ccx, ccy color coordinate of (0.5932, 0.3903). In certain implementations, the red channel can have a spectral pow¾r distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Tables 3-4 and 7-9 for Red Channels 1-11, Long-Red Channels A-B (for the LRNE spectrum), the
Exemplary' Long-Red Channel Average, and the Exemplary Red Channels Average.
[00146] In some implementations, the blue channel can produce blue light having certain spectral power distributions. Tables 3 and 4 show the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for the blue color range and normalized to a value of 100.0, for a blue channel that may be used in some implementations of the disclosure. Exemplary Blue Channel 1 has a ccx, ccy color coordinate of (0.2333, 0.2588). In certain implementations, the blue channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Tables 3 and 4.
[00147] In some implementations, the yellow channel can have certain spectral power distributions. Tables 13-15 show the ratios of spectral pow¾r within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected and normalized to a value of 100.0 for exemplary yellow lighting channels, Yellow Channels 1-6. Table 5 shows some aspects of the exemplary yellow lighting channels for some implementations of the disclosure in certain implementations, the yellow' channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown m one or more of Tables 13-15 for Yellow Channels 1-6 and the
Exemplary Yellow Channels Average.
[00148] In some implementations, the violet channel can have certain spectral power distributions. Tables 13-15 show the ratios of spectral power within wavelength ranges, with an arbitrary reference w¾veiength range selected and normalized to a value of 100.0 for exemplary violet lighting channels, Violet Channels 1-5. Table 5 shows some aspects of the exemplary violet lighting channels for some implementations of the disclosure. In certain implementations, the violet channel can have a spectral power distribution with spectral power in one or more of the wavelength ranges other than the reference wavelength range increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values showrn in one or more of Tables 12-15 for one or more of Violet Channels 1-6 and the Exemplary Violet Channels Average.
[00149] In some implementations, the lighting channels of the present disclosure can each product a colored light having spectral power distributions having particular characteristics. In certain implementations, the spectral power distributions of some lighting channels can have peaks, points of relatively higher intensity, and valleys, points of relatively lower intensity that fall within certain wavelength ranges and have certain relative ratios of intensity between them.
[00150] Tables 38 and 39 and FIG. 19 show some aspects of exemplary violet lighting channels for some implementations of the disclosure. In certain implementations, a Violet Peak (Vp) is present in a range of about 380 nm to about 460 nm. In further implementations, a Violet Valley (Vv) is present in a range of about 450 nm to about 510 nm. In some implementations, a Green Peak (Gp) is present in a range of about 500 nm to about 650 nm. In certain implementations, a Red Valley (Ry) is present in a range of about 650 nm to about 780 nm. Table 38 shows the relative intensities of the peaks and valleys for exemplary violet lighting channels of the disclosure, with the Vp values assigned an arbitrary value of 1.0 in the table. The wavelength at which each peak or valley is present is also shown in Table 38. Table 39 shows the relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peaks and valleys of the spectral power distributions for exemplary violet lighting channels and minimum, average, and maximum values thereof. In certain implementations, the violet channel can have a spectral power distribution with the relative intensities of Vv, Gp, and Rv increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values shown in Table 38 for one or more of Violet Channels 1-5 and the Exemplary Violet Channels Average. In some implementations, the violet channel can produce violet light having a spectral power distribution with peak and valley intensities that fail between the Exemplary Violet Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Violet Channels Maximum shown in Table 38. In further implementations, the violet channel can produce violet light having a spectral power distribution with relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peak and valley intensities that fall between the Exemplary Violet Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Violet Channels Maximum values shown in Table 39. In certain implementations, the violet channel can have a spectral power distribution with the relative ratios of intensity' between particular pairs of the peak and valley intensities increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the relative ratio values shown in Table 39 for one or more of Violet Channels 1-5 and the Exemplary Violet Channels Average.
[00151] Tables 40 and 41 and FIG. 20 show some aspects of exemplary yellow lighting channels for some implementations of the disclosure. In certain implementations, a Violet Peak (Vp) is present in a range of about 330 nm to about 430 run. In further implementations, a Violet Valley ( Vv) is present in a range of about 420 nm to about 510 nm. In some implementations, a Green Peak (Gp) is present in a range of about 500 nm to about 780 nm. Table 40 shows the relative intensities of the peaks and valleys for exemplary y ellow lighting channels of the disclosure, with the Gp values assigned an arbitrary value of 1.0 in the table. The wavelength at which each peak or valley is present is also shown in Table 40. Table 41 shows the relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peaks and valleys of the spectral power distributions for exemplary yellow lighting channels and minimum, average, and maximum values thereof in certain implementations, the yellow channel can have a spectral power distribution with the relative intensities of Vp and Vv increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values for one or more of Yellow Channels 1-6 and the Exemplary Yellow Channels Average shown in Table 40. In some implementations, the yellow channel can produce yellow light having a spectral power distribution with peak and valley intensities that fall between the Exemplary Yellow Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Yellow- Channels Maximum shown in Table 40. In further implementations, the yellow channel can produce yellow- light having a spectral pow-er distribution with relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peak and valley intensities that fall betw-een the
Exemplary Yellow Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Yellow- Channels Maximum values shown in Table 41. In certain implementations, the yellow' channel can have a spectral power distribution with the relative ratios of intensity- between particular pairs of the peak and valley intensities increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the relative ratio values for one or more of Yellow- Channels 1-6 and the Exemplary- Yellow Channels Average shown in Table 41.
[00152] Tables 42,43, and 61 -63 and FIG. 21, FIGS. 29-35 show some aspects of exemplary- red lighting channels (including both visible and non- visible LRNE) for some implementations of the disclosure. In certain implementations, a Blue Peak (Bp) is present in a range of about 380 nm to about 460 nrn. In further implementations, a Blue Valley (Bv) is present in a range of about 450 nm to about 510 nm. In some
implementations, a Red Peak (Rp) is present in a range of about 500 nm to about 780 nm. Table 42 shows the relative intensities of the peaks and valleys for exemplary red lighting channels of the disclosure, with the Rp values assigned an arbitrary value of 1.0 in the table. The wavelength at which each peak or valley is present is also shown in Table 42. Table 43 shows the relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peaks and valleys of the spectral power distributions for exemplary red lighting channels and minimum, average, and maximum values thereof. In certain implementations, the red channel can have a spectral power distribution with the relati ve intensities of Bp and Bv increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the values for one or more of Red Channels 1 , 3-6, and 9-17 and the Exemplary Red Channels Average shown in Table 42. In some implementations, the red channel can produce red light having a spectral power distribution with peak and valley intensities that fall between the Exemplar} Red
Channels Minimum and the Exemplar} 7 Red Channels Maximum shown in Table 42. In further implementations, the red channel can produce red light having a spectral power distribution with relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peak and valley intensities that fall between the Exemplary Red Channels Minimum and the Exemplary Red Channels Maximum values shown m Table 43. In certain
implementations, the red channel can have a spectral power distribution with the relative ratios of intensity between particular pairs of the peak and valley intensities increased or decreased within 30% greater or less, within 20% greater or less, within 10% greater or less, or within 5% greater or less than the relative ratio values for one or more of Red Channels 1, 3-6, and 9-17 and the Exemplary' Red Channels Average shown in Table 43. Luminescent Materials and Luminophoric Mediums
[00153] Blends of luminescent materials can be used in luminophoric mediums having the desired saturated color points when excited by their respective LED strings including luminescent materials such as those disclosed in co-pending U.S. 9,719,660 issued August 1, 2017, entitled“Compositions for LED Light Conversions”, the entirety of which is hereby incorporated by this reference as if fully set forth herein. Traditionally, a desired combined output light can be generated along a tie line between the LED string output light color point and the saturated color point of the associated recipient luminophoric medium by utilizing different ratios of total luminescent material to the encapsulant material in which it is incorporated. Increasing the amount of luminescent material m the optical path will shift the output light color point towards the saturated color point of the luminophoric medium. In some instances, the desired saturated color point of a recipient luminophoric medium can be achieved by blending two or more luminescent materials in a ratio. The appropriate ratio to achieve the desired saturated color point can be determined via methods kno wn in the art. Generally speaking, any blend of luminescent materials can be treated as if it were a single luminescent material, thus the ratio of luminescent materials in the blend can be adjusted to continue to meet a target CIE value for LED strings having different peak emission wavelengths.
Luminescent materials can be tuned for the desired excitation in response to the selected LEDs used in the LED strings, which may have different peak emission wavelengths wathin the range of from about 360 nm to about 535 nm. Suitable methods for tuning the response of luminescent materials are known in the art and may include altering the concentrations of dopants within a phosphor, for example. In some implementations of the present disclosure, luminophoric mediums can be provided with combinations of two types of luminescent materials. The first type of luminescent material emits light at a peak emission between about 515 nm and about 590 nm in response to the associated LED string emission. The second type of luminescent material emits at a peak emission between about 590 nm and about 700 nm m response to the associated LED string emission. In some instances, the luminophoric mediums disclosed herein can be formed from a combination of at least one luminescent material of the first and second types described in this paragraph. In implementati ons, the luminescent materials of the first type can emit light at a peak emission at about 515 nm, 525 nm, 530 nm, 535 nm, 540 nm, 545 nm, 550 nm, 555 nm, 560 nm, 565 nm, 570 nm, 575 nm, 580 nm, 585 nm, or 590 nm in response to the associated LED string emission. In preferred implementations, the luminescent materials of the first type can emit light at a peak emission between about 520 nm to about 555 nrn. In implementations, the luminescent materials of the second type can emit light at a peak emission at about 590 nm, about 595 nm, 600 nm, 605 nm, 61 0 nm, 615 nm, 620 nrn, 625 nm, 630 nm, 635 nm, 640 nm, 645 nm, 650 nm, 655 nm, 670 nm, 675 nm, 680 nm, 685 nrn, 690 nm, 695 nm, or 700 nm in response to the associated LED string emission. In preferred implementations, the luminescent materials of the first type can emit light at a peak emission between about 600 nm to about 670 nm. Some exemplar} luminescent materials of the first and second type are disclosed elsewhere herein and referred to as Compositions A-F. Table 6 shows aspects of some exemplar luminescent materials and properties. [00154] Blends of Compositions A-F can be used in luminophoric mediums having desired saturated color points when excited by respective LED strings in the lighting channels of the disclosure. In some implementations, one or more blends of one or more of Compositions A-F can be used to produce luminophoric mediums. In some preferred implementations, one or more of Compositions A, B, and D and one or more of Compositions C, E, and F can be combined to produce luminophoric mediums. In some preferred implementations, the encapsulant for luminophoric mediums comprises a matrix material having density of about 1.1 mg/mm3 and refractive index of about 1.545 or from about 1.4 to about 1.6. In some implementations, Composition A can have a refractive index of about 1.82 and a particle size from about 18 micrometers to about 40 micrometers. In some implementations, Composition B can have a refractive index of about 1.84 and a particle size from about 13 micrometers to about 30 micrometers. In some implementations, Composition C can have a refractive index of about 1.8 and a particle size from about 10 micrometers to about 15 micrometers. In some
implementations, Composition D can have a refractive index of about 1.8 and a particle size from about 10 micrometers to about 15 micrometers. Suitable phosphor materials for Compositions A, B, C, and D are commercially available from phosphor manufacturers such as Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Corporation (Tokyo, Japan), Intematix
Corporation (Fremont, CA), EMD Performance Materials of Merck KGaA (Darmstadt, Germany), and PhosphorTech Corporation (Kennesaw, GA).
Figure imgf000066_0001
Figure imgf000067_0002
[00155] Luminescent materials can include phosphors, scintillators, day glow tapes, nanophosphors, inks that glow in visible spectrum upon illumination with light,
Figure imgf000067_0001
Figure imgf000068_0001
n some preferred implementations, the luminescent materials may comprise
Figure imgf000069_0003
phosphors comprising one or more of the following materials: CaAlSiNiiEu,
Figure imgf000069_0004
materials may comprise phosphors comprising one or more of the following materials: C
Figure imgf000069_0002
[00156] In certain implementations, ERNE emissions can be generated with one or more luminescent materials that generate emissions with wavelengths between about 625 nm and about 1400 nm. In some implementations, the luminescent materials can comprise phosphors comprising one or more of the materials listed above. FIG. 29 shows an emission profile for an exemplary long-red phosphor, referred to herein as Long-Red Phosphor 700nm, having a peak emission wavelength of about 700 nm suitable for some implementations. In certain implementations, an exemplary long-red phosphor, referred to herein as Long -Red Phosphor 675nm, having a peak emission wavelength of about 675 nm can be used. Some aspects of the spectral powrer distributions of the emissions for Long-Red Phosphor 700nm and Long -Red Phosphor 675nm are shown in Tables 61-63.
[00157] In yet further implementations, the luminescent materials can comprise phosphors comprising one or more of the following materials excited by light at about
Figure imgf000069_0001
further implementations, the luminescent materials can comprise chemically modified versions of these phosphors having excitation bands overlapping with violet or blue LED wavelengths.
[00158] In certain implementations, the luminophoric mediums can include luminescent materials that comprise one or more quantum materials. Throughout this specification, the term“quantum material” means any luminescent material that includes: a quantum dot; a quantum wire; or a quantum well. Some quantum materials may absorb and emit light at spectral power distributions having narrow wavelength ranges, for example, wavelength ranges having spectral widths being within ranges of between about 25 nanometers and about 50 nanometers. In examples, two or more different quantum materials may be included in a lumiphor, such that each of the quantum materials may have a spectral power distribution for tight emissions that may not overlap with a spectral power distribution for light absorption of any of the one or more other quantum materials. In these examples, cross-absorption of light emissions among the quantum materials of the lumiphor may be minimized. Throughout this specification, the term“quantum dot” means: a nanocrystal made of semiconductor materials that are small enough to exhibit quantum mechanical properties, such that its excitons are confined in ail three spatial dimensions. Throughout this specification, the term“quantum wire” means: an electrically conducting wire in which quantum effects influence the transport properties. Throughout this specification, the term“quantum well” means: a thin layer that can confine (quasi-)particles (typically electrons or holes) in the dimension perpendicular to the layer surface, whereas the movement in the other dimensions is not restricted.
Circadian-Indiicmg Blue Properties
[00159] In some aspects, the bioactive circadian-inducing blue light in the display systems can have circadian-stimulating energy (CSE) characteristics that lead to biological effects in users. The circadian-inducing blue, and overall light emissions including the circadian-inducing blue, can have a first circadian-stimulating energy characteristic related to the associated first spectral power distribution of the circadian- inducing blue or overall light emissions, while light emissions from the non-circadian- inducing blue and related overall light emissions can have a second circadian-stimulating energy characteristic related to the associated second spectral power distribution of the circadian-inducing blue or overall light emissions.
[00160] In certain implementations, the first circadian-stimulating energy characteristic and the second circadian-stimulating energy characteristic can be the percentage of the spectral power in the associated first spectral pow¾r distribution and the second spectral power distribution, respectively, between a first wavelength value and a second wavelength value, forming a particular wavelength range therein greater than the first wavelength valise and less than or equal to the second wavelength value. In some instances, the first and second circadian-stimulating energy characteristics can be one or more of the percentage of spectral power in the wavelength ranges of 470 nm < l < 480 nm, 480 nm < l < 490 nm, and 490 nm < l < 500 nm in comparison to the total energy from 320 nm < l < 800 nm in the first and second spectral power distributions respectively. In some implementations, the percentage of spectral power in the wavelength ranges of 470 nm < l < 480 nm in comparison to the total energy from 320 nm <l < 800 nm of the first spectral power distribution can be between about 2.50 and about 6.00, between about 3.00 and about 5.50, between about 3.00 and about 4.00, between about 3.50 and about 4.00, about 3.0, about 3.1, about 3.2, about 3.3, about 3.4, about 3.5, about 3.6, about 3.7, about 3.8, about 3.9, about 4.0, about 4.1, about 4.2, about
4.3, about 4.4, about 4.5, about 4.6, about 4.7, about 4.8, about 4.9, about 5.0, about 5.1, about 5.2, about 5.3, about 5.4, about 5.5, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, or about 6.0. In certain implementations, the percentage of spectral power in the wavelength ranges of 480 nm < l < 490 nm in comparison to the total energy from 320 nm < l < 800 nm in the first spectral power distribution can be between about 4.0 and about 6.5, between about 4.5 and about 5.5, between about 4.4 and about 4.6, between about 5.2 and about 5.8, about 4.0, about 4.1, about 4.2, about 4.3, about 4.4, about 4.5, about 4.6, about 4.7, about 4 8, about 4.9, about 5.0, about 5.1 , about 5.2, about 5.3, about 5.4, about 5.5, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, about 6.0, about 6.1 , about 6.2, about 6.3, about
6.4, or about 6.5. In some implementations, the percentage of spectral power in the wavelength ranges of 490 nm < l < 500 nm in comparison to the total energy from 320 nrn < l < 800 nm in the first spectral power distribution can be between about 3 5 and about 6.0, between about 4.0 and about 5.0, between about 4.5 and about 5.5, between about 4.5 and about 5.0, about 3.5, about 3.6, about 3.7, about 3.8, about 3 9, about 4.0, about 4.1 , about 4.2, about 4.3, about 4.4, about 4.5, about 4.6, about 4.7, about 4.8, about 4.9, about 5.0, about 5.1, about 5.2, about 5.3, about 5.4, about 5.5, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, or about 6.0. In some implementations, the percentage of spectral pow¾r in the wavelength ranges of 470 nm < l < 480 nm in comparison to the total energy from 320 nm < l < 800 nm in the second spectral pow¾r distribution can be between about 0.025 and about 0.080, between about 0.030 and about 0.060, between about 0.050 and about 0.070, between about 0.050 and about 0.060, about 0.025, about 0.030, about 0.035, about 0.040, about 0.045, about 0.050, about 0.055, about 0.56, about 0.57, about 0.58, about 0.59, about 0.060, about 0.61, about 0.62, about 0.63, about 0.64, about 0.065, about 0.66, about 0.67, about 0.68, about 0.69, about 0.070, about 0.075, or about 0.080. In certain implementations, the percentage of spectral power in the wavelength ranges of 480 run < l < 490 run in comparison to the total energy from 320 nm < l < 800 nm in the second spectral powrer distribution can be between about 0.10 and about 0.30, between about 0.10 and about 0.15, between about 0.20 and about 0.25, between about 0.13 and about 0.24, about 0.10, about 0.11, about 0.12, about 0.13, about 0.14, about 0.15, about 0.016, about 0.17, about 0.18, about 0.19, about 0.20, about 0.21, about 0.22, about 0.23, about 0.24, about 0.25, about 0.26, about 0.27, about 0.28, about 0.29, or about 0.30. In some implementations, the percentage of spectral power in the wavelength ranges of 490 nm < l < 500 nm in comparison to the total energy from 320 nm < l < 800 nm in the second spectral power distribution can be between about 0.25 and about 0.75, between about 0.25 and about 0.40, between about 0.55 and about 0.70, between about 0.30 and about 0.35, about 0.25, about 0.26, about 0.27, about 0.28, about 0.29, about 0.30, about 0.31, about 0.32, about 0.33, about 0.34, about 0.35, about 0.36, about 0.37, about 0.38, about 0.39, about 0.40, about 0.41, about 0.42, about 0.43, about 0.44, about 0 45, about 0.46, about 0.47, about 0.48, about 0.49, about 0.50, about 0.51, about 0.52, about 0.53, about 0.54, about 0.55, about 0.56, about 0.57, about 0 58, about 0.59, about 0 60, about 0.61 , about 0.62, about 0.63, about 0.64, about 0.65, about 0.66, about 0.67, about 0.68, about 0.69, about 0.70, about 0.71, about 0.72, about 0 73, about 0.74, or about 0.75.
[00161] In further aspects of the present disclosure, the first and second circadian-stimulating energy characteristics can relate to spectral energy within particular wavelength ranges. In some implementations, spectral energy concentrations within particular wavelength ranges can lead to biological effects by providing photostimulation to intrinsically photosensitive retinal ganglion cells (ipRGCs), which express melanopsm, a photopigment that can respond to light directly , and can be associated with non-image- formmg functions such as circadian photoentrainment and pupil-size control in addition to some image-forming functions. ipRGCs are sensitive to light at wavelengths between about 400 nm and about 600 nm, with a peak sensitivity and response to light with wavelengths around 480 nm to 490 nm. In certain implementations, the first circadian- stimulating energy characteristic and the second circadian-stimulating energy
characteristic can be the percentage of the spectral power in the first spectral power distribution and the second spectral power distribution, respectively, between a first wavelength value and a second wavelength value, forming a particular wavelength range therein greater than the first wavelength value and less than or equal to the second wavelength value. In some implementations, the first wavelength value can be about 400 nm, about 410 nm, about 420 nm, about 430 nm, about 440 nm, about 450 nm, about 460 nm, about 470 nm, about 480 nm, about 490 nm, about 500 nm, about 510 nm, about 520 nm, about 530 nm, about 540 nm, about 550, about 560 nm, about 570 nm, about 580 nm, about 590 nm, or about 600 nm. In some implementations, the second wavelength value can be about 410 nm, about 420 nm, about 430 nm, about 440 nm, about 450 nm, about 460 nm, about 470 nm, about 480 nm, about 490 nm, about 500 nm, about 510 nm, about 520 nm, about 530 nm, about 540 nm, about 550, about 560 nm, about 570 nm, about 580 nm, about 590 nm, about 600 nm, or about 610 nm. In certain implementations, the first wavelength value can be 440 nm and the second wavelength value can be 490 nm, with the particular wavelength range being 440< l<490 nm, as shown for values for the exemplary first and second lighting channels shown in Table 3, which shows the percent spectral energy in the range 440<l<490 nm in comparison to the total spectral energy in the range 380<l<780 nm. In further implementations, other first and second wavelength values can be selected for the first circadian- stimulating energy characteristic and the second circadian -stimulating energy characteristic of the percentages of the spectral power m the first spectral power distribution and the second spectral power distribution between the first and second wavelength values, including but not limited to wavelength ranges (in nm) from about 400 to about 410, about 410 to about 420, about 420 to about 430, about 430 to about 440, about 440 to about 450, about 450 to about 460, about 460 to about 470, about 470 to about 480, about 480 to about 490, about 490 to about 500, about 500 to about 510, about 510 to about 520, about 520 to about 530, about 530 to about 540, about 540 to about 550, or about 550 to about 560. [00162] in certain implementations, one or more of the circadian-stimulating energy characteristics of the lighting systems can be EML values of the first, second, and third white light. In some aspects of the present disclosure, the lighting systems can provide a ratio of a first EML value of the first spectral power distribution to a second EML valise of the second spectral power distribution. In some implementations, the ratio of the first EML value to the second EML valise can be between about 2.0 and about 5.5, between about 3.0 and about 5.0, between about 2.8 and about 3.8, between about 2.6 and about 3.3, between about 4.0 and about 5.5, between about 4.5 and about 5.5, between about 5.5 and about 6.5, between about 6.5 and about 7.5, between about 7.5 and about
8.5, between about 8.5 and about 9.5, between about 2.0 and about 10.0, between about 3.0 and about 10.0, between about 4.0 and about 10.0, between about 5.0 and about 10.0, between about 6.0 and about 10.0, between about 7.0 and about 10.0, between about 8.0 and about 10.0, or between about 9.0 and about 10.0. In further implementations, the ratio of the first EML value to the second EML value can be about 2.0, about 2.1, about 2.2, about 2.3, about 2.4, about 2.5, about 2.6, about 2.7, about 2 8, about 2.9, about 3.0, about
3.1, about 3.2, about 3.3, about 3.4, about 3.5, about 3.6, about 3.7, about 3.8, about 3.9, about 4.0, about 4.1, about 4.2, about 4.3, about 4.4, about 4.5, about 4.6, about 4.7, about
4.8, about 4.9, about 5.0, about 5.1, about 5.2, about 5.3, about 5.4, about 5.5, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, about 6, about 6.1 , about 6.2, about 6.3, about 6.4, about
6.5, about 6 6, about 6.7, about 6.8, about 6 9, about 7, about 7.1 , about 7.2, about 7 3, about 7.4, about 7.5, about 7.6, about 7.7, about 7.8, about 7.9, about 8, about 8.1 , about
8.2, about 8 3, about 8.4, about 8.5, about 8.6, about 8.7, about 8.8, about 8.9, about 9, about 9.1 , about 9.2, about 9.3, about 9.4, about 9.5, about 9.6, about 9.7, about 9.8, about
9.9, or about 10.0.
[00163] In certain implementations, the first spectral power distribution has a first circadian-stimulating energy characteristic, and the second spectral power distribution has a second circadian- stimulating energy characteristic. In some
implementations, the first circadian-stimulating energy characteristic can be a first percentage, the first percentage comprising the percentage of the spectral power between 380 nm and 780 nm in the first spectral pow¾r distribution between 440 nm and 490 nm. In certain implementations, the second circadian-stimulating energy characteristic can be a second percentage, the second percentage comprising the percentage of the spectral power between 380 nm and 780 nm in the second spectral power distribution between 440 nm and 490 nm. In certain implementations of the lighting systems of the present disclosure, the first percentage can be between about 15% and about 25%, between about 16% and about 22%, about 16%, about 17%, about 18%, about 19%, about 20%, about 21%, about 22%, about 23%, about 24%, or about 25%. In further implementations of the lighting systems of the present disclosure, the second percentage can be between about 0.9% and about 1.05%, between about 0.85% and about 0.95%, between about 0.85% and about 0.90%, between about 0.90% and about 0.95%, about 0.90%, about 0.91%, about 0.92%, about 0.93%, about 0.94%, about 0.95%, about 0.96%, about 0.97%, about 0.98%, about 0.99%, about 1.00%, about 1.01%, about 1.02%, about 1.03%, about 1.04%, or about 1.05%. In some implementations, the lighting systems can have a ratio of the first percentage to the second percentage of between about 13 and about 30, between about 15 and about 25, between about 20 and about 25, between about 20 and about 30, between about 18 and about 22, about 13, about 14, about 15, about 16, about 17, about 18, about 19, about 20, about 21, about 22, about 23, about 24, about 25, about 26, about 27, about 28, about 29, or about 30.
LRNE Properties
[00164] In some aspects, the bioactive LRNE red light in the display systems can have long red near infrared energy characteristics that lead to biological effects in users. The LRNE and overall light emissions including the LRNE can have a first LRNE energy characteristic related to the associated first spectral power distribution of the long red portion of the LRNE or overall light emissions.
The LRNE and overall light emissions including the LRNE can have a second LRNE energy characteristic related to the associated second spectral power distribution of the near infrared portion of the LRNE or overall light emissions.
Types of User Interfaces and Control Systems for the Control of the Circadian Lighting [00165] Lighting systems that may he used in a bioactive computer display system in accordance with the principles of the present disclosure may he controlled over time to affect a person’s circadian cycle, and other physiological functions and/or psychological functions throughout the day m different ways. Modes include controlled application or reduction of CSE and application or reduction of LRNE. The lighting systems may be automatically or manually adj usted. The lighting systems may be adjusted based on sensor data, activity data, social media data, etc.
[00166] In embodiments, as the display systems are installed in the environment of a lighting installation, networking features automatically engage upon powering up one or more the display systems, and the display systems may automatically commission themselves, such as by connecting to an overall control platform and/or to other display systems. Thus, the display systems in an installation may self-commission and seif- configure to create a network connection between the display systems m the environment and a remote operator (such as in the cloud). The display systems may configure in a master/slave, ring, mesh, or peer-to-peer network, by which autonomous control features may be engaged in the environment. In embodiments, remote control features may be engaged using the network connection to the platform or other remote operators.
[00167] In embodiments, networked communication can be used among components in a deployed lighting installation that includes display systems. Once installed and commissioned, control of the lighting installation may be handed over to an operator of a platform, such as a building owner, occupant, landlord, tenant, or the like.
In embodiments, handoff may include using identity and authentication features, such as using keys, passwords, or the like that allow operation of the lighting installation by permitted users. In embodiments, a remote-control interface of the platform may be used by an operator for remote operation of the lighting installation. The remote-control interface may use a lighting project data structure as a source of knowledge about the properties, configurations, control capabilities, and other elements of a lighting installation, so that the same platform used for the design of the lighting installation may he used to control the lighting installation. The remote-control interface may include operational guidance features, such as guiding users through the operation of a lighting installation. [00168] in embodiments, an autonomous control system may be provided for a lighting installation that includes display systems of the present disclosure, by which the lighting installation may control various features of the lighting system, such as based on information collected locally in the environment, such as from one or more sensors. For example, the autonomous control system may automatically adjust control parameters for a tight source, including but not limited to display systems, to achieve improved adherence to the overall specifications for a lighting installation, may adjust timing variables based on detected usage patterns in a space, may adjust lighting properties based on changes in a space (such as changes in colors paints, carpet and fabrics), and the like.
[00169] Under operation, the lighting installation may include an operational feedback system, configured to collect information about the lighting installation, which may include interfaces for soliciting and receiving user feedback (such as regarding satisfaction with the installation or indicating desired changes) and which may include a lighting installation sensor system, such as including light sensors, motion sensors, temperature sensors, and others to collect information about the actual lighting conditions in the environment, activities of occupants within the environment, and the like.
Information collected by the lighting installation sensor system may be relayed to a validation system of the lighting platform, such as for validation that an installation is operating as designed, including by comparison of light properties at various locations in the environment with the specifications and requirements provided in the lighting design environment, such as reflected in the lighting project data structure. In embodiments, the variances from the specifications and requirements may be provided to the autonomous control system and/or the remote- control system, so that adjustments may be made, either autonomously or by a local or remote operator of the lighting installation, to enable adjustments (such as to colors, intensities, color temperatures, beam directions, and other factors), such as to cause the lighting installation to better meet the specifications and requirements. The operational feedback system may also capture feedback that leads to revisiting the lighting design in the lighting design environment, which may induce further iteration, resulting m changes to control parameters for the display systems, as well as automated ordering of additional or substitute display systems, with updated installation and operational guidance.
[00170] in embodiments, remote control may enable field programmable lighting systems, such as for transitional environments like museums (where art objects change regularly), stores (where merchandise shifts) and the like as well as for customizable environments (such as personalizing lighting in a hotel room according to a specification for a guest (which may include having the guest select an aesthetic filter) or personalized lighting for a workstation for an employee in an office setting. Such features may enable the lighting installation to change configurations (such as among different aesthetic filters) for multi-use environments, multi-tenant environments, and the like where lighting conditions may need to change substantially over time.
[00171] In embodiments, a lighting system may include navigation features, such as being associated with beacons, where the lighting system interacts with one or more devices to track users within a space. The display systems and their locations may be associated with a map, such as the map of the lighting space in the design
environment. The map may be provided from the lighting design environment to one or more other location or navigation systems, such that locations of display systems may be used as known locations or points of interest within a space.
[00172] In embodiments, the lighting installation may be designed for an operation that is coordinated with one or more external systems, which may serve as inputs to the lighting installation, such as music, video and other entertainment content (such as to coordinate lighting with sound). Inputs may include voice control inputs, which may include systems for assessing tone or mood from vocal patterns, such as to adjust lighting based on the same.
[00173] In embodiments, inputs may also include inputs from wearable devices, such as enabling adjustment of lighting control parameters (autonomously or with remote or local control features) based on physiological factors, such as ones indicating health conditions, emotional states, moods, or the like. Inputs from wearable devices may be used in the operational feedback system, such as to measure reactions to lighting conditions (such as to enable automated adjustment of a lighting installation), as well as to measure impacts on mood, health conditions, energy, wellness factors, and the like. [00174] in embodiments, the platform may be configured to change settings or parameters for a lighting installation (including but not limited to display systems of the present disclosure, such as by using a custom tuning system) based on a variety of real time data, with a view to having the lighting installation, including display systems included therein, best suit its environment m a dynamic way. In embodiments, data may¬ be obtained that serves as an indicator of the emotional state or the stress level of an environment, and the lighting installation may respond accordingly to that state or stress level. In embodiments, data about the environment may be collected by a wearable device, such as a smartwatch, armband, or the like; for example, data may be collected on acceleration, location, ambient light characteristics, and heart rate, among other possibilities. In embodiments, the data may be provided to the platform for analysis, including using machine learning, such as to observe physiological indicators of stress, mood, or the like under given lighting conditions. The analysis may enable model-based controls (such as where a given mood or state of the users in a room are linked to a set of control parameters appropriate for that state). In embodiments, machine learning may be used; for example, over time, by variation of parameters for lighting objects and fixtures (such as color, color temperature, illumination patterns, lighting distributions, and many others), a machine learning system may, using feedback on outcomes based at least in part on physiological data and other data collected by a wearable device, select and/or promotion lighting installation parameters that improve various measures of stress, mood, satisfaction, or the like. This may occur in real time under control of a machine learning system based on the current conditions of users or the environment. In embodiments, data collected at least in part by a physiological monitor or wearable device may be used as an input to processing logic on a lighting object that changes lighting levels or other parameters to accommodate the‘emotional state' of the users in an environment where the lighting object is located. In embodiments, there is memory that retains and manages function with no appreciable dram on the battery.
[00175] In embodiments, inputs may include sy stems that take data harvested from sensors in the lighting installation environment as well as sensors that reflect information about users, such as one or more of physiological sensors (including wearable devices, such as armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, clothing, and the like), sensors on various devices used by a user, ambient sensors, and the like. These may include sensing one or more of temperature, pressure, ambient lighting conditions, localized lighting conditions, lighting spectrum characteristics, humidity, UV light, sound, particles, pollutants, gases (e.g., oxygen, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and radon), radiation, location of objects or items, motion (e.g., speed, direction and/or acceleration). Where one or more wearable or physiological sensors are used, they may sense one or more of a person' s temperature, blood pressure, heart rate, oxygen saturation, activity type, activity level, galvanic skin response, respiratory rate, cholesterol level (including HDL, LDL and triglyceride), hormone or adrenal levels (e.g., Cortisol, thyroid, adrenaline, melatonin, and others), histamine levels, immune system characteristics, blood alcohol levels, drug content, macro and micro nutrients, mood, emotional state, alertness, sleepiness, and the like.
[00176] In embodiments, the platform may connect to or integrate with data sources of information about users, such as including social networks (Facebook™, Linkedln™, Twitter™, and the like, sources of medical records (23&Me™ and the like), productivity, collaboration and/or calendaring software (Google™, Outlook™, scheduling apps and the like), information about web browsing and/or shopping activity, activity on media streaming services (Netflix™, Spotify™, YouTube™, Pandora™ and the like), health record information and other sources of insight about the preferences or characteristics of users of the space of a lighting installation, including psychographic, demographic and other characteristics.
[00177] In embodiments, the platform may use information from sources that indicate patterns, such as patterns involving periods of time (daily patterns, weekly patterns, seasonal patterns, and the like), paterns involving cultural factors or norms (such as indicating usage patterns or preferences in different regions), patterns relating to personality and preferences, paterns relating to social groups (such as family and work group patterns), and the like in embodiments, the platform may make use of the data harvested from various sources noted above to make recommendations and/or to optimize (such as automatically, under computer control) the design, ordering, fulfillment, deployment and/or operation of a lighting installation, such as based on understanding or prediction of user behavior. This may include recommendation or optimization relating to achieving optimal sleep time and duration, setting optimal mealtimes, satisfying natural light exposure requirements during the day, and maintaining tolerable artificial light exposure levels (such as during night time) in embodiments, the platform may anticipate user needs and optimize the lighting installation to enhance productivity, alertness, emotional well-being, satisfaction, safety and/or sleep. In further embodiments, the platform may control one or more display systems of the present disclosure in accordance with the user needs of the environment based on this information.
[00178] In embodiments, the platform may store a space utilization data structure that indicates, over time, how people use the space of the lighting installation, such as indicating what hallways are more trafficked, and the like. This may inform understanding of a space, such as indicating what is an entry, what is a passage, what is a workspace, and the like, winch may be used to suggest changes or updates to a lighting design. In embodiments, sensors may be used to collect and read where people have been in the space, such as using one or more video cameras, IR sensors, microwave sensors. LIDAR, ultrasound or the like. In embodiments, the platform may collect and read what adjustments people have made, such as task lamp activation and other activities that indicate how a lighting fixture is used by an individual in a space. By way of these examples, aggregate usage information may be used to optimize a lighting design and adjust other lighting designs. Based on these factors, a space may be dynamically adjusted, and the lighting model for an installation may be updated to reflect the actual installation.
[00179] In embodiments, control capabilities of the display systems may include dynamic configuration of control parameters, such as providing a dimming curve for a light source, including but not limited to a display system of the present disclosure, that is customized to the preferences of a designer or other user. This may include a selection from one or more modes, such as ones described elsewhere herein that have desired effects on mood or aesthetic factors, that have desired health effects, that meet the functional requirements, or the like.
[00180] In order to truly achieve circadian action, prolonged exposure may be required, however, a melanopic flux may, m many embodiments, need to be at least 10: 1 and in further embodiments, may need to be 20: 1 , 50: 1, 100: 1, or a greater ratio. It will be appreciated m light of the disclosure that most conventional systems simply adjust from a warm CCT to a cool CCT, which may only provide a 2: 1 or 3: 1 ratio of melanopic flux, which may not be enough to provide health benefits. In embodiments, the platform may include spectral tuning targets for display systems of the present disclosure that may optimize this ratio based on local installation environments. These targets, along with adjustments intensity of light fe.g., 4: 1) may provide a higher ratio, such as a 10: 1 ratio or greater, and thus provide greater melanopic flux ratios.
[00181] In a second mode and either in combination with the above mode or not, the platform may support an ability to shift the bias of light in a room. In
embodiments, controlled variation of one or more display systems of the present disclosure in a lighting environment can contribute to generating a lighting bias typical of being outside.
[00182] In embodiments, various other programmable modes may be provided, such as display system settings where using different combinations of color light sources to achieve a given mixed color output may be optimized for efficacy, efficiency, color quality, health impact (e.g., circadian action), or to satisfy other requirements. In embodiments, the programmable modes may also include programmable dimming curves, color tuning curves, and the like (such as allowing various control interfaces, such as extra-low voltage (ELY) controllers or voltage-based dimmers to affect fixture colors, such as where a custom tuning curve provides a start point, an end point and a dimming and/or color tuning path in response to a level of dimming). In embodiments,
programmable modes may use conventional tuning mechanisms, such as simple interpolation systems (which typically use two or three white color LEDs) are dimmable on a zero to ten-volt analog system, and have a second voltage-based input for adjusting the CCT of a fixture between warm and cool CCTs The display systems as described herein can provide for tunable ranges of color points at various x, y coordinates on the 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram. Because of the wide range of potential white or non white colors produced by the display systems, they may be controlled by the platform that may specify a particular x, y coordinate on the CIE diagram. Lighting control protocols like DMX™ and Dali 2.0™ may achieve this result. [00183] in embodiments, a programmable color curve for an LED driver may be input, such as through an interface of the platform, or through a desktop software interface, a mobile phone, a tablet app, or the like, that enables a user to define a start and stop point to a color tuning curve and to specify how it will be controlled by a secondary- input, such as a voltage-based input (e.g., a 0 to 10-volt input) to the fixture. These may include pre-defmed curves, as well as the ability to set start, end, and waypoints to define custom curves. For example, an exemplary color curve can have a starting point around 8000K biased above the black body curve, with the color curve crossing the black body around 2700K, and finishing around 1800K below the black body curve. Similarly, another exemplary curve could be programmed such that the start was 4000K well above the black body, with the end being 4000K well below the black body. By way of these examples, any adjustment would be in hue only, not CCT. Further examples may include a curve that never produces a white color, such as starting in the purple and finishing in orange. In any of these cases, these curves may be programmed into display systems via the interface of the platform, the desktop, mobile phone or tablet. In embodiments, the curves may be designed, saved, and then activated, such as using the secondary
(supplemental) 0 to 10- volt input.
[00184] In embodiments, a three-channel warm dim mode may be used, such as that described more fully in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/712,182 filed July 30, 2018, which is incorporated herein in its entirety for all purposes, for target applications where the“fully on” CCT falls between 3000K and 2500K By way of these examples, as the fixture dims (via ELV control or in response to the 0 to 10-volt input) the CCT may be gradually decreased to between 2500K and 1 800K. In certain embodiments, the hue adjustment may all occur below the black body curve. Alternative embodiments may use a cyan channel as described elsewhere herein, either long-blue- pumped cyan or short-blue-pumped cyan, and a red channel as described elsewhere herein, plus a 4000K white channel as described elsewhere herein to achieve a warm dimming mode that allows for adjustment both above and below the black body curve. In some embodiments of the three-channel warm dim mode, the white channel can have a color point within a 7-step MacAdam ellipse around any point on the black body locus having a correlated color temperature between about 3500K and about 6500K. [00185] in certain embodiments, the display systems of the present disclosure can include a 4-channel color system as described elsewhere herein and in U.S.
Provisional Patent Application No. 62/757,672 filed November 8, 2018, and U.S.
Provisional Application No. 62/712,191 filed July 30, 2018, the contents of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety as if fully set forth herein, includes 3000K to 1800K CCT white color points within its range, a programmable mode may be included within the driver that adjusts color with the dimming percentage as well. In some aspects, this may be similar to a conventional control mode, except that the color control would not be on the secondary 0 to 10-volt channel, but may be activated through the primary 0 to 10-volt input channel or ELY controller. In embodiments, the“starting” color point may be the one when the fixture was“fully on.” In embodiments, the “ending” color point may be the one where the fixture is maximally dimmed. It is thus possible to make full range color change, such as purple to orange, which is slaved to the 0 to 10-volt or ELY dimming signal.
[00186] In embodiments, an optimized mode may be provided. With a 4- channel color system, there are many ways to create a single x-y point on the CIE diagram. In embodiments, the maximally efficient mode may typically be one that uses the colors that have x, y coordinates closest to the target x, y coordinate. But for best color quality', utilizing a fourth channel (and thereby requiring more light from the color in the opposite“comer”) may help provide a desired spectral power distribution. For the maximum melatonin suppression (for systems hoping to mimic circadian lighting), a higher cyan channel content may be required for CCTs of 3500K and above and minimizing cyan and blue content below 3500K It will be appreciated in light of the disclosure that conventional systems either require expert users to understand the color balances necessary to achieve these effects (who then implement the color balances channel-by-channel) or are designed for maximum efficiency with color quality as a byproduct.
[00187] In embodiments, a digital power system is provided herein (including firmware-driven powar conversion and LED current control) that controls a multichannel color system, such as a 4-channel color sy stem, and allows for the inclusion of“modes” which may calculate the correct color balance between the various channels to provide optimized outputs. In embodiments, optimization may occur around one or more of efficacy, color quality, circadian effects, and other factors. Other modes are possible, such as optimizing for contrast, particular display requirements. It will be appreciated in light of the disclosure that this is not an exhaustive list but is representative of potential modes that could be engaged through an interface of the platform (or of a mobile, tablet or desktop application) where a color tuning curve may be specified, such that the curve is used to specify an interface between a controller and the Digital PSU in a display- system. In embodiments, these modes may account for actual measured colors for each display system and calculate the correct balance of for the chosen modes, such as based on algorithms loaded into the Digital PSU microprocessor.
[00188] In embodiments, machine learning may be used, such as based on various feedback measures, such as relating to mood (stated by the user or measured by one or more sensors), noise levels (such as indicating successful utilization of a space based on a desired level of noise), returns on investment (such as where display systems are intended to promote retail merchandise), reported pain levels, measured health levels, performance levels of users (including fitness, wellness, and educational performance, among others), sleep levels, vitamin D levels, melatonin levels, and many others. In embodiments, the lighting installations including the display systems may be operated or controlled based on external information, such as based on seasonal lighting conditions, weather, climate, collective mood indicators (such as based on stock market data, news feeds, or sentiment indices), analyses of social network data, and the like. This may include controlling a system to reflect, or influence, the mood of occupants.
General Simulation Method for Examples 1-13, 13A-13N and 35,
[00189] Display systems having three, four, five, and six LED-string-driven lighting channels with particular color points were simulated. For each device, LED strings and recipient luminophoric mediums with particular emissions were selected, and then white light rendering capabilities were calculated for a select number of
representative points on or near the Planckian locus between about 1800K and 10000K. Ra, R9, R13, R15, LER, Rf, Rg, CLA, CS, EML, BLH factor, CAF, CER, COI, and circadian performance values were calculated at each representative point. [00190] The calculations were performed with Scilab (Scilah Enterprises, Versailles, France), LightToo!s (Synopsis, Inc , Mountain View, CA), and custom software created using Python (Python Software Foundation, Beaverton, OR). Each LED string was simulated with an LED emission spectrum and excitation and emission spectra of luminophoric medium(s). For luminophonc mediums comprising phosphors, the simulations also included the absorption spectrum and particle size of phosphor particles. The LED strings generating combined emissions within blue, short-blue-pumped cyan, and red color regions were prepared using spectra of a LUXEON Z Color Line royal blue LEDs (product code LXZ1-PR01) of color bin codes 3, 4, 5, or 6, one or more LUXEON Z Color Line blue LEDs (LXZ1-PB01) of color bin code 1 or 2, or one or more
LUXEON royal blue LEDs (product code LXML-PR01 and LXML-PR02) of color bins
3, 4, 5, or 6 (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands). The LED strings generating combined emissions with color points within the long-blue-pumped cyan regions were prepared using spectra of LUXEON Rebel Blue LEDs (LXML-PB01, LXML-PB02) of color bins 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, which have peak wavelengths ranging from 460 nm to 485 nm, or LUXEON Rebel Cyan LEDs (LXML-PE01) of color bins 1, 2, 3,
4, or 5, which have peak wavelengths raving from 460 nm to 485 nm. Similar LEDs from other manufacturers such as OSRAM GmbH and Cree, Inc. could also be used. The LED strings generating combined emissions with color points within the yellow and violet regions were simulated using spectra of LEDs having peak wavelengths of between about 380 nm and about 420 nm, such as one or more 410 nm peak wavelength violet LEDs, one or more LUXEON Z UV LEDs (product codes LHUV-0380-, LHUV-0385-, LHUV- 0390-, LHUV-0395-, LHUV-0400-, LHUV-0405-, LHUV-0410-, LHUV-0415-, LHUV- 0420-,) (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), one or more LUXEON UV EC LEDs (product codes LxF3-U4l O) (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam,
Netherlands), one or more LUXEON UV U LEDs (product code LHUV-0415-)
(Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), for example.
[00191] The emission, excitation and absorption curves are available from commercially available phosphor manufacturers such as Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Corporation (Tokyo, Japan), Intematix Corporation (Fremont, CA), ENID Performance Materials of Merck KGaA (Darmstadt, Germany), and PhosphorTech Corporation (Kennesaw, GA). The luminophoric mediums used in the LED strings were combinations of one or more of Compositions A, B, and D and one or more of Compositions C, E, and F as described more fully elsewhere herein. Those of skill in the art appreciate that various combinations of LEDs and luminescent blends can be combined to generate combined emissions with desired color points on the 1931 C1E chromaticity diagram and the desired spectral power distributions.
[00192] in any of the below examples the red channel may be deployed as one or more LRNE channels only or a red channel with at least one LRNE channel. The LRNE can be used m a method, device or system m conjunction with blue light providing CSE or any blue channel providing or the LRNE may be used independently of CSE or lots of blue.
[00193] A display system was simulated having four LED strings. A first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and
characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. A second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of Red Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5 and 7-9. A third LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a short-blue-pumped cyan color channel having the color point and characteristics of Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. A fourth LED string is driven by a cyan LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 505 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a long-blue-pumped cyan channel having the color point and characteristics of Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1 as described abo ve and shown m Tables 3-5. [00194] Tables 16-19 shows light- rendering characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus. Table 18 shows data for white light color points generated using only the first, second, and third LED strings in high-CRl mode. Table 16 shows data for white light color points generated using all four LED strings in highest-CRI mode. Table 17 shows data for white light color points generated using only the first, second, and fourth LED strings in high- EML mode. Table 19 show performance comparison between white light color points generated at similar approximate CCT values under high-EML mode and high-CRI mode.
[00195] Further simulations were performed to optimize the outputs of the display system of Example 1. Signal strength ratios for the channels were calculated to generate 100 lumen total flux output white light at each CCT point. The relative lumen outputs for each of the channels is shown, along with the light-rendering characteristics, in Tables 20-22.
[00196] A display system was simulated having four LED strings. A first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. A second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of Red Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5 and 7-9. A fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 380 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow' color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15. A sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 380 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 10-12.
[00197] Tables 23-24 shows light- rendering characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus. Table 23 shows data for white light color points generated using the first, second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the blue, red, yellow, and violet channels, in low-EML mode. Table 24 shows data for white light color points generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-low-EML mode.
EXAMPLE 4
[00198] A display system was simulated having four LED strings. A first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. A second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of Red Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5 and 7-9. A fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 400 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 2 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15. A sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 400 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 2 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 10-12.
[00199] Tables 25-26 shows light- rendering characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus. Table 25 shows data for white light color points generated using the first, second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the blue, red, yellow, and violet channels, in low-EML mode. Table 26 shows data for white light color points generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-low-EML mode. [00200] A display system was simulated having four LED strings. A first LED siring is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. A second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of Red Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5 and 7-9. A fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 410 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 3 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15. A sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 410 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 3 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 10-12.
[00201] Tables 27-28 shows light- rendering characteri stics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus. Table 27 shows data for white light color points generated using the first, second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the blue, red, yellow, and violet channels, in low-EML mode. Table 28 shows data for white light color points generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-low-EML mode.
EXAMPLE 6
[00202] A display system was simulated having four LED strings. A first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. A second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of Red Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5 and 7-9. A fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 420 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow' color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow' Channel 4 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15. A sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 420 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 4 as described above and shown m Tables 5 and 10-12.
[00203] Table 29 shows light-rendering characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus. Table 29 shows data for white light color points generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the red, yellow', and violet channels, m very-low-EML mode.
EXAMPLE 7
[00204] A display system was simulated having six lighting channels. The six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 1 and Example 3: Blue Channel 1, Red Channel 1, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Yellow Chanel 1, and Violet Channel 1 As shown above with reference to Examples 1 and 3, the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels. Tables 30-31 show EML and CS values at various nominal CCT values under different operating modes and the % changes that can be achieved by switching between operating modes at the same nominal CCT.
[00205] A display system was simulated having six lighting channels. The six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 1 and Example 4: Blue Channel 1 , Red Channel 1 , Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Yellow Chanel 2, and Violet Channel 2. As shown above with reference to Examples 1 and 4, the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels. Tables 32-33 show EML and CS values at various nominal CCT values under different operating modes and the % changes that can be achieved by switching between operating modes at the same nominal CCT. EXAMPLE 9
[00206] A display system was simulated having six lighting channels. The six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 1 and Example 5: Blue Channel 1, Red Channel 1, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan Channel l , Yellow' Chanel 3, and Violet Channel 3. As shown above with reference to Examples 1 and 5, the device can he operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels. Tables 34-35 show EML and CS values at various nominal CCT values under different operating modes and the % changes that can be achieved by switching between operating modes at the same nominal CCT.
EXAMPLE 10
[00207] A display system was simulated having six lighting channels. The six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 1 and Example 6: Blue Channel 1, Red Channel 1, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Yellow Chanel 4, and Violet Channel 4. As shown above with reference to Examples 1 and 6, the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels. Tables 36-37 show EML and CS values at various nominal CCT values under different operating modes and the % changes that can be achieved by switching between operating modes at the same nominal CCT.
EXAMPLE 11
[00208] In some implementations, the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise three lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain implementations, the three lighting channels comprise a red lighting channel, a yellow lighting channel, and a violet lighting channel. The display systems can be operated m a very-low-EML operating mode in which the red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used. The display systems can further comprise a control system configured to control the relative intensities of light generated in the red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel in order to generate white light at a plurality of points near the Planckian locus between about 4000K and about 1400K CCT.
EXAMPLE 12 [00209] In some implementations, the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise four lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain
implementations, the four lighting channels comprise a red lighting channel, a y ellow lighting channel, a violet lighting channel, and a blue lighting channel. In some implementations, the display systems can be operated in a very-low-EML operating mode in which the red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used. In further implementations, the display systems can be operated in a low-EML operating mode in which the blue lighting channel, the red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used. In certain implementations, the display systems can transition between the low-EML and the very- low-EML operating modes m one or both directions while the display systems are providing white light along a path of color points near the Planckian locus. In further implementations, the display systems can transition between the low-EML and very-low- EML operating modes in one or both directions while the display systems are changing the CCT of the white light along the path of color points near the Planckian locus. In some implementations the low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 10000K and about 1800K. In further implementations the very-low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 4000K and about 1400K.
[00210] In some implementations, the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise five lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain
implementations, the five lighting channels comprise a red lighting channel, a yellow lighting channel, a violet lighting channel, a blue lighting channel, and a long-blue- pumped cyan lighting channel. In some implementations, the display systems can be operated in a very-low-EML operating mode in which the red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used. In further
implementations, the display systems can be operated in a Jow-EML operating mode in which the blue lighting channel, the red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used. In vet further implementations, the display systems can be operated in a high-EML operating mode in which the blue lighting channel, the red lighting channel, and the long-blue-pumped cyan lighting channel are used in certain implementations, the display systems can transition among two or more of the low-EML, the very-low-EML, and high-EML operating modes while the display systems are providing white light along a path of color points near the Planckian locus. In further implementations, the display systems can transition among two or more of the low-EML, the very-low-EML, and high-EML operating modes while the display systems are changing the CCT of the white light along the path of color points near the Planckian locus. In some implementations the low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 10000K and about 1800K. In further implementations the very-low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 4000K and about 1400K. In yet further implementations, the high-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about I00QQK and about 1800K.
EXAMPLE 13A
[00211] A semiconductor light emitting device was simulated having three LED strings. A first LED string is a commercially available 6500K white LED having a spectral power distribution as shown in FIG. 32. A second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 rim to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a LRNE channel having the characteristics of Long-Red (LRNE) Channel A as shown in Tables 7-9. The spectral power distribution for Long-Red Channel A is shown in FIG. 34. Three phosphor materials can be provided in the luminophoric medium for the second LED string, and in some implementations the phosphor materials can include a YAG phosphor, a red phosphor with emission peak at about 630 nm, and a red phosphor with an emission peak at about 700 nm A third LED string is a commercially available“lime” LED having a spectral power distribution as shown in FIG. 33. Table 64 shows light rendering characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus.
EXAMPLE 13B [00212] A semiconductor light emitting device was simulated having three LED strings. A first LED string is a commercially available 6500K white LED having a spectral power distribution as shown in FIG. 32. A second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient lummophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a long-red (LRNE) channel having the characteristics of Long-Red Channel B as shown in Tables 7-9. The spectral power distribution for Long-Red Channel B is shown in FIG. 35. Three phosphor materials can be provided m the luminophoric medium for the second LED string, and in some implementations the phosphor materials can include a YAG phosphor, a red phosphor with emission peak at about 630 nm, and a red phosphor with an emission peak at about 750 nm. A third LED string is a commercially available“lime” LED having a spectral power distribution as shown in FIG. 33.
[00213] Table 65 show¾ light-rendering characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus
EXAMPLE 13C
[00214] A display system was simulated having four LED strings. A first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. A second LED string generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of Long- Red Channel A, Red Channel B, or Exemplary Long-Red Channel Average as described above and shown in Tables 7-9. A third LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a short-blue- pumped cyan color channel having the color point and characteristics of Short-Blue- Pumped Cyan Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. A fourth LED string is driven by a cyan LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 505 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a long-blue-pumped cyan channel having the color point and characteristics of Long-Blue- Pumped Cyan Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. [00215] White light color points can generate using only the first, second, and third LED strings in a high-CRI mode. White light color points can be generated using all four LED strings in a highest-CRI mode. \¥hite light color points can be generated using only the first, second, and fourth LED strings m a high-EML mode.
EXAMPLE 13D
[00216] A display system was simulated having four LED strings. A first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophorie medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. A second LED string generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of LRNE in Long-Red Channel A, Red Channel B, or Exemplary Long-Red Channel Average as described above and shown in Tables 7-9. A fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 380 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophorie medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15. A sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 380 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophorie medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 10-12.
[00217] White light color points can be generated using the first, second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the blue, long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in low-EML mode. White light color points can be generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-iow-EML. mode.
Figure imgf000096_0001
[00218] A display system was simulated having four LED strings. A first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophorie medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. A second LED string generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of LRNE / Long-Red Channel A, Red Channel B, or Exemplary Long-Red Channel A verage as described above and shown in Tables 7-9. A fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 400 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow' color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 2 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15. A sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission w'aveiength of about 400 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 2 as described above and shown m Tables 5 and 10-12.
[00219] White light color points can be generated using the first, second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the blue, long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in low-EML mode. White light color points can be generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-low-EML mode.
[00220] A display system was simulated having four LED strings. A first LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. A second LED string generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of LRNE described in Long-Red Channel A, Red Channel B, or Exemplary Long-Red Channel Average as described above and shown in Tables 7-9. A fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 410 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 3 as described above and shown m Tables 5 and 13-15. A sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 410 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and
characteristics of Violet Channel 3 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 10-12. [00221] White light color points can be generated using the first, second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the blue, long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in low-EML mode. White light color points can be generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-low-EML mode.
Figure imgf000098_0001
[00222] A display system was simulated having four LED strings. A first LED siring is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a blue channel having the color point and characteristics of Blue Channel 1 as described above and shown in Tables 3-5. A second LED string generates a combined emission of a red channel having the color point and characteristics of ERNE in Long-Red Channel A, Red Channel B, or Exemplary Long-Red Channel Average as described above and shown in Tables 7-9. A fifth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 420 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a yellow color channel having the color point and characteristics of Yellow Channel 4 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 13-15. A sixth LED string is driven by a violet LED having peak emission wavelength of about 420 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a violet channel having the color point and characteristics of Violet Channel 4 as described above and shown in Tables 5 and 10-12.
[00223] White light color points can be generated using the second, fifth, and sixth LED strings, i.e. the long-red, yellow, and violet channels, in very-low-EML mode.
EXAMPLE 13H
[00224] A display system was simulated having six lighting channels. The six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 13C and
Example 13E: Blue Channel 1 , a long-red channel, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Yellow' Chanel 1, and Violet Channel 1. As shown above with reference to Examples 13C and 13E, the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels.
EXAMPLE 131 [00225] A display system was simulated having six lighting channels. The six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 13C and Example 13F: Blue Channel 1, a long-red channel, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1 , Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Yellow Chanel 2, and Violet Channel 2. As shown above with reference to Examples 13C and 13F, the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels.
EXAMPLE 13J
[00226] A display system was simulated having six lighting channels. The six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 13C and Example 13G: Blue Channel 1, a long-red channel, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1, Yellow Chanel 3, and Violet Channel 3. As shown above with reference to Examples 13C and 13G, the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels.
EXAMPLE 13K
[00227] A display system was simulated having six lighting channels. The six lighting channels are a combination of the lighting channels of Example 13C and Example 13H: Blue Channel 1 , a long-red channel, Short-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1 , Long-Blue-Pumped Cyan Channel 1 , Yellow Chanel 4, and Violet Channel 4. As shown above with reference to Examples 13C and 13H, the device can be operated in various operating modes with different combinations of lighting channels.
EXAMPLE 13L
[QQ228] In some implementations, the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise three lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain implementations, the three lighting channels comprise a long-red lighting channel, a yellow lighting channel, and a violet lighting channel. The display systems can be operated in a very-low-EML operating mode in which the long-red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used. The display systems can further comprise a control sy stem configured to control the relative intensities of light generated in the long-red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel in order to generate white light at a plurality of points near the PJanckian locus between about 4000K and about 140QK CCT. EXAMPLE 13M
[00229] In some implementations, the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise four lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain
implementations, the four lighting channels comprise a long-red lighting channel, a yellow lighting channel, a violet lighting channel, and a blue lighting channel. In some implementations, the display systems can be operated m a very-low-EML operating mode in which the long-red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used. In further implementations, the display systems can be operated in a low-EML operating mode in which the blue lighting channel, the long-red lighting channel, the yellowr lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used. In certain implementations, the display systems can transition between the low-EML and the very-low-EML operating modes in one or both directions while the display systems are providing white light along a path of color points near the Planckian locus. In further implementations, the display systems can transition between the low-EML and very-low- EML operating modes in one or both directions while the display systems are changing the CCT of the white light along the path of color points near the Planckian locus. In some implementations the low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 10000K and about 1800K In further implementations the very-low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 4000K and about 1400K.
[00230] In some implementations, the display systems of the present disclosure can comprise five lighting channels as described elsewhere herein. In certain
implementations, the five lighting channels comprise a long-red lighting channel, a yellow lighting channel, a violet lighting channel, a blue lighting channel, and a long- blue-pumped cyan lighting channel. In some implementations, the display systems can be operated m a very-low-EML operating mode in winch the long-red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used. In further
implementations, the display systems can be operated in a low-EML operating mode in which the blue lighting channel, the long-red lighting channel, the yellow lighting channel, and the violet lighting channel are used. In yet further implementations, the display systems can be operated in a high-EML operating mode in which the blue lighting channel, the long-red lighting channel, and the long-blue-pumped cyan lighting channel are used. In certain implementations, the display systems can transition among two or more of the low-EML, the very-low-EML, and high-EML operating modes while the display systems are providing white light along a path of color points near the Planckian locus. In further implementations, the display systems can transition among two or more of the low-EML, the very-low-EML, and high-EML operating modes while the display systems are changing the CCT of the white light along the path of color points near the Planckian locus. In some implementations the low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 10000K and about 1800K. In further implementations the very-low-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 4000K and about 1400K. In yet further implementations, the high-EML operating mode can be used in generating white light near the Planckian locus with CCT values between about 10000K and about 1 BOOK
General Simulation Method for Examples 14-34,
[00231] Exemplary first and second lighting channels, and lighting systems having pairs of first and second lighting channels, were simulated. The simulated lighting systems can be used to provide one or more white light sources for a backlighting system in the display systems of the present disclosure. For each lighting channel, LED strings and recipient lummophonc mediums with particular emissions were selected, and then spectral power distributions and various light rendering characteristics and circadian- stimulating energy characteristics were calculated. Ra, R9, R13, R15, LER, Rf, Rg, CLA, CS, EML, BLH factor, CAF, CER, COI, GAI, GAI15, GAIBB, and circadian-stimulating energy characteristics were calculated at each representative point. Characteristics and aspects of the spectral power distributions are shown in Tables 3-12 and FIGs 9-16.
[00232] The calculations were performed with Scilab (Scilah Enterprises, Versailles, France), LightToo!s (Synopsis, Inc., Mountain View, CA), and custom software created using Python (Python Software Foundation, Beaverton, OR). Each lighting channel was simulated with an LED emission spectrum and excitation and emission spectra of luminophoric medium(s). The lummophonc mediums can comprise luminescent compositions of phosphors, quantum dots, or combinations thereof, with simulations performed based on absorption/emission spectrums and particle sizes. The exemplary first lighting channels were simulated using spectra of LEDs having peak wavelengths of between about 440 nm and about 510 nm, such as a 450 nm peak wavelength blue LED, one or more LUXEON Z Color Line royal blue LEDs (product code LXZ1-PR01) of color bin codes 3, 4, 5, or 6 (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), one or more LUXEON Z Color Line blue LEDs (LXZ1-PB01) of color bin code 1 or 2 (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), one or more LUXEON royal blue LEDs (product code LXML-PROl and LXML-PR02) of color bins 3, 4, 5, or 6 (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), one or more LUXEON Rebel Blue LEDs (LXML-PB01, LXML-PB02) of color bins 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), or one or more LUXEON Rebel Cyan LEDs (LXML-PEOl) of color bins 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), for example. The exemplary second lighting channels were simulated using spectra of LEDs having peak wavelengths of between about 380 nm and about 420 nm, such as one or more 410 nm peak wavelength violet LEDs, one or more LUXEON Z UV LEDs (product codes LHUV-0380-, LHUV-0385-, LHUV-0390-, LHUV-0395-, LHUV-0400-, LHUV- 0405-, LHUV-0410-, LHUV-0415-, LHUV-0420-,) (Lumileds Holding B.V.,
Amsterdam, Netherlands), one or more LUXEON UV FC LEDs (product codes LxF3- U410) (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), one or more LUXEON UV U LEDs (product code LHUV-0415-) (Lumileds Holding B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands), for example. Similar LEDs from other manufacturers such as OSRAM GmbH and Cree, Inc. that provide a saturated output at the desired peak wavelengths could also be used.
[00233] The emission, excitation and absorption curves for phosphors and quantum dots are available from commercial manufacturers such as Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Corporation (Tokyo, Japan), Intematix Corporation (Fremont, CA), EMD Performance Materials of Merck KGaA (Darmstadt, Germany), and PhosphorTech Corporation (Kennesaw, GA). The luminophoric mediums used m the first and second lighting channels were simulated as combinations of one or more of luminescent compositions as described more fully elsewhere herein. Those of skill in the art appreciate that various combinations of LEDs and luminescent blends can he combined to generate combined emissions with desired color points on the 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram and the desired spectral power distributions.
EXAMPLE 14
[00234] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 8. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown m Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak -wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 15
[00235] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch2” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 9, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 8. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for tins pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
[00236] A lighting system was Simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch3” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 10, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“24QQK Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 8. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 17
[QQ237] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch4” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 5, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 8. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 18
[00238] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“5000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 12, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51 , 53, and 56 and in FIG. 8. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 19 [00239] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch2” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 7. The valises for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown m Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 20
[00240] A lighting system w¾s simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch2” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 9, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch2” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 7. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 21
[00241] A lighting system was Simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch3” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 10, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch2” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 7. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 22
[00242] A lighting system was Simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch4” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 5, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“24QQK Ch2” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 7. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown m Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 23
[00243] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“5000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 12, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch2” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 7. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 24
[00244] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch3” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 6. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown m Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 25
[00245] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch2” m Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 9, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch3” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 6. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EX AMPLE 26
[00246] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch3” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 10, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch3” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 6. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 27
[00247] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch4” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG 5, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch3” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 6. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated lummophonc medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 28
[00248] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“5000K Chi” m Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 12, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“2400K Ch3” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 6. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown m Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof
EX AMPLE 29
[00249] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“1800K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 1 1. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 30 [00250] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch2” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 9, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“1800K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 11. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated lummophonc medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak w¾velength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 31
[00251] A lighting system w¾s simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch3” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 10, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“1800K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51 , 53, and 56 and in FIG. 11. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 32
[00252] A lighting system was Simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“4000K Ch4” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 5, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“1800K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 1 1. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 33
[00253] A lighting system was Simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“5000K Chi” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 12, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“1800K Chi” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56 and in FIG. 11. The values for EML slope and EML ratio for this pair of first and second lighting channels are shown in Tables 54 and 55. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof.
EXAMPLE 34
[00254] A lighting system was simulated having a first lighting channel having the characteristics shown as“Exemplary' 1 st channels avg” in Tables 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53, and 56, and a second lighting channel having the characteristics shown as
“Exemplary' 2nd channels avg” in Tables 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, and 56. The first lighting channel has a first color point at (0.3735, 0.3719) ccx, ccy coordinates. The second lighting channel has a second color point at (0.5021, 0.4137) ccx, ccy coordinates. The first lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 450 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof. The second lighting channel can comprise an LED having a 410 nm peak wavelength and an associated luminophoric medium having one or more phosphors, quantum dots, or a mixture thereof
Figure imgf000110_0001
[00255] A display system was simulated having three LED strings for use in a warm-dim operation mode. A first LED stung is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a white color point with a 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram (ccx, ccy) coordinates of (0.3818, 0.3797). A second LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient luminophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a red color point with a 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram color point of (0.5932, 0.3903). A third LED string is driven by a blue LED having peak emission wavelength of approximately 450 nm to approximately 455 nm, utilizes a recipient lummophoric medium, and generates a combined emission of a cyan color point with a 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram color point of (0.373, 0.4978).
[00256] Tables 58 and 59 belowr shows the spectral power distributions for the red and cyan color points generated by the display system of this Example, with spectral power shown within wavelength ranges in nanometers from 380 nm to 780 nm, with an arbitrary reference wavelength range selected for each color range and normalized to a value of 100.0. Table 60 show¾ color- rendering and circadian performance characteristics of the device for a representative selection of white light color points near the Planckian locus.
[00257] Any of the systems of Examples 1-13 and 14-35 can be modified to further include an additional lighting channel, a LRNE channel, that can be controlled to selectively provide LRNE spectral energy in the visible long-red or non-visible near infrared wavelengths ranges described herein. In some implementations, the spectral power distribution of the LRNE channel can be substantially equal to the spectral power of Long-Red Phosphor 675nm or Long-Red Phosphor 700nm shown in Tables 61 -63. In certain implementations, the LRNE channel can have a spectral power distribution substantially equal to that of Long-Red Channel A, Long-Red Channel B, or Exemplary Long-Red Channel Average shown in Tables 7-9. One or more of the other channels in the lighting systems can have intensity reduced or turned off entirely when the LRNE channel is activated. Control methods and hardware as described elsewhere herein can be used to control the timing and amount of LRNE spectral energy provided by the systems.
Figure imgf000112_0001
Figure imgf000113_0001
Figure imgf000114_0001
Figure imgf000114_0002
Figure imgf000115_0001
TABLE 8
Figure imgf000116_0001
Figure imgf000117_0002
Figure imgf000117_0001
Figure imgf000118_0001
Figure imgf000119_0001
TABLE 10
Figure imgf000120_0001
Figure imgf000120_0002
Figure imgf000121_0001
Figure imgf000122_0001
Figure imgf000123_0001
Figure imgf000124_0001
Figure imgf000125_0001
Figure imgf000126_0001
Figure imgf000127_0001
Figure imgf000128_0001
Figure imgf000129_0001
Figure imgf000129_0002
Figure imgf000130_0001
Figure imgf000131_0001
Figure imgf000132_0001
Figure imgf000133_0001
Figure imgf000134_0001
Figure imgf000135_0001
Figure imgf000136_0001
Figure imgf000137_0001
Figure imgf000138_0001
Figure imgf000139_0001
Figure imgf000140_0001
Figure imgf000141_0001
Figure imgf000142_0001
Figure imgf000143_0001
TABLE 25 (continued)
Figure imgf000144_0001
Figure imgf000145_0001
Figure imgf000146_0001
TABLE 27 (continued)
Figure imgf000147_0001
Figure imgf000148_0001
Figure imgf000149_0001
Figure imgf000150_0001
Figure imgf000151_0001
Figure imgf000152_0001
Figure imgf000153_0001
Figure imgf000154_0001
Figure imgf000155_0001
Figure imgf000156_0001
Figure imgf000157_0001
Figure imgf000158_0001
Figure imgf000159_0001
Figure imgf000160_0001
Figure imgf000161_0001
Figure imgf000162_0001
Figure imgf000163_0001
Figure imgf000164_0001
Figure imgf000165_0001
TABLE 38
Figure imgf000166_0001
Figure imgf000167_0001
Figure imgf000168_0001
Figure imgf000169_0001
Figure imgf000170_0001
TABLE 44
Figure imgf000171_0001
Figure imgf000172_0001
Figure imgf000173_0001
Figure imgf000174_0001
Figure imgf000175_0001
Figure imgf000176_0001
Figure imgf000177_0001
Figure imgf000178_0001
Figure imgf000179_0001
Figure imgf000180_0001
Figure imgf000181_0001
Figure imgf000182_0001
Figure imgf000183_0001
Figure imgf000184_0001
Figure imgf000185_0001
TABLE 53
Figure imgf000186_0001
TABLE 54
Figure imgf000187_0001
TABLE 55
Figure imgf000187_0002
Figure imgf000188_0001
TABLE 57
Figure imgf000189_0001
Figure imgf000190_0001
Figure imgf000191_0001
Figure imgf000192_0001
Figure imgf000193_0001
Figure imgf000194_0001
Figure imgf000195_0001
Figure imgf000196_0001
Figure imgf000197_0001
Figure imgf000198_0001
Figure imgf000199_0001
Figure imgf000200_0001
Control Systems
[00258] With respect to FIGS. 36 - 38, external systems can include, but are not limited to one or more computing environments, networks, local devices, remote devices, mobile devices, and wearable technology. In addition, each of those systems may provide the external input utilizable with control systems and embodiments discussed herein. For example, external inputs may include, but are not limited to audible, tactile, sensory, and user information through one or more sensors and other means, depending on the external system and its capabilities. As used herein, external systems and external information may also comprise the same types systems and information discussed below and in various embodiments herein.
[00259] In some embodiments, inputs may also include inputs from sensors associated with wearable devices 3330, such as enabling adjustment of lighting control parameters (autonomously or with remote or local control features) based on
physiological factors, such as ones indicating health conditions, emotional states, moods, or the like. Inputs from wearable devices may be used in the operational feedback system, such as to measure reactions to lighting conditions (such as to enable automated adjustment of a lighting installation), as well as to measure impacts on mood, health conditions, energy, wellness factors, and the like.
[00260] In some embodiments, the platform may be configured to change settings or parameters for a lighting installation (including but not limited to panel systems of the present disclosure, such as by using a custom tuning system) based on a variety of real time data, with a view to having the lighting installation, including panel systems included therein, best suit its environment in a dynamic way. In embodiments, data may be obtained that serves as an indicator of the emotional state or the stress level of an environment, and the lighting installation may respond accordingly to that state or stress level. In embodiments, data about the environment may be collected by a wearable device 3333, such as a smartwatch, armband, or the like; for example, data may be collected on acceleration, location, ambient light characteristics, and heart rate, among other possibilities. In embodiments, the data may be provided to the platform for analysis, including using machine learning, such as to observe physiological indicators of stress, mood, or the like under given lighting conditions. The analysis may enable model-based controls (such as where a given mood or state of the users in a room are linked to a set of control parameters appropriate for that state). In embodiments, machine learning may be used; for example, over tune, by variation of parameters for lighting objects and fixtures (such as color, color temperature, illumination patterns, lighting distributions, and many others), a machine learning system may, using feedback on outcomes based at least in part on physiological data and other data collected by a wearable device, select and/or promotion lighting installation parameters that improve various measures of stress, mood, satisfaction, or the like. This may occur m real time under control of a machine learning system based on the current conditions of users or the environment. In embodiments, data collected at least in part by a physiological monitor or wearable device may be used as an input to processing logic on a lighting object that changes lighting levels or other parameters to accommodate the 'emotional state' of the users m an environment where the lighting object is located. In embodiments, there is memory that retains and manages function with no appreciable drain on the battery.
[00261] In some embodiments, inputs may include systems that take data harvested from sensors 3335 in the lighting installation environment as well as sensors that reflect information about users, such as one or more of physiological sensors (including wearable devices, such as armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, clothing, and the like), sensors on various devices used by a user, ambient sensors, and the like. These may include sensing one or more of temperature, pressure, ambient lighting conditions, localized lighting conditions, lighting spectrum characteristics, humidity, UV light, sound, particles, pollutants, gases (e.g , oxygen, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and radon), radiation, location of objects or items, motion (e.g., speed, direction and/or acceleration). Where one or more wearable or physiological sensors are used, they may sense one or more of a person' s temperature, blood pressure, heart rate, oxygen saturation, activity type, activity level, galvanic skin response, respiratory rate, cholesterol level (including HDL, LDL and triglyceride), hormone or adrenal levels (e.g., Cortisol, thyroid, adrenaline, melatonin, and others), histamine levels, immune system characteristics, blood alcohol levels, drug content, macro and micro nutrients, mood, emotional state, alertness, sleepiness, and the like.
[00262] in some embodiments, the platform may connect to or integrate with data sources of information about users, such as including social networks (Facebook™, Linkedln™, Twitter™, and the like, sources of medical records (23&Me™ and the like), productivity, collaboration and/or calendaring software (Google™, Outlook™, scheduling apps and the like), information about web browsing and/or shopping activity, activity on media streaming services (Netflix™, Spotify™, YouTube™, Pandora™ and the like), health record information and other sources of insight about the preferences or characteristics of users of the space of a lighting installation, including psychographic, demographic and other characteristics.
[00263] In some embodiments, the platform may use information from sources that indicate patterns, such as patterns involving periods of time (daily patterns, weekly patterns, seasonal patterns, and the like), patterns involving cultural factors or norms (such as indicating usage patterns or preferences in different regions), patterns relating to personality and preferences, paterns relating to social groups (such as family and work group patterns), and the like. In embodiments, the platform may make use of the data harvested from various sources noted above to make recommendations and/or to optimize (such as automatically, under computer control) the design, ordering, fulfillment, deployment and/or operation of a lighting installation, such as based on understanding or prediction of user behavior. This may include recommendation or optimization relating to achieving optimal sleep time and duration, setting optimal mealtimes, satisfying natural light exposure requirements during the day, and maintaining tolerable artificial light exposure levels (such as during night time). In some embodiments, the platform may anticipate user needs and optimize the lighting installation to enhance productivity, alertness, emotional well-being, satisfaction, safety and/or sleep. In further embodiments, the platform may control one or more panel systems of the present disclosure in accordance with the user needs of the environment based on this information.
[00264] In some embodiments, the platform may store a space utilization data structure that indicates, over time, how people use the space of the lighting installation, such as indicating what hallways are more trafficked, and the like. This may inform understanding of a space, such as indicating what is an entry, what is a passage, what is a workspace, and the like, which may be used to suggest changes or updates to a lighting design in embodiments, sensors may be used to collect and read where people have been in the space, such as using one or more video cameras, IR sensors, microwave sensors. LIDAR, ultrasound or the like. In embodiments, the platform may collect and read what adjustments people have made, such as task lamp activation and other activities that indicate how a lighting fixture is used by an individual in a space. By way of these examples, aggregate usage information may be used to optimize a lighting design and adjust other lighting designs. Based on these factors, a space may be dynamically adjusted, and the lighting model for an installation may be updated to reflect the actual installation.
[00265] In some embodiments, control capabilities of the panel systems may include dynamic configuration of control parameters, such as providing a dimming curve for a light source, including but not limited to a panel system of the present disclosure, that is customized to the preferences of a designer or other user. This may include a selection from one or more modes, such as ones described elsewhere herein that have desired effects on mood or aesthetic factors, that have desired health effects, that meet the functional requirements, or the like.
[00266] Bioactive thresholds may, in some instances, benefit from prolonged exposure to at least one of one of CSE and LRNE. In some instances a melanopic flux of at least 10: 1 may be suitable , in other instances the melanopic flux may be 20: 1 , 50: 1, 100: 1 , or a greater ratio. It will be appreciated in light of the disclosure that traditional systems simply adjust from a warm CCT to a cool CCT, which may only provide a 2: 1 or 3 : 1 ratio of melanopic flux, which are below said threshold. In some
implementations, the platform may include spectral tuning targets for panel systems of the present disclosure that may optimize this ratio based on local installation
environments. These targets, in a first operational mode along with adjustments intensity of light (e.g., 4: 1) may provide a higher ratio, such as a 10: 1 ratio or greater, and thus provide greater melanopic flux ratios.
[00267] In a second operational mode and either m combination with the above mode or not, the platform may support an ability to shift the bias of light in a room. In embodiments, controlled variation of one or more panel systems of the present disclosure in a lighting environment can contribute to generating a lighting bias typical of being outside.
[00268] In some implementations, various other programmable modes may be provided, such as bioactive panel system settings where using different combinations of color light sources to achieve a given mixed color output may be optimized for efficacy, efficiency, color quality, health impact (e.g., circadian action and/or LRNE action), or to satisfy other requirements. In embodiments, the programmable modes may also include programmable dimming curves, color tuning curves, and the like (such as allowing various control interfaces, such as extra-low voltage (ELY) controllers or voltage-based dimmers to affect fixture colors, such as where a custom tuning curve provides a start point, an end point and a dimming and/or color tuning path in response to a level of dimming). In embodiments, programmable modes may use conventional tuning mechanisms, such as simple interpolation systems (which typically use two or three white color LEDs) are dimmable on a zero to ten-volt analog system, and have a second voltage-based input for adjusting the CCT of a fixture between warm and cool CCTs. The bioactive panel systems as described herein can provide for tunable ranges of color points at various x, y coordinates on the 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram. Because of the wide range of potential white or non-white colors produced by the panel systems, they may be controlled by the platform that may specify a particular x, y coordinate on the CIE diagram. Lighting control protocols like DMX™ and Dali 2.0™ may achieve this result.
[00269] In some implementations the control system described herein controls output of at least one CSE and LRNE. In some embodiments a programmable color curve for an LED driver may be input, such as through an interface of the platform, or through a desktop software interface, a mobile phone 3330, a tablet app, or the like, that enables a user to define a start and stop point to a color tuning curve and to specify how it will be controlled by a secondary input, such as a voltage-based input (e.g., a 0 to 10-volt input) to the fixture. These may include pre-defmed curves, as well as the ability to set start, end, and waypoints to define custom curves. For example, an exemplary color curve can have a starting point around 8000K biased above the black body curve, with the color curve crossing the black body around 2700K, and finishing around 1 BOOK below' the black body curve. Similarly, another exemplary curve could be programmed such that the start was 4000K well above the black body, with the end being 4000K well below the black body. By way of these examples, any adjustment would be in hue only, not CCT. Further examples may include a curve that never produces a white color, such as starting in the purple and finishing in orange. In any of these cases, these curves may be programmed into panel systems via the interface of the platform, the desktop, mobile phone or tablet. In embodiments, the curves may be designed, saved, and then activated, such as using the secondary (supplemental) 0 to 10-volt input.
[00270] In some implementations, a three-channel warm dim operational mode may be used, such as that described more fully in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/712,182 filed July 30, 2018, which is incorporated herein in its entirety for all purposes, for target applications where the“fully on” CCT falls between 3000K and 2500K. By way of these examples, as the fixture dims (via ELY control or in response to the 0 to 10- volt input) the CCT may be gradually decreased to between 2500K and 1800K. In certain embodiments, the hue adjustment may all occur below' the black body curve. Alternative embodiments may use a cyan channel as described elsewhere herein, either long-blue-pumped cyan or short-blue-pumped cyan, and a red channel which may be ERNE with cyan pumped near infrared as described elsewhere herein, additionally ERNE especially in the infrared region may be produced with phosphors configured for generation of ERNE emission from a below 280 nm LED include but are not limited to: composition formula M700_rb4_lime and s_M750_rb4_M630_yag] LiA102:Fe3+ (peak at 770nms), CdS: Ag+,Cl- (peak at 800nms), ZnSbGaTe:Cr3+,Nd3+ (peak at 845nms), La3In2Ga3012:Cr3+, Dy3+ (peak at 905nms), BaGd2Zn05: Yb3+ (peak at 979nms) and Ba(GdY)2Zn05: Yb3+ (peak at 979ns), plus a 4000K white channel as described elsewhere herein to achieve a warm dimming operational mode that allows for adjustment both above and below the black body curve. In some embodiments of the three-channel warm dim mode, the white channel can have a color point within a 7-step MacAdam ellipse around any point on the black body locus having a correlated color temperature between about 3500K and about 6500K.
[00271] In some implementations, the panel systems of the present disclosure can include a 4-channel color system as described elsewhere herein and in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/757,672 filed November 8, 2018, and U.S.
Provisional Application No. 62/712,191 filed July 30, 2018, the contents of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety as if fully set forth herein, includes 3000K to 1800K CCT white color points within its range, a programmable mode may be included within the driver that adjusts color with the dimming percentage as well. In some aspects, this may be similar to a conventional control mode, except that the color control would not be on the secondary 0 to 10-volt channel, but may be activated through the primary 0 to 10-volt input channel or ELY controller. In embodiments, the“starting” color point may be the one when the fixture was“fully on.” In embodiments, the “ending” color point may be the one where the fixture is maximally dimmed. It is thus possible to make full range color change, such as purple to orange, which is slaved to the 0 to 10-volt or ELY dimming signal.
[00274] In some implementations , an optimized mode may be provided. With a 4-channel color system, there are many ways to create a single x-y point on the CIE diagram. In embodiments, the maximally efficient mode may typically be one that uses the colors that have x, y coordinates closest to the target x, y coordinate. But for best color quality^, utilizing a fourth channel (and thereby requiring more light from the color in the opposite“comer”) may help provide a desired spectral power distribution. For the maximum melatonin suppression (for systems hoping to mimic circadian lighting), a higher cyan channel content may be required for CCTs of 3500K and above and minimizing cyan and blue content below 3500K It will be appreciated in light of the disclosure that conventional systems either require expert users to understand the color balances necessary to achieve these effects (who then implement the color balances channel-by-channel) or are designed for maximum efficiency with color quality as a byproduct.
[00273] In some implementations , a digital power system is provided herein (including firmware-driven power conversion and LED current control) that controls a multichannel color system, such as a 4-channel color system, and allows for the inclusion of“modes” which may calculate the correct color balance between the various channels to provide optimized outputs. In embodiments, optimization may occur around one or more of efficacy, color quality, circadian effects, LRNE effects, and other factors. Other modes are possible, such as optimizing for contrast, particular display requirements it will be appreciated m light of the disclosure that this is not an exhaustive list but is representative of potential modes that could be engaged through an interface of the platform (or of a mobile, tablet or desktop application) where a color tuning curve may be specified, such that the curve is used to specify an interface between a controller and the Digital PSU in a panel system in embodiments, these modes may account for actual measured colors for each panel system and calculate the correct balance of for the chosen modes, such as based on algorithms loaded into the Digital PSU microprocessor.
[QQ274] In some implementations , machine learning may be used, such as based on various feedback measures, such as relating to mood (stated by the user or measured by one or more sensors), noise levels (such as indicating successful utilization of a space based on a desired level of noise), returns on investment (such as where panel systems are intended to promote retail merchandise), reported pain levels, measured health levels, performance levels of users (including fitness, wellness, and educational performance, among others), sleep levels, vitamin D levels, melatonin levels, and many others. In embodiments, the lighting installations including the panel systems may be operated or controlled based on external information, such as based on seasonal lighting conditions, weather, climate, collective mood indicators (such as based on stock market data, news feeds, or sentiment indices), analyses of social network data, and the like. This may include controlling a system to reflect, or influence, the mood of occupants.
[00275] FIG. 36 depicts an example computing environment 3000 suitable for implementing aspects of the embodiments of the present invention, including the control system, which can integrate one or more devices, computing, and lighting systems. As utilized herein, the phrase“computing system” generally refers to a dedicated computing device with processing power and storage memory, which supports operating software that underlies the execution of software, applications, and computer programs thereon.
As used herein, an application is a small, in storage size, specialized program that is downloaded to the computing system or device. In some cases, the application is downloaded from an“App Store” such as APPLE’S APP STORE or GOOGLE’s ANDROID MARKET. After download, the application is generally installed on the computer system or computing device. As shown by Figure 36, computing environment 3000 includes bus 3010 that directly or indirectly couples the following components: memory 3020, one or more processors 3030, I/O interface 3040, and network interface 3050. Bus 3010 is configured to communicate, transmit, and transfer data, controls, and commands between the various components of computing environment 3000.
[00276] Computing environment 3000 typically includes a variety of computer- readable media. Computer-readable media can be any available media that is accessible by computing environment 3000 and includes both volatile and nonvolatile media, removable and non-removable media. Computer-readable media may comprise both computer storage media and communication media. Computer storage media does not comprise, and in fact explicitly excludes, signals per se.
[00277] Computer storage media includes volatile and nonvolatile, removable and non-removable, tangible and non-transient media, implemented in any method or technology for storage of information such as computer-readable instructions, data structures, program modules or other data. Computer storage media includes RAM; ROM; EE-PROM; flash memory or other memory technology; CD-ROMs; DVDs or other optical disk storage; magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices; or other mediums or computer storage devices which can be used to store the desired information and which can be accessed by computing environment 3000.
[00278] Communication media typically embodies computer-readable instructions, data structures, program modules or other data in a modulated data signal such as a carrier wave or other transport mechanism and includes any information delivery media. The term "modulated data signal" means a signal that has one or more of its characteristics set or changed in such a manner as to encode information in the signal. By way of example, communication media includes wired media, such as a wired network or direct-wired connection, and wireless media, such as acoustic, RF, infrared and other wireless media. Combinations of any of the above should also be included within the scope of computer-readable media.
[00279] Memory 3020 includes computer-storage media in the form of volatile and/or nonvolatile memory . The memory may be removable, non-removable, or a combination thereof. Memory 3020 may be implemented using hardware devices such as solid-state memory, hard drives, optical-disc drives, and the like. Computing environment 3000 also includes one or more processors 3030 that read data from various entities such as memory 3020, I/O interface 3040, and network interface 3050.
[00280] I/O interface 3040 enables computing environment 3000 to
communicate with different input devices and output devices. Examples of input devices include a keyboard, a pointing device, a touchpad, a touchscreen, a scanner, a
microphone, a joystick, and the like. Examples of output devices include a display- device, an audio device (e.g., speakers), a printer, and the like. These and other I/O devices are often connected to processor 3010 through a serial port interface that is coupled to the system bus, but may be connected by other interfaces, such as a parallel port, game port, or universal serial bus (USB). A display device can also be connected to the system bus via an interface, such as a video adapter which can be part of, or connected to, a graphics processor unit. I/O interface 3040 is configured to coordinate I/O traffic between memory 3020, the one or more processors 3030, network interface 3050, and any combination of input devices and/or output devices.
[00281] Network interface 3050 enables computing environment 3000 to exchange data with other computing devices via any suitable network. In a networked environment, program modules depicted relative to computing environment 3000, or portions thereof, may be stored in a remote memory storage device accessible via network interface 3050. It will be appreciated that the network connections shown are exemplary and other means of establishing a communications link between the computers may be used.
[00282] In at least some embodiments, a server that implements a portion or all of one or more of the technologies described herein may include a general-purpose computer system that includes or is configured to access one or more computer- accessible media. FIG. 37 depicts a general-purpose computer system that includes or is configured to access one or more computer-accessible media. In the illustrated embodiment, computing device 3100 includes one or more processors 3110a, 3110b, and/or 3110h (which may be referred herein singularly as a processor 1010 or in the plural as the processors 3110) coupled to a system memory 3120 via an mput/output (“I/O”) interface 3130. Computing device 3100 further includes a network interface 3140 coupled to I/O interface 3130.
[00283] in various embodiments, computing device 3100 may be a uniprocessor system including one processor 3110 or a multiprocessor system including several processors 31 10 (e.g., two, four, eight, or another suitable number). Processors 31 10 may¬ be any suitable processors capable of executing instructions. For example, m various embodiments, processors 3110 may be general-purpose or embedded processors implementing any of a variety of instruction set architectures (“ISAs”), such as the x86, PowerPC, SPARC or MIPS ISAs, or any other suitable ISA. In multiprocessor systems, each of processors 3110 may commonly, but not necessarily, implement the same ISA.
[QQ284] In some embodiments, a graphics processing unit (“GPU”) 3112 may participate in providing graphics rendering and/or physics processing capabilities. A GPU may, for example, comprise a highly parallelized processor architecture specialized for graphical computations. In some embodiments, processors 3110 and GPU 3112 may be implemented as one or more of the same type of device.
[00285] System memory' 3120 may be configured to store instructions and data accessible by processor(s) 3110. In various embodiments, system memory 3120 may be implemented using any suitable memory technology, such as static random access memory (“SRAM”), synchronous dynamic RAM (“SDRAM’), nonvolatile/Flash®-type memory , or any other type of memory. In the illustrated embodiment, program
instructions and data implementing one or more desired functions, such as those methods, techniques, and data described above, are shown stored within system memory 3120 as code 3125 and data 3126.
[00286] n one embodiment, I/O interface 3130 may be configured to coordinate I/O traffic between processor 31 10, system memory 3120, and any peripherals in the device, including network interface 3140 or other peripheral interfaces. In some embodiments, I/O interface 3130 may perform any necessary' protocol, timing or other data transformations to convert data signals from one component (e.g., system memory- 3120) into a format suitable for use by another component (e.g., processor 31 10). In some embodiments, I/O interface 3130 may include support for devices attached through various types of peripheral buses, such as a variant of the Peripheral Component Interconnect (“PCI”) bus standard or the Universal Serial Bus (“USB”) standard, for example. In some embodiments, the function of I/O interface 3130 may be split into two or more separate components, such as a north bridge and a south bridge, for example. Also, in some embodiments some or all of the functionality of I/O interface 3130, such as an interface to system memory 3120, may be incorporated directly into processor 31 10.
[00287] Network interface 3140 may be configured to allow data to be exchanged between computing device 3100 and other device or devices 3160 attached to a network or networks 3150, such as other computer systems or devices, for example. In various embodiments, network interface 3140 may support communication via any suitable wared or wireless general data networks, such as types of Ethernet networks, for example. Additionally, network interface 3140 may support communication via telecommunications/telephony networks, such as analog voice networks or digital fiber communications networks, via storage area networks, such as Fibre Channel SANs (storage area networks), or via any other suitable type of network and/or protocol.
[00288] In some embodiments, system memory 3120 may be one embodiment of a computer-accessible medium configured to store program instructions and data as described above for implementing embodiments of the corresponding methods and apparatus. However, in other embodiments, program instructions and/or data may be received, sent, or stored upon different types of computer-accessible media. Generally speaking, a computer-accessible medium may include non-transitory storage media or memory media, such as magnetic or optical media, e.g., disk or DVD/CD coupled to computing device 3100 via I/O interface 3130. A non-transitory computer-accessible storage medium may also include any volatile or non-volatile media, such as RAM (e.g., SDRAM, DDR SDRAM, RDRAM, SRAM, etc.), ROM, etc., that may be included in some embodiments of computing device 3100 as system memory 3120 or another type of memory. Further, a computer-accessible medium may include transmission media or signals, such as electrical, electromagnetic or digital signals, conveyed via a
communication medium, such as a network and/or a wireless link, such as those that may¬ be implemented via network interface 3140. Portions or all of multiple computing devices, such as those illustrated in FIG. 31, may be used to implement the described functionality in various embodiments; for example, software components running on a variety of different devices and servers may collaborate to provide the functionality in some embodiments, portions of the described functionality may be implemented using storage devices, network devices or special-purpose computer systems, in addition to or instead of being implemented using general-purpose computer systems. The term “computing device,” as used herein, refers to at least all these types of devices and is not limited to these types of devices.
[00289] A compute node, which may be referred to also as a computing node, may be implemented on a wide variety of computing environments, such as tablet computers, personal computers, smartphones, game consoles, commodity-hardware computers, virtual machines, web services, computing clusters, and computing appliances. Any of these computing devices or environments may, for convenience, be described as compute nodes or as computing nodes.
[00290] A network set up by an entity, such as a company or a public sector organization, to provide one or more web services (such as various types of cloud-based computing or storage) accessible via the Internet and/or other networks to a distributed set of clients may be termed a provider network. Such a provider network may include numerous data centers hosting various resource pools, such as collections of physical and/or virtualized computer servers, storage devices, networking equipment, and the like, needed to implement and distribute the infrastructure and web sendees offered by the provider network. The resources may in some embodiments be offered to clients in various units related to the web service, such as an amount of storage capacity for storage, processing capability for processing, as instances, as sets of related services, and the like. A virtual computing instance may, for example, comprise one or more servers with a specified computational capacity (which may be specified by indicating the type and number of CPUs, the main memory size, and so on) and a specified software stack (e.g., a particular version of an operating system, which may in turn run on top of a hypervisor).
[00291] A number of different types of computing devices may be used singly or in combination to implement the resources of the provider network in different embodiments, including general-purpose or special-purpose computer servers, storage devices, network devices, and the like in some embodiments a client or user may be provided direct access to a resource instance, e.g., by giving a user an administrator login and password. In other embodiments the provider network operator may allow' clients to specify execution requirements for specified client applications and schedule execution of the applications on behalf of the client on execution platforms (such as application server instances, Java™ virtual machines (“JVMs”), general-purpose or special-purpose operating systems, platforms that support various interpreted or compiled programming languages, such as Ruby, Perl, Python, C, C++, and the like, or high-performance computing platforms) suitable for the applications, without, for example, requiring the client to access an instance or an execution platform directly. A given execution platform may utilize one or more resource instances in some implementations: in other
implementations multiple execution platforms may be mapped to a single resource instance.
[00299] In many environments, operators of provider networks that implement different types of virtualized computing, storage and/or other network-accessible functionality may allow customers to reserve or purchase access to resources in various resource acquisition modes. The computing resource provider may provide facilities for customers to select and launch the desired computing resources, deploy application components to the computing resources, and maintain an application executing in the environment. In addition, the computing resource provider may provide further facilities for the customer to quickly and easily scale up or scale down the numbers and types of resources allocated to the application, either manually or through automatic scaling, as demand for or capacity requirements of the application change. The computing resources provided by the computing resource provider may be made available m discrete units, which may be referred to as instances. An instance may represent a physical server hardware platform, a virtual machine instance executing on a server, or some
combination of the two. Various types and configurations of instances may be made available, including different sizes of resources executing different operating systems (“OS”) and/or hypervisors, and with various installed software applications, runtimes, and the like. Instances may further be available in specific availability zones, representing a logical region, a fault tolerant region, a data center, or other geographic location of the underlying computing hardware, for example. Instances may be copied within an availability zone or across availability zones to improve the redundancy of the instance, and instances may be migrated within a particular availability zone or across availability zones. As one example, the latency for client communications with a particular server in an availability zone may be less than the latency for client communications with a different server. As such, an instance may be migrated from the higher latency server to the lower latency server to improve the overall client experience.
[00293] in some embodiments the provider network may be organized into a plurality of geographical regions, and each region may include one or more availability zones. An availability zone (which may also be referred to as an availability container) m turn may comprise one or more distinct locations or data centers, configured in such a way that the resources in a given availability zone may be isolated or insulated from failures in other availability zones. That is, a failure in one availability7 zone may not be expected to result m a failure in any other availability zone. Thus, the availability7 profile of a resource instance is intended to be independent of the availability7 profile of a resource instance in a different availability zone. Clients may be able to protect their applications from failures at a single location by launching multiple application instances in respective availability zones. At the same time, in some implementations inexpensive and low latency network connectivity may be provided between resource instances that reside wdthm the same geographical region (and network transmissions between resources of the same availability zone may be even faster).
[00294] Each of the processes, methods, and algorithms described in the preceding sections may be embodied in, and fully or partially automated by, code modules executed by one or more computers or computer processors. The code modules may be stored on any type of non-transitory computer-readable medium or computer storage device, such as hard drives, solid state memory7, optical disc, and/or the like. The processes and algorithms may be implemented partially or wholly in application-specific circuitry. The results of the disclosed processes and process steps may be stored, persistently or otherwise, in any type of non-transitory computer storage, such as, e.g., volatile or non-volatile storage.
[99295] The various features and processes described above may be used independently of one another, or may be combined in various ways. All possible combinations and sub-combinations are intended to fall within the scope of this disclosure. In addition, certain methods or process blocks may be omitted in some implementations. The methods and processes described herein are also not limited to any particular sequence, and the blocks or states relating thereto can be performed m other sequences that are appropriate. For example, described blocks or states may be performed in an order other than that specifically disclosed, or multiple blocks or states may be combined in a single block or state. The example blocks or states may be performed in serial, in parallel, or in some other manner. Blocks or states may be added to or removed from the disclosed example embodiments. The example systems and components described herein may be configured differently than described. For example, elements may be added to, removed from, or rearranged compared to the disclosed example embodiments.
[00296] It wall also be appreciated that various items are illustrated as being stored in memory or on storage while being used, and that these items or portions thereof may be transferred between memory' and other storage devices for purposes of memory management and data integrity. Alternatively, in other embodiments some or all of the software modules and/or systems may execute in memory' on another device and communicate with the illustrated computing systems via inter- computer communication. Furthermore, in some embodiments, some or all of the systems and/or modules may be implemented or provided in other ways, such as at least partially in firmware and/or hardware, including, but not limited to, one or more application-specific integrated circuits (“ASICs”), standard integrated circuits, controllers (e.g , by executing appropriate instructions, and including microcontrollers and/or embedded controllers), field- programmable gate arrays (“FPGAs”), complex programmable logic devices (“CPLDs”), etc. Some or all of the modules, systems, and data structures may also be stored (e.g., as software instructions or structured data) on a computer-readable medium, such as a hard disk, a memory, a network, or a portable media article to be read by an appropriate device or via an appropriate connection. The systems, modules, and data structures may also be transmitted as generated data signals (e.g., as part of a carrier wave or other analog or digital propagated signal) on a variety of computer-readable transmission media, including wireless-based and wired/cable-based media, and may take a variety of forms (e.g., as part of a single or multiplexed analog signal, or as multiple discrete digital packets or frames). Such computer program products may also take other forms in other embodiments. Accordingly, the present invention may be practiced with other computer system configurations.
[00297] Conditional language used herein, such as, among others, "can," "could," "might," "may,”“e.g.,” and the like, unless specifically stated otherwise, or otherwise understood within the context as used, is generally intended to convey that certain embodiments include, while other embodiments do not include, certain features, elements, and/or steps. Thus, such conditional language is not generally intended to imply that features, elements and/or steps are in any way required for one or more embodiments or that one or more embodiments necessarily include logic for deciding, with or without author input or prompting, whether these features, elements and/or steps are included or are to be performed in any particular embodiment. The terms
“comprising,”“including,”“having,” and the like are synonymous and are used inclusively, in an open-ended fashion, and do not exclude additional elements, features, acts, operations, and so forth. Also, the term“or” is used in its inclusive sense (and not m its exclusive sense) so that when used, for example, to connect a list of elements, the term “or” means one, some, or all of the el ements in the list.
[00298] While certain example embodiments have been described, these embodiments have been presented by way of example only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the inventions disclosed herein. Thus, nothing in the foregoing description is intended to imply that any particular feature, characteristic, step, module, or block is necessary or indispensable. Indeed, the novel methods and systems described herein may¬ be embodied in a variety of other forms; furthermore, various omissions, substitutions and changes in the form of the methods and systems described herein may be made without departing from the spirit of the inventions disclosed herein. The accompanying claims and their equivalents are intended to cover such forms or modifications as would fall within the scope and spirit of certain of the inventions disclosed herein.

Claims

What is claimed:
1. A display system for displaying digital content, wherein the display system comprises:
one or more LED-based lighting channels adapted to generate a circadian- inducing blue light output in a first operational mode;
a less-circadian-inducing blue light output in a second operational mode; and, a long red near infrared energy (LRNE) output in a third operating mode.
2. The display system of claim 1, wherein the circadian-inducing blue light has a first circadian-stimulating energy characteristic related to an associated first spectral power distribution of light generated in the first operational mode.
3. The display system of claim 1, wherein the less-circadian-inducing blue light output has a second circadian-stimulating energy characteristic related to an associated second spectral power distribution of light generated in the second operational mode.
4. The display system of claim 1, wherein the LRNE is in the visible spectrum.
5. The display system of claim 1, wherein the LRNE is in the non-visible spectrum.
6. The display system of claim 1, wherein the LRNE is in both the visible and the non-visible spectrum.
7. The display system of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the one or more LED-based lighting channels provide the individual pixels in a pixel array of the display system.
8. The display system of claim 1, wherein the individual pixels are provided as microLED pixels or OLED pixels.
9. The display system of any one of claims 1-6, wherein different combinations of different types of pixels are used in the first operational mode and second operational mode.
10. and the first type of pixel is not used m the second operational mode.
11. The display system of any one of claims 1 , wherein the LED-based lighting channels provide one or more white light sources for a backlighting system in the display system.
12. The display system of any claim 11, wherein the one or more white light sources are provided as white lighting channels comprising an LED and an associated luminophoric medium that a produce a combined white light at a white color point within ±7 DUV of the P!anckian locus on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram.
13. The display system of any claim 11, wherein the display system comprises two or more white lighting channels, with a first white lighting channel used in the first operational mode and a second white lighting channel used in the second operational mode.
14. The display of system of claim 13 wherein the first operational mode is a blue light output and the second operational mode is a LRNE red light output.
15. The display of system of claim 13 wherein the first operational mode is a circadian stimulating energy blue light output and the second operational mode is a LRNE red light output
16. The display system of any claim 13, wherein the one or more white light sources for backlighting systems are provided as a combination of a plurality of lighting channels.
17. The display system of claim 13, wherein each of the plurality of lighting channels comprises an LED and an associated lummophoric medium that produce a combined light at a color point, with the combinations of the plurality of lighting channels producing combined white light at a white color points within ±7 DUV of the Planckian locus on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity Diagram.
18. The method of claim 13, wherein the methods further comprise generating a circadian-inducing blue light output in a first operational mode and a less-circadian- inducing blue light output in a second operational mode.
19. The method of claim 13, wherein the method further comprises operating or controlling the display system based on external information.
20. The method of claim 19, wherein the external information comprises one or more of seasonal lighting conditions, weather, climate, collective mood indicators, analyses of social network data, and the like.
21. The method of claim 20, wherein the external information comprises one or more collective mood indicators selected from the group consisting of stock market data, news feeds, and sentiment indices.
22. The method of any of claim 19, wherein the method further comprises controlling the display system based on data harvested from sensors in a lighting installation environment in proximity to the display system.
23. The method of any one of claim 19, wherein the method further comprises controlling the display system based on data from one or more sensors that reflect information about one or more users in proximity to the display system.
24. The method of claim 21, wherein the one or more sensors comprise one or more of physiological sensors, sensors on various devices used by the one or more users, and ambient sensors.
25. The method of claim 21, wherein the one or more sensors are configured to sense one or more of temperature, pressure, ambient lighting conditions, localized lighting conditions, lighting spectrum characteristics, humidity, UV light, sound, particles, pollutants, gases, radiation, location of objects or items, and motion.
26. The method of claim 22, wherein the physiological sensors comprise one or more wearable devices incorporated in armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, or clothing.
27. The method of claim 22, wherein the physiological sensors are configured to sense one or more of a person* s temperature, blood pressure, heart rate, oxygen saturation, activity type, activity level, galvanic skin response, respiratory rate, cholesterol level (including HDL, LDL and triglyceride), hormone or adrenal levels (e.g , Cortisol, thyroid, adrenaline, melatonin, and others), histamine levels, immune system characteristics, blood alcohol levels, drug content, macro and micro nutrients, mood, emotional state, alertness, and sleepiness.
28. A control system comprising:
a plurality of light emitting device outputting a first circadian stimulating energy
(CSE);
at least one external device receiving feedback comprising information associated with at least one of the semiconductor light emitting devices and the first CSE; a master device in communication with the plurality of semiconductor light emitting devices, the master device configured to adjust a parameter on at least one of the plurality of semiconductor light emitting devices based on the feedback, and cause the at least one semiconductor light emitting devices to emit a second CSE.
29. The control system of claim 28, wherein the at least one external device is a display system.
30. The control system of claim 30, wherein the display system comprises: one or more LED-based lighting channels adapted to generate a circadian- inducing blue light output m a first operational mode;
a less-circadian-inducing blue light output in a second operational mode; and, a long red near infrared energy (ERNE) output in a third operating mode.
31. The control system of claim 30, wherein the ERNE is in at least one of the visible and the non- visible spectrum.
32. The control system of claim 28, wherein the at least one external device is a mobile device, a wearable device, a sensor, a panel system, a lighting device, and a computing system.
33. The control system of claim 32, wherein the at least one external device is configured to sense one or more of temperature, pressure, ambient lighting conditions, localized lighting conditions, lighting spectrum characteristics, humidity, UV light, sound, particles, pollutants, gases, radiation, location of objects or items, and motion.
34. The control system of claim 32, wherein the wearable device is incorporated in at least one of armbands, wrist bands, chest bands, glasses, or clothing.
35. The control system of claim 32, wherein the one or more external devices are configured to sense one or more of a person' s temperature, blood pressure, heart rate, oxygen saturation, activity type, activity level, galvanic skin response, respiratory rate, cholesterol level (including HDL, LDL and triglyceride), hormone or adrenal levels (e.g., Cortisol, thyroid, adrenaline, melatonin, and others), histamine levels, immune system characteristics, blood alcohol levels, drug content, macro and micro nutrients, mood, emotional state, alertness, and sleepiness.
36. The control system of claim 28, wherein the feedback is indicative of information relating to at least one of light, motion, temperature, environment, physiological data, usage patterns, user feedback, and location.
37. The control system of claim 28, wherein m the master device is at least one of a mobile device, a wearable device, and a computing device.
38. The control system of claim 28, wherein the master device is configured to receive user input.
39. The control system of claim 28, wherein the parameter is associated with lighting control based on at least one of physiological factors, health conditions, emotional states, user mood, and user input.
40. The control system of claim 28, wherein the master device is in communication with the plurality of semiconductor light emitting devices through one or more of a wired network, a wireless network, and Bluetooth communication.
PCT/US2019/060640 2018-11-08 2019-11-08 Display lighting systems with bioactive lighting WO2020097579A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/316,398 US11783748B2 (en) 2018-11-08 2021-05-10 Display lighting systems with bioactive lighting
US17/674,149 US12073775B2 (en) 2018-11-08 2022-02-17 Display lighting systems with bioactive lighting

Applications Claiming Priority (20)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201862757664P 2018-11-08 2018-11-08
US201862757672P 2018-11-08 2018-11-08
US62/757,664 2018-11-08
US62/757,672 2018-11-08
US201862758411P 2018-11-09 2018-11-09
US201862758447P 2018-11-09 2018-11-09
US62/758,447 2018-11-09
US62/758,411 2018-11-09
USPCT/US2019/013356 2019-01-11
USPCT/US2019/013359 2019-01-11
PCT/US2019/013380 WO2019140327A2 (en) 2018-01-11 2019-01-11 Display lighting systems with circadian effects
PCT/US2019/013379 WO2019140326A1 (en) 2018-01-11 2019-01-11 Panel systems with circadian lighting
USPCT/US2019/013380 2019-01-11
PCT/US2019/013359 WO2019140309A1 (en) 2018-01-11 2019-01-11 Switchable systems for white light with high color rendering and biological effects
PCT/US2019/013356 WO2019140306A1 (en) 2018-01-11 2019-01-11 Two-channel tunable lighting systems with controllable equivalent melanopic lux and correlated color temperature outputs
USPCT/US2019/013379 2019-01-11
US16/393,660 US10805998B2 (en) 2018-01-11 2019-04-24 Display lighting systems with circadian effects
US16/393,660 2019-04-24
US201962885162P 2019-08-09 2019-08-09
US62/885,162 2019-08-09

Related Parent Applications (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2019/013379 Continuation-In-Part WO2019140326A1 (en) 2018-01-11 2019-01-11 Panel systems with circadian lighting
PCT/US2019/013359 Continuation-In-Part WO2019140309A1 (en) 2018-01-11 2019-01-11 Switchable systems for white light with high color rendering and biological effects
PCT/US2019/013356 Continuation-In-Part WO2019140306A1 (en) 2018-01-11 2019-01-11 Two-channel tunable lighting systems with controllable equivalent melanopic lux and correlated color temperature outputs
PCT/US2019/013380 Continuation-In-Part WO2019140327A2 (en) 2018-01-11 2019-01-11 Display lighting systems with circadian effects
US16/393,660 Continuation-In-Part US10805998B2 (en) 2018-01-11 2019-04-24 Display lighting systems with circadian effects

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/316,398 Continuation US11783748B2 (en) 2018-11-08 2021-05-10 Display lighting systems with bioactive lighting

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020097579A1 true WO2020097579A1 (en) 2020-05-14

Family

ID=70610741

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2019/060642 WO2020097580A1 (en) 2018-11-08 2019-11-08 Bioactive panel lighting systems
PCT/US2019/060640 WO2020097579A1 (en) 2018-11-08 2019-11-08 Display lighting systems with bioactive lighting
PCT/US2019/060634 WO2020097575A1 (en) 2018-11-08 2019-11-08 Multi-channel bioactive lighting
PCT/US2019/060636 WO2020097576A1 (en) 2018-11-08 2019-11-08 Switchable bioactive lighting

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2019/060642 WO2020097580A1 (en) 2018-11-08 2019-11-08 Bioactive panel lighting systems

Family Applications After (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2019/060634 WO2020097575A1 (en) 2018-11-08 2019-11-08 Multi-channel bioactive lighting
PCT/US2019/060636 WO2020097576A1 (en) 2018-11-08 2019-11-08 Switchable bioactive lighting

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (4) WO2020097580A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2613072A (en) * 2021-10-26 2023-05-24 Five Create Ltd Apparatus for emitting light for therapeutic purposes
EP4268708A1 (en) * 2022-04-28 2023-11-01 Tridonic GmbH & Co. KG Lighting module

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE112021000478T5 (en) 2020-01-08 2022-12-29 Korrus, Inc. Systems and methods for illuminating an e-paper display
EP4186560A1 (en) * 2021-11-26 2023-05-31 Seaborough Life Science B.V. Electro-optical irradiation device
WO2023141269A2 (en) * 2022-01-20 2023-07-27 Korrus, Inc. Light therapy system and method

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20080275533A1 (en) * 2007-05-04 2008-11-06 Powell Steven D Display apparatus for providing information and therapeutic light
US20120330387A1 (en) * 2010-01-21 2012-12-27 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Control device, wearable device and lighting system for light therapy purposes
US20150062892A1 (en) * 2013-08-29 2015-03-05 Soraa, Inc. Circadian friendly led light source
US20170231058A1 (en) * 2014-08-04 2017-08-10 Innosys, Inc. Lighting Systems
US20170303818A1 (en) * 2008-07-08 2017-10-26 Proteus Digital Health, Inc. State characterization based on multi-variate data fusion techniques
US20170368210A1 (en) * 2016-06-24 2017-12-28 Soraa, Inc. Bactericidal light source with high quality of light
US20180056027A1 (en) * 2015-03-19 2018-03-01 Philips Lighting Holding B.V. Bio hue lamp

Family Cites Families (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7648649B2 (en) * 2005-02-02 2010-01-19 Lumination Llc Red line emitting phosphors for use in led applications
WO2012024243A1 (en) * 2010-08-16 2012-02-23 Photothera, Inc. Minimally invasive low level light therapy for neurological disorders
US10328276B2 (en) * 2014-02-14 2019-06-25 Applied Biophotonics Ltd. Sinusoidal drive system and method for phototherapy
US20170105265A1 (en) * 2014-05-27 2017-04-13 Laurence P. Sadwick Lighting Systems
KR102107669B1 (en) * 2015-06-24 2020-05-07 가부시끼가이샤 도시바 White light source system
US9844116B2 (en) * 2015-09-15 2017-12-12 Biological Innovation & Optimization Systems, LLC Systems and methods for controlling the spectral content of LED lighting devices
WO2017131693A1 (en) * 2016-01-28 2017-08-03 Ecosense Lighting Inc Compositions for led light conversions
KR102226170B1 (en) * 2016-06-03 2021-03-09 무스코 코포레이션 Apparatus, method and system for providing circadian lighting tunable with constant perceived brightness and color
US11338107B2 (en) * 2016-08-24 2022-05-24 Delos Living Llc Systems, methods and articles for enhancing wellness associated with habitable environments
US10595376B2 (en) * 2016-09-13 2020-03-17 Biological Innovation & Optimization Systems, LLC Systems and methods for controlling the spectral content of LED lighting devices
WO2018106734A1 (en) * 2016-12-05 2018-06-14 Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. Systems and methods for controlling color temperature
WO2018130403A1 (en) * 2017-01-12 2018-07-19 Philips Lighting Holding B.V. Lighting system that maintains the melanopic dose during dimming or color tuning

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20080275533A1 (en) * 2007-05-04 2008-11-06 Powell Steven D Display apparatus for providing information and therapeutic light
US20170303818A1 (en) * 2008-07-08 2017-10-26 Proteus Digital Health, Inc. State characterization based on multi-variate data fusion techniques
US20120330387A1 (en) * 2010-01-21 2012-12-27 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Control device, wearable device and lighting system for light therapy purposes
US20150062892A1 (en) * 2013-08-29 2015-03-05 Soraa, Inc. Circadian friendly led light source
US20180311464A1 (en) * 2013-08-29 2018-11-01 Soraa, Inc. Circadian-friendly led light source
US20170231058A1 (en) * 2014-08-04 2017-08-10 Innosys, Inc. Lighting Systems
US20180056027A1 (en) * 2015-03-19 2018-03-01 Philips Lighting Holding B.V. Bio hue lamp
US20170368210A1 (en) * 2016-06-24 2017-12-28 Soraa, Inc. Bactericidal light source with high quality of light

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2613072A (en) * 2021-10-26 2023-05-24 Five Create Ltd Apparatus for emitting light for therapeutic purposes
GB2613072B (en) * 2021-10-26 2024-04-24 Five Create Ltd Apparatus for emitting light for therapeutic purposes
EP4268708A1 (en) * 2022-04-28 2023-11-01 Tridonic GmbH & Co. KG Lighting module
WO2023208695A1 (en) * 2022-04-28 2023-11-02 Tridonic Gmbh & Co Kg Lighting module

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2020097576A1 (en) 2020-05-14
WO2020097580A1 (en) 2020-05-14
WO2020097575A1 (en) 2020-05-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11308849B2 (en) Display lighting systems with circadian effects
US20210060353A1 (en) Panel systems with circadian lighting
US20220272820A1 (en) Dynamic display lighting systems with bioactive lighting
WO2020097579A1 (en) Display lighting systems with bioactive lighting
US11783748B2 (en) Display lighting systems with bioactive lighting
US11938339B2 (en) Switchable bioactive lighting
EP2164568B1 (en) System for providing illumination and physiological stimuli
US20210290973A1 (en) Circadian optimized polychromatic light
WO2019139635A1 (en) Multi-channel systems for providing tunable light with high color rendering
US11988864B2 (en) Systems and methods for lighting an e-paper display
WO2019140306A1 (en) Two-channel tunable lighting systems with controllable equivalent melanopic lux and correlated color temperature outputs
KR100973078B1 (en) White light illumination device using light emitting diodes and color temperature control method
US20210315083A1 (en) Circadian outdoor equivalency metric for assessing photic environment and history
US12073775B2 (en) Display lighting systems with bioactive lighting
US20220005404A1 (en) Bioactive panel lighting systems
US20240032167A1 (en) Device, method and system for biologically balanced lighting
US20210402210A1 (en) Multi-channel bioactive lighting
KR20120050781A (en) White light illumination device using light emitting diodes and color temperature control method
US20240312384A1 (en) Display lighting systems with circadian effects
US20140265926A1 (en) Illumination apparatus with gradually changeable color temperatures
WO2023112392A1 (en) Light-emitting device
Adams An Investigation of the Operational and Design Characteristics of Circadian Lighting Systems
Adams et al. An Investigation of the Operational and Design Characteristics of Circadian Lighting Systems-Report

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19881368

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19881368

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1